eden valley-watkins public schoolsjscatesconstruction.com/files/evw_p1_spec_vol_2.pdf · 3. astm...

Project Manual for the construction of:

Eden Valley-Watkins Public Schools 2019 Facility Upgrades Eden Valley / Watkins, Minnesota

Independent School District #463

Volume 2 – Divisions 21 - 33

Date: March 4, 2019

Commission No.: 483901

401 Second Avenue North; Suite 206

Minneapolis, MN 55401

(612) 332-1401

3315 Roosevelt Road, Suite 100

St. Cloud, MN 56301

(320) 251-0262 Fax (320) 251-5749

Eden Valley-Watkins Public Schools

2019 Facility Upgrades Eden Valley / Watkins, Minnesota

Comm. No. 483901

WENDEL

SECTION 000020 - CERTIFICATION PAGE Page 1

SECTION 000020 - CERTIFICATION PAGE

PROJECT: Eden Valley-Watkins Public Schools 2019 Facility Upgrades Eden Valley / Watkins Minnesota

ARCHITECT'S

CERTIFICATION:

I hereby certify that Divisions 02 through 14 of this Specification were prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the laws of e State of Minnesota.

Name: James A. Wilson, Architect Signature: ___________________________________________________ Date: March 4, 2019 Registration No. 19311

STRUCTURAL

ENGINEER'S

CERTIFICATION:

I hereby certify that Division 03 through 05 of this Specification were prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota.

Name: Sean R. Noren, P.E. Signature: ___________________________________________________ Date: Date: March 4, 2019 Registration No. 44634

MECHANICAL

ENGINEER'S

CERTIFICATION:

I hereby certify that Divisions 21 through 23 of this Specification were prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota.

Name: Michael S. Dolejs, P.E. Signature: ___________________________________________________ Date: Date: March 4, 2019 Registration No. 24659

ELECTRICAL

ENGINEER'S

CERTIFICATION:


Name: Michael S. Dolejs, P.E. Signature: ___________________________________________________ Date: Date: March 4, 2019 Registration No. 24659

CIVIL

ENGINEER'S

CERTIFICATION


Name: Eric G. Meyer, P.E. Signature: ___________________________________________________ Date: Date: March 4, 2019 Registration No. 44592

END OF SECTION 000020


2019 Facility Upgrades

Eden Valley / Watkins, Minnesota

Comm. No. 483901

WENDEL

SECTION 000200 – TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page 1

APPENDIX TO DOCUMENT: 000020-APP-1 CERTIFICATION CLARIFICATION

Part 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The following Project Manual Documents and Specification Sections have been provided and

incorporated by the Construction Manager, R.A.Morton and Associates and are not covered

under the Architect and Engineer Certifications.

B. 000020 Certification Clarifications

000300 Advertisement to Bid 001000 Instruction to Bidders 003000 Bid Form 003090 Project Schedule & Conditions 003100 Preliminary Schedules 004400 Project References & Qualifications 004420 Responsible Contractor Requirements 005200 Agreement Forms 006200 Application for Payment Form 007000 AIA General Conditions A232 - 2009 Edition 010100 Summary of Work 010250 Payment Procedures 010400 Project Management and Coordination 012000 Project Meetings 013000 Submittals 013500 Materials and Equipment 014200 References Standards & Definitions 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 015100 Safety 016000 Owner-Furnished Products 017000 Contract Closeout 017300 Field Engineering 017320 Cutting, Patching & Demolition 017400 Warranties 017500 Demonstration and Training 017820 Operation & Maintenance Data

C. Certifications by Architect, Civil Engineer, Mechanical Engineer, Electrical Engineer and

Structural Engineer are for all remaining Project Manual Documents, Sections and Plans.





Comm. No. 483901

WENDEL


Page 1

EDEN VALLEY-WATKINS PUBLIC SCHOOLS

2019 FACILITY UPGRADES

SECTION 000200 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

000010 PROJECT TITLE SHEET

000020 CERTIFICATION

000020-APP-1 CERTIFICATION CLARIFICATION

000200 TABLE OF CONTENTS

000300 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

001000 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

003000 BID FORM

003090 PROJECT SCHEDULE & CONDITIONS

003100 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE

004400 PROJECT REFERENCES & QUALIFICATIONS

004420 RESPONSIBLE CONTRACTOR FORM

005200 AGREEMENT FORMS

006200 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT FORM

006320 PRE-BID SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

007000 AIA GENERAL CONDITIONS A232 – 2009 EDITION

009000E GEOTECHNICAL REPORT - EDEN VALLEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

009000W GEOTECHNICAL REPORT - WATKINS ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

010100 SUMMARY OF THE WORK

010250 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

010300 ALTERNATES

010400 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

012000 PROJECT MEETINGS

013000 SUBMITTALS

013500 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

014200 REFERENCES STANDARDS & DEFINITIONS

014400 SPECIAL STRUCTURAL TESTING & INSPECTION SCHEDULE

015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

015100 SAFETY

016000 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

017000 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

017300 FIELD ENGINEERING

017320 CUTTING, PATCHING & DEMOLITION

017400 WARRANTIES

017500 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

017820 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE DATA




Comm. No. 483901

WENDEL


Page 2

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

035416 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

042000 UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS

051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL

053100 STEEL DECKING

054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

055000 METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061010 ROOF-RELATED ROUGH CARPENTRY

061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

061600 SHEATHING

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

072100 THERMAL INSULATION

072119 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION

072726 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER

074213 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS

075419 PVC ROOFING

076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

078400 FIRESTOPPING

079200 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

087100 DOOR HARDWARE

088000 GLAZING




Comm. No. 483901

WENDEL


Page 3

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

092900 GYPSUM BOARD

093000 TILING

095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

096813 TILE CARPETING

096816 SHEET CARPETING

099000 PAINTING

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

102113 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

102123 CUBICLE CURTAIN AND TRACK

102800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

107527 FLAGPOLES

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT – NOT USED

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

123213 WOOD VENEER-FACED CASEWORK

123623 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS

123661 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE TOPS AND WINDOW SILLS

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION – NOT USED

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT – NOT USED

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

(Fire Suppression Contractor shall refer to Division 23 Specification Sections 230500, 230529,

230553, and 230700 for common Fire Suppression/HVAC/Plumbing Requirements)

210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

211313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS




Comm. No. 483901

WENDEL


Page 4

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

(Plumbing Contractor shall refer to Division 23 Specification Sections 230500, 230529, 230553, and

230700 for common Fire Suppression/HVAC/Plumbing Requirements)

221100 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SPECIALTIES

221300 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE AND SPECIALTIES

221400 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE AND SPECIALTIES

224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES

DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230500 BASIC FIRE PROTECTION, PLUMBING AND HVAC REQUIREMENTS

230529 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND FIRESTOPPING FOR PLUMBING, FIRE

PROTECTION, HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC, PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230700 HVAC AND

PLUMBING INSULATION

230700 HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION

230923 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

230933 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

230993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR HVAC CONTROLS

232113 HYDRONIC PIPING

232114 HEPEXA HYDRONIC DISTRIBUTION PIPING

232116 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

232126 GLYCOL SYSTEM

232500 HVAC WATER TREATMENT

233100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

233327 SOUND ATTENUATORS AND DUCT LAGGING

233405 HVAC FANS

233600 VAV-AIR TERMINAL UNITS

233700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

234000 HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES

238103 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

238105 EQUIPMENT SCREENS

238200 TERMINAL HEATING UNITS

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

260501 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER

260502 CUTTING AND PATCHING

260503 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS

260504 FIRESTOPPING

260505 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

260519 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE




Comm. No. 483901

WENDEL


Page 5

260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING

260529 SUPPORTING DEVICES

260532 CONDUIT

260533 SURFACE RACEWAYS

260534 BOXES

260535 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

260553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

260923 DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS

262416 PANELBOARDS

262716 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES

262726 WIRING DEVICES

262813 FUSES

262819 ENCLOSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES

262913 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS

262916 ENCLOSED CONTACTORS AND RELAYS

265100 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES – L.E.D.

265800 DUAL TECHNOLOGY OCCUPANCY SENSORS

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

270533 TELEPHONE, DATA, SURVEILLANCE, SECURITY ACCESS AND PAGING

RACEWAY SYSTEMS

275123 PAGING SYSTEMS

275313 CLOCK SYSTEM – WIRELESS

275000 VOICE AND DATA CABLING

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

281300 SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEM

281310 VIDEO ENTRY, ACCESS INTERCOM SYSTEM

282300 CCTV SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

283100 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

311000 SITE CLEARING

312000 EARTHWORK

312500 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL

313000 GEOTEXTILES & FABRIC

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

320500 AGGREGATES

320700 FULL DEPTH RECLAMATION

321000 PLANT MIX BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT

322000 CONCRETE PAVEMENT

322400 PAVEMENT STRIPING




Comm. No. 483901

WENDEL


Page 6

322600 SIGNS

324000 ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT

325000 FENCES & GATES

325800 LANDSCAPING

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

331000 WATER DISTRIBUTION

334000 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM


Eden Valley-Watkins Public Schools 2019 Facility Upgrades

Eden Valley / Watkins, Minnesota Comm. No. 483901

DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 210000 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

SPECIFICATION INDEX Page 1

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

210500 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 211313 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

END OF SECTION



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 210000 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

SPECIFICATION INDEX Page 2

BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 210500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Page 1

SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 03 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Execution requirements for

inserts and sleeves specified by this section. 2. Section 211313 – Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 2. ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings - Socket-Welding and Threaded. 3. ASME B16.25 - Buttwelding Ends. 4. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 5. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 6. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 7. ASME B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings. 8. ASME B36.10M - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-

Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A135 - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe. 3. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought

Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 4. ASTM A795 - Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use. 5. ASTM B247 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Die

Forgings, Hand Forgings, and Rolled Ring Forgings. 6. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.

C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C110 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Grey-Iron

Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in. for Water and Other Liquids. 2. AWWA C111 - American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for

Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.





3. AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.

E. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 24 - Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.

F. Underwriter Laboratories, Inc.: 1. UL 1887 - Fire Tests of Plastic Sprinkler Pipe for Visible Flame and Smoke

Characteristics.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts lists.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13 State of MN standards

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Division 01 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place.

C. Furnish cast iron and steel valves with temporary protective coating.





D. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B. Furnish One year manufacturer warranty for basic fire suppression materials and methods.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 VALVES

A. Gate Valve Manufacturers: (3" and Above) 1. Stockham 2. Nibco 3. Kennedy 4. American Valve 5. Crane 6. Milwaukee

B. Gate Valves: 1. 3" and Over: Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with bolted bonnet, solid

bronze wedge, flanged ends, iron body indicator post assembly.

C. Globe Valve Manufacturers: 1. Keystone 2. Ohio Brass 3. Stockham

D. Globe Valves: 1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and hand

wheel, inside screw, renewable rubber disc, threaded ends, with back seating capacity.

2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc.

E. Ball Valve Manufacturers: 2-Piece 1. Jamesbury - 2000 2. Apollo - #77/80/82 3. Worcester 4. Watts - B-6080 5. Nibco - T-585-70 6. American - 2A





7. Milwaukee - BA475B 8. Hammond - 8901

F. Ball Valves: 1. Up to and including 3 inches: Bronze two piece body, or stainless steel ball,

teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends with union.

G. Butterfly Valve Manufacturers: 1. Victaulic 2. Kennedy 3. Nibco 4. Central 5. Watchman 6. Mueller 7. Milwaukee Butterball 8. Anvil Gruvlock

H. Butterfly Valves: (3" and Above) 1. Bronze Body: Stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded or grooved

ends, extended neck, hand wheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and built-in tamper proof switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC.

2. Cast or Ductile Iron Body: Cast or ductile iron, chrome or nickel plated ductile iron or aluminum bronze disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or grooved ends. With extended neck, hand wheel and gear drive and integral indicating device and external tamper switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC.

I. Check Valve Manufacturers: 1. Stockham 2. Nibco 3. Kennedy 4. Mueller 5. Keystone 6. Ames

J. Check Valves: 1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body and swing disc, rubber seat, threaded

ends. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing check with rubber disc, renewable

disc and seat, flanged ends with automatic ball check. 3. 4 inches and Over: Iron body, bronze disc with stainless steel spring, resilient

seal, threaded, wafer, or flanged ends. 4. Over 2” Riser Check: Iron body, grooved end, single clapper, and dual springs

for non slamming operation.

K. Drain Valve Manufacturers: 1. Apollo





2. Stockham 3. Ohio Brass 4. Milwaukee - BA100H

L. Drain Valves: 1. Compression Stop: Bronze with hose thread nipple and cap. 2. Ball Valve: Brass with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread.

2.2 ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B; ASTM A135; ASTM A795; ASME B36.10; black; (wet system) weight specified in NFPA 13.

B. Ferrous Piping ( Welded and Seamless as per NFPA 13, Table 3-3.1, Pipe or Tube Materials).

C. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F442. CPVC pipe to be used above concealed ceilings only and installed as per NFPA 13. Pipe shall be manufactured by Blazemaster or approved equal prior to bidding. Pipe must be approved for fire protection.

2.3 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Victaulic 2. Anvil/Gruvlok

B. Unions, Flanges, and Couplings: 1. Unions: 150 psi malleable iron for threaded ferrous piping. 2. Flanges: 150 psi forged steel slip on flanges for ferrous piping. 3. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and

lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; “C” shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.





3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems.

B. Install Work in accordance with State of MN standards.

C. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.

D. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Install pipe sleeve at piping penetrations through partitions, walls, and floors. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to maintain fire resistance equivalent to fire separation. Caulk & Seal all openings located above finished ceilings. Caulk, Seal and provide split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed.

G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

H. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Install eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level.

I. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.

J. Where more than one piping system material is specified, install compatible system components and joints. Install flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing.

K. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.

L. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior to after installation.

M. Install Supervised Butterfly/Gate/Ball valves for shut-off or isolating service.

N. Install drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.

O. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and install through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.

P. Refer to manufacturer’s literature for installation requirements for piping located in return air plenum ceilings.





3.3 CLEANING

A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Clean entire system after other construction is complete.

END OF SECTION





BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 211313 – WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Page 1

SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wet-pipe sprinkler system, system design, installation, and certification.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230500 - Basic Fire Protection, Plumbing, and HVAC requirements.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Eden Valley Elementary – The existing building is currently sprinkled. Fire Protection Contractor shall extend existing system to serve the new building addition. Relocate/add sprinkler heads in all areas receiving new ceiling work. Modify piping as required to accommodate new HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical in all remodeled areas.

B. Watkins Elementary - The existing building is served by a combination 3” domestic and fire service. The Boiler Room is currently the only space sprinkled. A new combination 6” domestic and fire service shall be installed by the Plumbing Contractor. Fire Protection Contractor shall install a double check valve backflow preventer, fire riser assembly, and sprinkle remaining building. Connect to existing piping serving Boiler Room, modify heads as required to meet the current requirements of NFPA 13.

C. Refer to HVAC Plans for new ductwork and Plumbing Plans for new piping layout and revisions. See Electrical Plans for lighting layouts and Architect's Plans for ceiling heights and new ceiling layouts. It will be Contractor's responsibility to familiarize themselves with all the plans and existing conditions so that all modifications will integrate all trades and work scheduled to be done. Sprinkler Contractor must visit the site prior to bidding project to inspect conditions in all affected areas. Because there are many spaces above the ceilings that will be tight, all sprinkler work shall be coordinated with all trades, contractors and existing conditions prior to developing shop drawings or starting piping installation or modifications.

D. The design and method of installation of the fire protection work shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents, current editions of the Minnesota State Building Code (SBE), the Minnesota State Fire Code (SFC) and National Protection Association Standards (NFPA 13) that contain reference to or supplementary material on sprinkler systems along with the requirements of the owner's insurance authority, the State and the Fire Department.




E. Provide hydraulically designed system to NFPA 13 light hazard and ordinary hazard, Group 1 occupancy requirements as required.

F. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from current onsite water flow test data.

G. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system.

H. The automatic fire extinguishing system must be installed as per IBC chapter 9 as amended.

I. Provide fire department connections as indicated on Drawings. Verify location with authority having jurisdiction.

J. All sprinkler piping shall be concealed above suspended ceilings where applicable.

K. CPVC sprinkler piping shall only be used in spaces with concealed ceilings.

L. Sprinkler contractor shall replace any existing and/or new ceiling tile damaged during piping installation.

M. Provide sprinkler coverage under all equipment or areas with 34” or more space underneath them.

N. Provide heavy duty type wire guards on heads with ceiling heights of 7’-2” or less. Provide heavy duty type wire guards on heads in all recreational areas such as Gymnasiums, etc.

O. Provide quick response heads in all light hazard areas.

P. Verify locations of existing sprinkler heads. Relocate or add new heads as necessary to meet state and local codes.

Q. Areas subject to freezing conditions shall be provided with a non-freeze system that meets ANSI/NFPA standards and all state and local codes. All areas requiring more than (2) sprinklers shall be designed with complete dry pipe sprinkler systems

R. Where sprinkler piping is installed in spaces with exposed structures, piping shall be run parallel with lighting.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of finished ceiling areas indicating sprinkler locations coordinated with ceiling installation. Indicate detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls.




C. Product Data: Submit data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections.

D. Design Data: Submit hydraulic design calculations and detailed pipe layout. Submittals must be signed and sealed by Engineer or NICET level 4 certified individual.

E. Submit all shops with Mechanical Contractors stamp of approval with signature for approval by; 1. Local Building Inspector and Fire Chief, 2. Owner’s insurance, 3. State Fire Marshall, 4. State Building Codes Department and, 5. Architect/ Engineer in this order.

F. Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric connections to equipment specified by this section

G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot.


A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13 and State of MN Standards.



A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Store products in shipping containers until installation.

C. Furnish piping with temporary inlet and outlet caps until installation.




1.8 WARRANTY

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B. Furnish one year warranty for all materials and workmanship.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish extra sprinklers under provisions of NFPA 13.

C. Furnish suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type.

D. Furnish metal storage cabinet.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SPRINKLERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Grinnel Corp. 2. Reliable Sprinkler Corp. 3. Viking Corp. 4. Star 5. Central 6. Tyco

B. Furnish materials in accordance with State of MN standards.

C. Suspended Ceiling Type: 1. Type: Concealed pendant type with screw-on escutcheon plate. 2. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Color to match ceiling tiles. 3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

D. Exposed Area Type: 1. Type: Standard upright type, Provide guards in recreational areas. 2. Finish: Match existing. 3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

E. Side wall Type: 1. Type: Semi-recessed horizontal side wall type with matching escutcheon plate. 2. Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Fusible Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.




F. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to automatically actuate water motor alarm and electric alarm, with pressure retard chamber and variable pressure trim; with test and drain valve.

B. Water Motor Alarm: Hydraulically operated impeller type alarm with aluminum alloy red enameled gong and motor housing, nylon bearings, and inlet strainer.

C. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated red enameled gong with pressure alarm switch.

D. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two contacts.

E. Fire Department Connections: 1. Type: Flush mounted wall type with brass finish. 2. Outlets: Two-way with fire department thread size. Threaded dust-cap and chain

of matching material and finish. 3. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, outside. 4. Label: "Sprinkler - Fire Department Connection"

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with NFPA 13.

B. Install Work in accordance with State Municipality of standards.

C. Furnish Post Indicator as required by authority having jurisdiction.

D. Install approved check valve assembly at sprinkler system water source connection.

E. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent Siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle.

F. Locate outside alarm-gong on building wall as indicated on Drawings.

G. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.

H. Install piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.

I. Install guards on sprinklers in rooms with ceiling heights of 7’-2” or less. Provide heavy duty type wire guards on heads in all recreational areas such as Gymnasiums, etc.

J. Hydrostatically test entire system.




K. Require test be witnessed by Authority having jurisdiction.

L. Sprinkler heads shall be symmetrical in room and shall be 6” or greater from any grid.

M. If Test Drain does not discharge over a hard surface, provide splash block under discharge of drain.

3.2 DESIGN COORDINATION

A. The layout of fire protection sprinkler piping shall take into account any and all conflicts that may exist between structural conditions, ductwork layouts and other piping in the ceiling space.

B. The locations and depths of all lighting fixtures shall be verified prior to attempting a fire protection sprinkler piping layout.

C. Any necessary field installation piping revisions necessary to avoid conflicts between the fire protection/sprinkler piping and any or all of the items listed above shall be done at no additional cost to the owner.

D. Sprinkler Contractor to provide all necessary regular and/or fire rated access doors for any required access in finished spaces. Refer to Division 08, Specification Section 08000.

E. Mechanical and electrical drawings will be made available to the fire protection sprinkler contractor via e-mail in AutoCad Format.

3.3 PAINTING

A. Prepare surface for painting by removing rust scale and dirt from surfaces to be painted. Protect existing surfaces from misplaced paint.

B. Paint will be furnished by others.

3.4 EXISTING CEILINGS ( WHERE NOTED ON DRAWINGS )

A. Existing finished ceilings systems are to be protected from damage from the work of this Contract.

B. Remove and replace acoustical panels as necessary for installation of the piping above the finished ceilings. Care shall be taken so as not break, scuff or stain existing acoustical panels.

C. The acoustical concealed grid ceiling system shall be removed and replaced by an experienced acoustical ceiling contractor. Tile edges damaged during removal or re-installation shall be replaced.




D. Existing plaster ceilings that are damaged by the work of this contract shall be repaired to match existing surface texture and color.

E. All acoustical ceiling panels that are damaged by the work of this contract shall be replaced with units that match existing.

3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Verify signal devices are installed and connected to fire alarm system.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.

3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction.

B. Apply masking tape or paper cover to protect concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons not receiving field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers with new.

END OF SECTION




BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 220000 - PLUMBING SPECIFICATION INDEX Page 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

(Plumbing Contractor shall refer to Division 23 Specification Sections 230500,

230529, 230553, and 230700 for common HVAC/Plumbing Requirements) 221100 Facility Water Distribution and Specialties 221300 Facility Sanitary Sewerage and Specialties 221400 Facility Storm Drainage and Specialties 224000 Plumbing Fixtures

END OF SECTION



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 220000 - PLUMBING SPECIFICATION INDEX Page 2

BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 221100 – FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SPECIALTIES Page 1

SECTION 221100

FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Domestic water piping, below grade. 2. Domestic water piping, above grade. 3. Unions and flanges. 4. Valves. 5. Domestic water shut-off valve. 6. Pressure gauges. 7. Wall Hydrants. 8. Water hammer arrestors.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 03 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of

concrete house keeping pads specified by this section. 2. Division 07 - Firestopping: Product requirements for firestopping for placement

by this section. 3. Division 08 - Access Doors and Frames: Product requirements for access doors

for placement by this section. 4. Division 09 - Painting and Coating: Product and execution requirements for

painting specified by this section. 5. Section 230500 - Basic Fire Protection, Plumbing and HVAC Requirements. 6. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports and Firestopping for HVAC Piping,

Plumbing Piping and Equipment 7. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping, Plumbing Piping, and

Equipment. 8. Section 230700 - HVAC and Plumbing Insulation. 9. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for

electric connections to equipment specified by this section. 10. Division 31 - Soils for Earthwork: Soils for backfill in trenches. 11. Division 31 - Aggregates for Earthwork: Aggregate for backfill in trenches. 12. Division 31 - Excavation: Product and execution requirements for excavation and

backfill required by this section. 13. Division 31 - Trenching: Execution requirements for trenching required by this

section. 14. Division 31 - Fill: Requirements for backfill to be placed by this section. 15. Division 33 - Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution: Product and execution

requirements for disinfection of domestic water piping beyond 5 feet of building.




1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings. 3. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. 4. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. 5. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element.

B. American Society of Sanitary Engineering: 1. ASSE 1010 - Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters. 2. ASSE 1011 - Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. 3. ASSE 1012 - Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer with

Intermediate Atmospheric Vent. 4. ASSE 1013 - Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle

Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers.

5. ASSE 1019 - Performance Requirements for Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant, Automatic Draining Type.

6. ASSE 5015 - Performance Requirements for Testing Double Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies (DC) and Double Check Fire Protection Backflow Prevention Assemblies (RPDF).

C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-

Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought

Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 3. ASTM A395/A395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-

Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 4. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 5. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 6. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes. 7. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 8. ASTM B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for

General Applications. 9. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of

Thermometers. 10. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe

Hangers.

D. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.

E. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C104 - American National Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for

Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water.




2. AWWA C105 - American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.

3. AWWA C110 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Grey-Iron Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids.

4. AWWA C111 - American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.

5. AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.

6. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. 7. AWWA C702 - Cold-Water Meters - Compound Type. 8. AWWA C706 - Direct-Reading, Remote-Registration Systems for Cold-Water

Meters. 9. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 in. through 12 in., for

Water Distribution. 10. AWWA C901 - Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2 in. through 3

in., for Water Service. 11. AWWA C950 - Fiberglass Pressure Pipe. 12. AWWA M6 - Water Meters - Selection, Installation, Testing, and Maintenance.

F. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves. 2. MSS SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 3. MSS SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 4. MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 5. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 6. MSS SP 85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded. 7. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and

Flared Ends.

G. Plumbing and Drainage Institute: 1. PDI WH201 - Water Hammer Arrester Standard.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit

manufacturer's catalog information. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for

each service. 3. Domestic Water Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information,

component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. 4. Pumps: Submit pump type, capacity, certified pump curves showing pump

performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.




C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for pumps, valves and accessories.




B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves and equipment.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts list, exploded assembly views and recommended maintenance intervals.

D. Maintain one copy of each document on site.



B. Accept valves and equipment on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Division 01 - Product Requirements.

B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.8 WARRANTY





1.9 LEAD FREE REQUIREMENTS

A. All materials that contact potable water shall be lead free. Lead free refers to the wetted surface of pipe, fittings, valves and fixtures in potable water systems that have a weighted average lead content ≤0.25% per the Federal Safe Drinking Water Act.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. Cast Iron Pipe: AWWA C151. 1. Fittings: AWWA C111, ductile iron, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with 3/4 inch diameter rods.

2.2 WATER PIPING, COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS ABOVE GRADE

A. Pipe: ASTM B88: Type L, hard temper. Soft temper only as called for. Plans show copper tube sizes.

B. Tees, Elbows, Reducers: Wrought, ASME B16.22 or cast bronze, ASME B16.18; solder end connections.

C. Unions and Flanges: 2 in. and smaller use unions, solder type, cast bronze, ground joint 150 lb. swp: 2-1/2 in. and over use flanges, cast bronze, companion type, ASME drilled solder connection, 150 lb. swp.

D. Solder Materials: No-lead solder using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel.

2.3 WATER PIPING, COPPER TUBE AND PRESS FITTINGS ABOVE GRADE

A. Tubing Standard: Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B75 or ASTM B88

B. Fitting Standard: Copper fittings shall conform to ASME B16.18, ASME B16.22 or ASME B16.26

C. Press Fitting: Copper press fittings shall conform to the material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. O-rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM.

D. Ball valves with Press Connections where Copper Press piping systems are allowed shall be Lead Free, Brass Body in accordance with ASTM B283 Alloy C37700, fully annealed. Ball shall be Chrome-Plated Brass in Full Port design with a smooth cylindrical port in ball ( no hollow balls allowed ). Valve must mate with standard Copper Tubing (K or L) conforming to ASTM B88, assembled by tooling recommended by the Copper Press Fitting manufacturer. The Ball Valve must have factory installed O-rings furnished in EPDM material of type and size compliant with




the Copper Press Fittings. The ball valve must be certified to NSF 61 and MSS SP110 in all applicable areas.

E. Quality Standard: Milwaukee UltraPure Model UPBA-480B, UPBA-490B or approved equal.

2.4 GROOVED FITTINGS AND COUPLINGS (FOR COPPER PIPE SIZES 2-1/2" AND ABOVE.)

A. Copper Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B75 copper tube or ASTM B152 wrought copper or ASTM B584 cast bronze fittings with copper tubing sized grooved ends designed to accept grooved couplings (flaring of tube and fitting ends to IPS dimensions is not permitted).

B. Grooved-End Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections cast with bolt pads, coated with copper-colored enamel, EHP-synthetic rubber suitable for operating temperatures to +250°F and bolts and nuts. Installation-ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly. Victaulic Style 607 or Anvil Gruvlok CTS 6400.

C. Grooved-End Tube Flange Adapters: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. Ductile-iron casting, coated with copper-colored enamel, flat-faced, for engaging into roll grooved copper tube and fittings and bolting directly to flanges with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt hole patterns. Victaulic Style 641, Gruvlok CTS 6084.

D. Grooved-End Tube Mechanical-T®: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. Bronze upper housing and copper-colored enamel coated ductile iron lower housing, threaded outlet and locating collar, EPDM synthetic rubber gasket suitable for hot and cold water and bolts and nuts. Victaulic Style 622.

2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DOMESTIC WATER LOW LEAD SHUT-OFF VALVE

A. Milwaukee Valve Company

2.6 DOMESTIC WATER LOW LEAD SHUT-OFF VALVE

A. Ductile iron body with lug pattern, EPDM liner, aluminum bronze disc material, electric operator, and bare stem.

B. Valve actuator shall be 120V motorized open-spring close on power failure. Actuator shall be 1/4 turn to operate the specified butterfly or ball valve. Actuator to be Milwaukee Valve MC Series spring return electric or equal. Contact R.G. Higgins and Assoc., Inc. @ 763/561-7777.

2.7 UNIONS AND FLANGES

A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller:




1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded. 2. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end,

copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.

B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, forged steel, slip-on flanges. 2. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets.

C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction and expansion; "C" shape composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe.

2.8 GATE VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Crane - 465-1/2 2. Hammond - IR1140 3. Milwaukee - F2885-M 4. NIBCO - F-617-0 5. American - 3FG

B. Over 3 Inches: Cast iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, hand-wheel, outside screw and yoke, solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, flanged or grooved ends. Furnish chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor.

2.9 BALL VALVES - FULL PORT TYPE A. 3” and smaller: Two piece bronze body; sweat or threaded ends, chrome plated bronze ball;

glass filled Teflon seat; Teflon packing and threaded packing nut; blowout-proof stem; 600 psig WOG. Provide valve stem extensions for valves installed in all piping with insulation. Apollo 70LF-200, Hammond UP8511, Milwaukee UPBA150, Nibco S580-80-LF, Watts LFB-6081G2

2.10 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES

A. 2” and smaller: Bronze body, sweat or threaded ends, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, stainless steel center guide pin, Class 125, teflon seat unless only bronze available. Milwaukee UP-548, Conbraco 61 series, Nibco S480-Y-LF, Watts LF600 or equal.

2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Manufacturers: 1. H.O. Trerice Model 800B. 2. Substitutions: Approved equal prior to bid.




B. Gage: ASME B40.1, with bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front calibration adjustment, black scale on white background. 1. Case: Steel, black finished, stem-mounted-flangeless. 2. Bourdon Tube: Brass. 3. Dial Size: 2 inch diameter. 4. Mid-Scale Accuracy: +/- 1.6 percent. 5. Scale: Psi

2.12 PRESSURE GAUGE TAPS

A. Manufacturers: 1. H.O. Trerice Model 872. 2. Substitutions: Approved equal prior to bid.

B. Needle Valve: Brass, 1/4 inch NPT for minimum 300 psi.

C. Ball Valve: Brass, 1/4 inch NPT for 250 psi.

D. Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch NPT connections.

2.13 POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT METERS (LIQUID)

A. Water meters shall be salvaged and reinstalled by the Plumbing Contractor. Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and bypass requirements of the public works department.

2.14 FREEZE PROOF WALL HYDRANTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Woodford 2. Zurn 3. Josam 4. Ancon 5. Mifab 6. J.R. Smith

B. ANSI/ASSE 1019; Wall Hydrant shall be bronze nickel plated quarter turn self-draining non-freeze hyrant with hose connection, integral vacuum breaker, “T” handle key and stainless steel box with full 180 degree cover opening. Installation shall be thru a 6” diameter core drilled hole in precast wall panels. Model # 5509QT-R as manufactured by J.R. Smith.

2.15 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Zurn - Z-1700




B. Stainless steel pre-charged suitable for operation in temperature range of 34 to 300 degrees F and a maximum 125 psi working pressure.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Watkins Elementary School - Provide new combination water and fire protection service complete with double check backflow preventer on fire riser (Double Check Valve by Fire Protection Contractor ) Furnish and install building water meter with by-pass valves and sand strainer, and motor operated shut-off valve w/ 1” bypass. Verify all meter and service requirements with the public works department.

B. Eden Valley Elementary – existing water piping shall be modified as required for remodeled toilet rooms and new building addition.

3.2 COMBINATION SPRINKLER AND WATER SERVICES

A. The combination fire protection/domestic water service shall comply with the backflow protection requirements of AWWA-M14, Chapter 6.

3.3 EXAMINATION

A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.4 PREPARATION


B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

3.5 DOMESTIC WATER SHUT-OFF VALVE

A. The motorized main domestic water shut-off valve shall be normally closed on loss of electric power or signal from the sprinkler system water flow indicator.

3.6 INSTALLATION - METERS

A. Install positive displacement meters in accordance with AWWA M6, with full port isolating valves on inlet and outlet.

3.7 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Install non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.




B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

C. Install piping to maintain headroom without interfering with use of space or taking more space than necessary.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

E. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points.

F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 230700.

H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Division 08.

I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

J. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.

K. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Division 09.

L. Install domestic water piping in accordance with ASME B31.9.

M. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 230529.

N. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 230529.

O. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

P. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

Q. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.

R. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

S. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

T. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.




U. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 7 feet of cover for water service.

V. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly.

W. Install potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, irrigation systems, interior and exterior hose bibs.

X. Pipe relief from valves, back-flow preventers and drains to nearest floor drain.

Y. Test backflow preventers in accordance with ASSE 5015.

Z. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping as shown.

AA. Solder and flux containing less than 0.2 percent lead shall be used. 95-5 tin-antimony or 96-4 tin-silver are approved solders.

BB. All plumbing shall be installed in accordance with the Minnesota Plumbing Code.

CC. All plumbing valves, fittings, or fixtures coming in contact with potable water used for drinking or cooking shall be lead-free. All products shall have a weighted average of less than 0.25 percent lead content per NSF/ANSI standard 61-G.

3.8 INSTALLATION, COPPER PRESS FIT FITTINGS A. Press Connections: Copper Pro-Press type fittings shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer’s installation instructions. The tubing shall be fully inserted into the fitting and the tubing marked at the shoulder of the fitting. The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark on the tubing to assure the tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting. The joints shall be pressed using the tool approved by the manufacturer.

3.9 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. Underground Work (Inside the Buildings Outside Walls) 1. Plumbing Contractor to carry out all excavation, backfilling and compaction of earth

required for the installation of underground lines within the buildings outside walls. 2. All backfill (on excavations inside of the building outside perimeter walls) shall be

vibratory rolled or otherwise compacted to 95 percent of proctor density, tested at the rate of one test per 2500 sq. ft and re-packed and retested where the test results are under.

3. Plumbing Contractor shall note inverts of the sanitary runs inside and outside of the buildings and shall run lines to meet these inverts. Where these lines cross underground foots or foundations the Plumbing Contractor shall provide an oversize steel pipe sleeve before foundations are poured.




B. Refer to General Specification Division 01 for requirements of excavation and backfilling if different than the above. (The most stringent shall apply.)

3.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. As per 2015 Minnesota Plumbing Code 1300.0215, no plumbing work may be covered

prior to completing the required tests and inspections. B. Plumbing Contractor shall verify that the Minnesota Department of Labor and Industry has

reviewed the Drawings for this Project prior to asking for an inspection of the underground piping.

C. Submit certification to Engineer showing that all necessary and required tests were

performed for the entire Project including the following: 1. Water piping

3.11 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

B. Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Division 33.

C. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.

D. Verify pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).

E. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder and tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain residual from 50 to 80 mg/L.

F. Bleed water from outlets to obtain distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets.

G. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

H. When final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.

I. Flush disinfectant from system until residual concentration is equal to incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.

J. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.

END OF SECTION



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 221300 – FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE AND SPECIALTIES Page 1

SECTION 221300

FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE AND SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sanitary sewer piping buried within 5 feet of building. 2. Sanitary sewer and vent piping above grade. 3. Unions and flanges. 4. Floor drains. 5. Cleanouts. 6. Bedding and cover materials.


concrete specified by this section. 2. Division 07 - Firestopping: Product requirements for firestopping for placement


for placement by this section. 4. Division 09 - Painting and Coating: Product and execution requirements for

painting specified by this section. 5. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment:

Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports and firestopping for placement by this section.

6. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping, Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe identification for placement by this section.

7. Division 31 - Soils for Earthwork: Soils for backfill in trenches. 8. Division 31 - Aggregates for Earthwork: Aggregate for backfill in trenches. 9. Division 31 - Excavation: Product and execution requirements for excavation and


section. 11. Division 31 - Fill: Requirements for backfill to be placed by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A112.21.1 - Floor Drains. 2. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 3. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 4. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 5. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings (DWV).




6. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.

7. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 2. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-

Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 4. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought

Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 5. ASTM A395/A395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-

Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 6. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 7. ASTM A746 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe. 8. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 9. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes. 10. ASTM B43 - Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe, Standard

Sizes. 11. ASTM B75 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube. 12. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 13. ASTM B251 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wrought

Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube. 14. ASTM B302 - Standard Specification for Threadless Copper Pipe. 15. ASTM B306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). 16. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe

and Fittings. 17. ASTM C1053 - Standard Specification for Borosilicate Glass Pipe and Fittings

for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Applications. 18. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 19. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic

Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 20. ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-

Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 21. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-

Rated Pipe (SDR Series). 22. ASTM D2464 - Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 23. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic

Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 24. ASTM D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic

Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 25. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 26. ASTM D2661 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene

(ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.




27. ASTM D2662 - Standard Specification for Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.

28. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.

29. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

30. ASTM D2751 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

31. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.

32. ASTM D2996 - Standard Specification for Filament-Wound Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe.

33. ASTM D2997 - Standard Specification for Centrifugally Cast Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.

34. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

35. ASTM D3262 - Standard Specification for Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer Pipe.

36. ASTM D3517 - Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pressure Pipe.

37. ASTM D3754 - Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer and Industrial Pressure Pipe.

38. ASTM D3840 - Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe Fittings for Non-pressure Applications.

39. ASTM F441 – CPVC Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. 40. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining

Plastic Pipe. 41. ASTM F493 – Solvent Cements for CPVC pipe and fittings. 42. ASTM F628 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)

Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe with a Cellular Core. 43. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe

Hangers. 44. ASTM F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical

Couplings for Use in Piping Applications.

C. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 2. MSS SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 3. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 4. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and

Flared Ends.

D. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute: 1. CISPI 301 – Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. 2. CISPI 310 – Specification for Coupling for use in connection with Hubless Cast

Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping applications.




1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes for interceptors, and manholes.

C. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit

manufacturers catalog information. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for

each service. 3. Sanitary Drainage Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information,

component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material and equipment.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.



B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and clean-outs.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit frequency of treatment required for interceptors. Include, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for equipment.



B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.









1.8 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hub-less, Service Weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, CISPI 301 2. Joints: Neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies

conforming to CISPI 310.

B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, Schedule 40, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material, bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint ends.

1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40, PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 Solvent cement.

2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING ABOVE GRADE

A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron, CISPI 301. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies conforming to CISPI 310.

B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2665, PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.3 UNIONS AND FLANGES

A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with soldered joints. 2. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end,

copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 3. PVC Piping: PVC.

B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper

piping; neoprene gaskets for gas service; 1/16 inch thick pre-formed neoprene. 2. PVC Piping: PVC flanges. 3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets.

C. PVC Pipe Materials: For connections to equipment and valves with threaded connections, furnish solvent-weld socket to screwed joint adapters and unions, or ASTM D2464, Schedule 80, threaded, PVC pipe.




D. Grooved and shouldered pipe end couplings: malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular, contraction, and expansion; "C" shape composition sealing gasket; steel bolts, nuts, washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe.

2.4 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Zurn 2. Wade 3. J. R. Smith 4. Mifab 5. Josam

B. Floor Drain FD-1: ASME A112.21.1; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer. Model #ZN415-5B manufactured by Zurn.

2.5 CLEANOUTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Zurn 2. Wade 3. J.R. Smith 4. Mifab

B. Exterior and Unfinished Surfaced Areas (CO-1): Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover. Model ZN1400-2HD manufactured by Zurn.

C. Interior Finished Floor Areas (CO-2): Lacquered cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable nickel-bronze cover, round with scoriated cover in service areas and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas and stamped stainless steel cleanout marker in carpeted areas; Model ZN1400-2 manufactured by Zurn.

D. Interior Finished Wall Areas (CO-3): Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw; Model Z1445-1 manufactured by Zurn.

E. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas (CO-4): Caulked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rain water leaders.

2.6 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS

A. Bedding: Fill Type as specified in Division 31.

B. Cover: Fill Type as specified in Division 31.




C. Soil Backfill from Above Pipe to Finish Grade: Soil Type as specified in Division 31. Subsoil with no rocks over 6 inches in diameter, frozen earth or foreign matter.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Existing sewer services shall be utilized throughout existing building remodels. Remove and replace sanitary sewer service for the Watkins building addition that is located below the new addition. Make connection for sewer services to existing outside sanitary sewer located 5’-0” from building. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.

3.2 EXAMINATION


B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry and not over-excavated.

3.3 PREPARATION




D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.


A. Underground Work (Inside the Buildings Outside Walls) 1. Plumbing Contractor to carry out all excavation, backfilling and compaction of

earth required for the installation of underground lines within the buildings outside walls.

2. All backfill (on excavations inside of the building outside perimeter walls) shall be vibratory rolled or otherwise compacted to 95 percent of proctor density, tested at the rate of one test per 2500 sq. ft and re-packed and retested where the test results are under.

3. Plumbing Contractor shall note inverts of the sanitary runs inside and outside of the buildings and shall run lines to meet these inverts. Where these lines cross underground foots or foundations the Plumbing Contractor shall provide oversize steel pipe sleeves before foundations are poured.




3.5 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. The sanitary sewer and vent piping systems shall be tested as per 2015 Minnesota

Plumbing Code part 723.0. B. As per 2015 Minnesota Plumbing Code 1300.0215, no plumbing work may be covered

prior to completing the required tests and inspections. C. Plumbing Contractor shall verify that the Minnesota Department of Labor and Industry has

reviewed the Drawings for this Project prior to asking for an inspection of the underground piping.

D. Submit certification to Engineer showing that all necessary and required tests were

performed for the entire Project including the following: 1. Sewer/Vent piping

3.6 SEWER AND DRAIN PIPING NEAR WATER PIPING A. All underground sections of building drain and building sewer pipe located within 10 feet

of buried water supply pipe shall be constructed in accordance with 2015 Minnesota Plumbing Code part 720.0

3.7 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Verify connections to existing piping systems size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly.

C. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Division 31.

D. Install pipe to elevation as indicated on Drawings.

E. Install pipe on prepared bedding.

F. Route pipe in straight line.

G. Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe, buried 12 inches below finish grade, above pipe line; coordinate with Division 31.

H. Pipe Cover and Backfilling: 1. Backfill trench in accordance with Division 31. 2. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction

density. 3. After hydrostatic test, evenly backfill entire trench width by hand placing backfill

material and hand tamping in 6 inches compacted layers to 12 inches minimum cover over top of jacket. Compact to 95 percent maximum density.




4. Evenly and continuously backfill remaining trench depth in uniform layers with backfill material.

5. Do not use wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping.

M. Install a cleanout where there is an increase in pipe size from 2 inches to 3 inches and from 3 inches to 4 inches.

3.8 INSTALLATION - PIPING

A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients.

B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Provide clearances at cleanout for snaking drainage system.

C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.

D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.

E. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

F. Install piping to maintain headroom. Do not spread piping, conserve space.

G. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

I. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.

J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

K. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Division 09.

L. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

M. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.

N. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 230529.

O. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.




P. Cleanouts shall be provided where new waste, storm and vent piping connects with existing plumbing so the new system can be tested.

Q. Plumbing vents shall extend a minimum of 12" above roof. Install frost-proof flashing over vent. Verify final HVAC equipment and air intake locations and confirm required clearances.

R. Plumbing vents shall be a minimum of 20-0" away from roof-mounted or wall-mounted fresh air intakes. Verify final HVAC equipment and air intake locations and confirm required clearances.

S. Solvent weld joints in PVC and CPVC pipe shall include use of a primer which is of contrasting color to the pipe and cement.

T. All piping shall be installed in accordance with the 2015 Minnesota Plumbing Code.

U. PVC pipe shall not be installed in return air plenums.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Division 01 - Quality Requirements, Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

END OF SECTION



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 221400 – FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE & SPECIALTIES Page 1

SECTION 221400

FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE AND SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Storm water piping buried within 5 feet of building. 2. Storm water piping above grade. 3. Unions and flanges. 4. Roof drains. 5. Cleanouts. 6. Bedding and cover materials.


concrete specified by this section. 2. Division 07 - Firestopping: Product requirements for firestopping for placement


for placement by this section. 4. Division 09 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting material

specified by this section. 5. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping, Plumbing Piping and

Equipment: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports and firestopping for placement by this section.

6. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping, Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe identification for placement by this section.

7. Section 230700 - HVAC, Plumbing Insulation: Product and execution requirements for pipe insulation.

8. Division 31 - Soils for Earthwork: Soils for backfill in trenches. 9. Division 31 - Aggregates for Earthwork: Aggregate for backfill in trenches. 10. Division 31 - Excavation: Product and execution requirements for excavation and


section. 12. Division 31 - Fill: Requirements for backfill to be placed by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A112.21.2M - Roof Drains. 2. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings (DWV).




3. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.

4. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 2. ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and

Culvert Pipe. 3. ASTM C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm

Drain, and Sewer Pipe. 4. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and

Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets. 5. ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole

Sections. 6. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe

and Fittings. 7. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 8. ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-

Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 9. ASTM D2464 - Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 10. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 11. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic

Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 12. ASTM D2680 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene

(ABS) and Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping. 13. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer

Pipe and Fittings. 14. ASTM D2751 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene

(ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 15. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with

Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 16. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 17. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining

Plastic Pipe. 18. ASTM F679 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-

Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

C. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute: 1. CISPI 301 – Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications (or as modified in this Specification).

2. CISPI 310 – Specification for Coupling for use in connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping applications (or as modified in this Specification).




1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes for catch basins and manholes.

C. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit

manufacturers catalog information. 2. Storm Drainage Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information,

component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material and equipment.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.



B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and clean-outs.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for pumps and equipment.



B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.






1.8 WARRANTY





PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, CISPI 301 2. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies


B. ABS Pipe: ASTM D2261, Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) material, bell and spigot style solvent sealed ends.

1. Fittings: ABS. 2. Joints: ASTM D2235, solvent weld.

C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material. 1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D2665. 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.2 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, CISPI 301 2. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies


B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, polyvinyl chloride material. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2665, PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld.

C. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI, service weight; with joints conforming to CISPI 310.

D. Hubless couplings for connecting no-hub cast iron piping shall be wide body style using a minimum of four clamps for piping 4" and smaller, and six clamps for 5" and larger. Couplings shall consist of a neoprene gasket housed inside an 0.10" thick, Type 304 stainless steel corrugated shield. Clamps shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel with a hex head and shoulder, couplings shall be carefully installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be installed using a torque wrench to tighten the clamps to 80 inch pounds.

E. Hubless restraints shall be Holdrite series # 117 meeting installation requirements of CISPI.

1. For pipe sizes up to 8” kit shall consist of galvanized steel straps with high strength, high torque stainless steel band clamps.




2.3 ROOF DRAINS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Zurn 2. Wade 3. J.R. Smith 4. Ancon 5. Josam

B. Primary Roof Drains: 1. Assembly: ASME A112.21.2M. 2. Body: Lacquered cast iron with sump. 3. Strainer: Removable cast aluminum dome strainer. 4. Accessories: Coordinate with roofing type, refer to Division 07:

a. Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop. b. Adjustable under deck clamp. c. Roof sump receiver. d. Waterproofing flange. e. Controlled flow weir. f. Leveling frame. g. Adjustable extension sleeve for roof insulation. h. Model Z100 as manufactured by Zurn.

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Zurn 2. Wade 3. J.R. Smith 4. Josam

B. Exterior Surfaced Areas (CO-1): Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.

C. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas (CO-2): Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated cover with gasket.

D. Interior Finished Floor Areas (CO-3): Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round scored cover with gasket in service areas and round depressed cover with gasket to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.

E. Interior Finished Wall Areas (CO-4): Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated cover with gasket, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.

F. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas (CO-5): Caulked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders.




2.2 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS

A. Bedding: Fill Type as specified in Division 31.

B. Cover: Fill Type as specified in Division 31.

C. Soil Backfill from Above Pipe to Finish Grade: Soil Type as specified in Division 31. Subsoil with no rocks over 6 inches in diameter, frozen earth or foreign matter.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Watkins Elementary School – New roof drainage shall be provided by roof scuppers. No internal or underground storm sewer required by plumbing contractor.

B. Eden Valley Elementary – Provide new storm sewer service for new building addition. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connection, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. Make connection for sewer services to outside utilities located 5’-0” from building.

3.2 EXAMINATION



3.3 PREPARATION





3.4 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Verify connection to new piping system, location, and invert are as indicated on Civil Drawings.

B. Establish elevations of buried piping to meet inverts as shown on Civil Drawings.

C. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly.




D. Install pipe on prepared bedding.

E. Route pipe in straight line.

F. Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe. Coordinate with Division 31.

G. Pipe Cover and Backfilling: 1. Backfill trench in accordance with Division 31. 2. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction

density. 3. After hydrostatic test, evenly backfill entire trench width by hand placing backfill

material and hand tamping in 6 inches compacted layers to 12 inches minimum cover over top of jacket. Compact to 95 percent maximum density.

4. Evenly and continuously backfill remaining trench depth in uniform layers with backfill material.

5. Do not use wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping.


A. Underground Work (Inside the Buildings Outside Walls) 1. Mechanical Contractor to carry out all excavation, backfilling and compaction of

earth required for the installation of underground lines within the buildings outside walls.

2. All backfill (on excavations inside of the building outside perimeter walls) shall be vibratory rolled or otherwise compacted to 95 percent of proctor density, tested at the rate of one test per 2500 sq. ft and re-packed and retested where the test results are under.

3. Mechanical Contractor shall note inverts of the sanitary runs inside and outside of the buildings and shall run lines to meet these inverts. Where these lines cross underground foots or foundations the Mechanical Contractor shall provide oversize steel pipe sleeves before foundations are poured.

3.6 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients.

B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Provide clearance at cleanout for snaking drainage system.

C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.

D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.

E. Install non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.




F. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

G. Install piping to maintain headroom. Group piping to conserve space.

H. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

I. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint. Support should be placed within 18” of the joint.

J. Vertical components should be secured at each stack base and at sufficiently close intervals to keep systems in alignment and to adequately support the weight of the pipe and its contents.

K. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

L. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. Refer to Section 230700.

M. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.

N. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

O. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Division 09.

P. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

Q. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 230529.

R. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 230529.

3.7 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. As per 2015 Minnesota Plumbing Code 1300.0215, no plumbing work may be covered

prior to completing the required tests and inspections. B. Mechanical Contractor shall verify that the Minnesota Department of Labor and Industry

has reviewed the Drawings for this Project prior to asking for an inspection of the underground piping.

C. Submit certification to Engineer showing that all necessary and required tests were

performed for the entire Project including the following: 1. Storm piping




3.8 SEWER AND DRAIN PIPING NEAR WATER PIPING

A. All underground sections of building drain and building sewer pipe located within 10 feet of buried water supply pipe shall be constructed in accordance with 2015 Minnesota Plumbing Code part 720.0.


A. Division 01 - Quality Requirements - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting and balancing.

END OF SECTION




BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 224000 – PLUMBING FIXTURES Page 1

SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Water closets 2. Urinals 3. Lavatories 4. Wash Fountains 5. Sinks 6. Showers

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 079000 - Joint Protection: Product requirements for calking between

fixtures and building components for placement by this section. 2. Section 221100 - Facility Water Distribution: Supply connections to plumbing

fixtures. 3. Section 221300 - Facility Sanitary Sewerage: Waste connections to plumbing

fixtures. 4. Section 230500 - Basic Fire Protection, Plumbing and HVAC Requirements.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ANSI Z358.1 - Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment.

B. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 1010 - Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers.

C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A112.6.1 - Floor-Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures

for Public Use. 2. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Fixture Fittings. 3. ASME A112.19.1M - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures. 4. ASME A112.19.2M - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. 5. ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential

Use). 6. ASME A112.19.4 - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures. 7. ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals.

1.3 SUBMITTALS





B. Product Data: Submit catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim and finishes.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation methods and procedures.


E. All flush valves for water closets and urinals shall be provided by the same manufacturer.



B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit fixture, trim, exploded view and replacement parts lists.


A. Faucets: All faucets must comply with NSF 61 - Drinking Standards.

B. Provide products requiring electrical connections listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.

C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.



B. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use.

1.7 WARRANTY


B. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for plumbing fixtures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SILICONE FOAM PLUMBING CAULKING AND SEALANTS

A. Foam to be Dow Corning 3-6548 Silicone RTV Foam.

B. Sealant to be Dow Corning 96-081 RTV Silicone Adhesive sealant.




2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ADA DRAIN & SUPPLY INSULATION

A. Skal+Gard

B. BroCar

C. Truebro

D. Goodwill Industries

E. Zurn

F. McGuire

G. Plumberex Specialty Products

2.3 HANDICAPPED LAVATORY INSULATED PROTECTORS

A. Handicap lavatory P-trap and angle valve assemblies shall be insulated with the fully molded IPS Corporation “TRUEBRO”, Lav Guard 2 undersink piping covers, white in color.

2.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – FIXTURES

A. Kohler

B. Crane

C. Eljer

D. American Standard

E. Sloan

F. Toto

G. Zurn one

H. Fiat

I. Mustee

2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIXTURE TRIM

A. Moen

B. Chicago

C. Kohler




D. Symmons

E. Delta

F. Speakman

G. Zurn

2.6 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLUSH VALVES

A. Sloan

B. Zurn

C. Chicago

2.7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WATER CLOSET SEATS

A. Church

B. Kohler

C. Bemis Mfg. Co.

D. Olsonite

2.8 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIXTURE CARRIERS

A. Zurn Ind.

B. J.R. Smith

C. Wade

D. Josam

E. Watts Drainage

2.9 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – WASH FOUNTAINS

A. Bradley

B. Intersan

C. Acorn

D. Sloanstone




2.10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - STAINLESS STEEL SINKS

A. Elkay

B. Just

2.11 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS

A. Zurn

B. Wolverine Brass

C. Brass Craft

D. Dearborn Brass

E. McGuire

F. Promax

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS

A. Miscellaneous fittings shall include P.O. plugs, basket strainers, lavatory supplies, closet supplies and traps.

2.13 PLUMBING FIXTURES – VERIFY WITH ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. WALL-HUNG WATER CLOSET – WC-1 1. ASME A112.19.2; Complete HET system with exposed battery powered, sensor

activated, Royal SMO water closet flushometer and vitreous china wall hung fixture. 1.28 GPF, Model # WETS 2450.1402 as manufactured by Sloan.

2. Seat: Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining ring, stainless steel bolts with cover; Model # 1955SSCT manufactured by Bemis.

3. Furnish and install a Zurn Series 1200 Fixture Carrier for wall hung water closet. 4. Verify mounting height with architectural elevations.

B. URINAL – UR-1 1. ASME A112.19.2; Complete HET system with exposed battery powered, sensor

activated, Royal SMO urinal flushometer and vitreous china wall hung fixture. .125 GPF, Model # WEUS 1000.1402.0.125 SMO as manufactured by Sloan.

2. Furnish and install a Zurn Series 1200 Fixture Carrier for wall hung urinals. 3. Verify mounting height with architectural elevations.

C. WALL-HUNG LAVATORY – L-1 1. Basin: ASME A112.19.2; Wall hung lavatory shall be made of vitreous china.

Lavatory shall have an overflow. Lavatory shall be a 4” centerset. Model # SS-3003 as manufactured by Sloan




2. Trim: ASME A112.18.1, Sensor Metering BASYS, Battery Power Supply, Deck Mounted IR and Capacitance Faucet with low spout. Advanced Features and Vandal Resistant Integrated Base, 1.5 GPM, Polished Chrome. Model # EFX-650 as manufactured by Sloan. Furnish and install chrome plated 17 gauge brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon. Furnish and install mixing valve meeting ASSE 1070 on HW piping.

3. Furnish and install a Zurn series 1200 fixture carrier for wall hung lavatories 4. Furnish and install ADA wrap on supplies and traps.

D. WASH FOUNTAIN – WF-1 1. Unit shall be Standard height, 34" to rim and ADA compliant Bradley Model

#MF2944/IR/STD//LSD/----/TMA Terreon Quadra-Fount adaptive infrared control to serve one - four users at a time and to include the following standard equipment: a. Bowl, pedestal and top cover of Terreon. b. Pre-assembled Vernatherm thermostatic mixing valve assembly complete

with checks, stops, strainers and flexible stainless steel supply hoses. c. 0.5 GPM flow control at each station (operating range 20 - 100 PSI). d. Adaptive Infrared Control, each station operated by a separate solenoid

valve. e. LSD - Liquid Soap Dispenser. f. Color to be selected by Architect.

E. SHOWER – SH-1 1. Surround – custom tile by others. 2. Valve – Delta R10000

a. Single handle pressure balancing mixing tub and shower unit, ceramic control cartridge with stainless steel balancing piston, built in reverse connection capability, two service stops/check stops, and adjustable limit stop. When valve is turned on it must rotate from cold through to the hot position. All exposed trim and handle are metal with chrome plated surface. Valve supplied with vacuum breaker, standard handshower head, 60” flexible metal hose 24” mounting bar, supply elbow and flange. The valve inlets, shower and tub outlet are all standard with ½” NPT female thread connections. Delta Faucet Trim – T13H152 with Vacuum Breaker U4900-PK.

F. SINK – SK-1 1. Bowl: ANSI A112.19.3; single compartment, 22x19x7-1/2" outside dimensions,

18 gauge thick, Type 302 stainless steel, self-rimming with undercoating, 3-1/2" crumb cup and chromed brass drain, ledgeback drilled for trim; Model #LR2219 manufactured by Elkay.

2. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated brass supply with swing gooseneck spout, Softflo aerator, and wrist blade handles. Model # 1100-GN8AE35-317AB as manufactured by Chicago. Furnish and install chrome plated 17 gauge brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon.




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.

C. Verify electric power is available and of correct characteristics.

D. Confirm millwork is constructed with adequate provision for installation of counter top lavatories and sinks.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.

3.3 LEAD-FREE CERTIFICATION

A. The Plumbing Contractor must certify in writing that all equipment installed on this project is lead-free and will replace such fittings if determined that lead is contained in the equipment.

3.4 PLUMBING CAULKING AND SEALING A. Use silicone seal between plumbing fixtures and wall, floor or cabinetry. B. Provide a neat concave joint without excess material and/or overlapping. (Clear or

white.)

3.5 HANDICAPPED LAVATORY & SINK INSULATION A. Install shut off valve and supply line PVC pipe protectors and waste trap protectors at

each exposed handicap lavatory and sink.

3.6 INSPECTION A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings

before rough-in and installation. B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this Section.

3.7 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with stops, reducers and

escutcheons.




C. Install components level and plumb. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. E. All handicapped fixtures shall be mounted to meet ADA Standards. Verify all mounting

heights with architectural elevations. Any discrepancies shall be reported to Engineer/Architect before mounting fixture.

F. Mount handicapped flush valves for water closets below grab bar. See architectural

elevations. Verify rough-in requirements with manufacturer's shop drawings, a minimum of 1-1/2” shall be provided from the top of flush valve to the bottom of grab bar.


A. Review millwork shop-drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough in and installation.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting and balancing.

B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.

3.10 CLEANING


B. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.


A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction.

B. Do not permit use of fixtures before final acceptance.

3.12 SCHEDULES

A. Fixture Rough-In:

Fixture Hot inches

Cold inches

Min. Waste inches

Min. Vent inches

Water Closet (Flush Valve): 1 3 2 Urinal (Flush Valve): 3/4 2 1-1/2 Lavatory: 1/2 1/2 1-1/2 1-1/4 Shower 1/2 1/2 2 1-1/4




Fixture Hot inches

Cold inches

Min. Waste inches

Min. Vent inches

Classroom Sinks: 1/2 1/2 2 1-1/4

END OF SECTION




BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 230000 - HVAC SPECIFICATION INDEX Page 1

SECTION 230000 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) SPECIFICATION INDEX 230500 Basic Fire Protection, Plumbing and HVAC Requirements 230529 Hangers, Supports, Safety Rails and Firestopping for Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC

Piping and Equipment 230553 Identification for HVAC, Plumbing Piping and Equipment 230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230700 HVAC and Plumbing Insulation 230923 Direct Digital Control System 230933 Variable-Frequency Drives 230993 Sequence of Operation for HVAC Controls 232113 Hydronic Piping 232114 HePEXa Hydronic Distribution Piping 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties 232126 Glycol System 232150 HVAC Water Treatment 233100 HVAC Ducts and Casings 233300 Air Duct Accessories 233327 Sound Attenuators and Duct Lagging 233405 HVAC Fans 233600 VAV - Air Terminal Units 233700 Air Outlets and Inlets 234000 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices 238103 Packaged Rooftop A.C. Air Handling Units 238105 Equipment Screens



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 230000 - HVAC SPECIFICATION INDEX Page 2

238200 Terminal Heating Units END OF SECTION 230000



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 230500 - BASIC FIRE PROTECTION, PLUMBING AND HVAC REQUIREMENTS Page 1

SECTION 230500 - BASIC FIRE PROTECTION, PLUMBING AND HVAC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Divisions 21, 22 and 23 Sections, in addition to Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Mechanical Contract Installation shall include a complete plumbing installation of inside utilities for the building addition and remodeling. All piping, fixtures and

equipment herein specified, mentioned or shown on Drawings, shall be furnished and installed in place, connected up and ready for normal operation except for such items as are specifically mentioned to be furnished by others. B. Plumbing installation shall include pipe, fittings, fixtures and specialties specified and necessary for a complete and acceptable system of waste, vent and water supply

including necessary revisions to the existing systems. This includes sewer lines, connections to water supply and to all fixtures and outlets shown or specified, excavation,

backfilling, protection of public, Owner's and adjoining property. Any minor details not covered or shown but necessary for successful operation shall be furnished without

additional cost to Owner by this Contractor. C. For the Watkins Elementary building, the Mechanical Contract shall include furnishing and installing a complete wet sprinkler, fire protection system for the addition and

remodeling and all other related work as called for under the Specifications and shown on Drawings. For the Eden Valley Elementary building, the project scope shall include modifying and extending the existing wet-pipe fire sprinkler system. D. The Mechanical Contract shall also include furnishing and installing a complete system of hot water and warm air heating, ventilating and air conditioning for the building

addition and remodeling with: 1. Hydronic piping system and accessories. 2. Packaged HW/DX VAV Rooftop units. 3. Exhaust and relief equipment. 4. Ductwork for air delivery systems with required accessories. 5. Building Automation System (BAS). 6. All other related work as called for under Specifications and shown on Drawings.

1.3 WORK INCLUDED A. The Mechanical Contract shall include all Work under the listed Sections of the

Specifications Index and all related Mechanical Work as shown on the Drawings for the Project.




B. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for equipment and material access into the building and routing through the building including removal, enlargement and/or reinstallation of impediments such as door and frames, louvers and portions of walls, floors and roofs. C. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for any costs related to a change in

equipment dimensions as it affects building access, code clearances, maintenance access clearances, coil removal space, tube removal space, existing piping, existing ductwork and existing electrical components. D. A complete table of Mechanical Reference Symbols is shown on the Drawings. 1.4 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. The following Work is not included as part of the Mechanical Contract. 1. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all power wiring, magnetic starters, disconnect switches, etc., except as called for to be included with the equipment and shall make all final connections to the equipment provided by the Mechanical Contractors. 1.5 CODES, FEES AND LATERAL COSTS A. The Mechanical Installation shall meet all applicable local, state and federal codes and standards. B. All required permits necessary for a complete mechanical installation shall be paid for by this Contractor. C. The plumbing Work shall be installed in strict accordance with the Minnesota State Plumbing Code. Any change from the Drawings and Specifications required by the State

or City Plumbing Inspector shall be made by this Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Except in those municipalities which provide state-approved electrical inspection, all installation of electrical equipment wiring shall be inspected by the State Board of

Electricity. Allowance shall be made in the bid and Contract for the cost of such inspection.

1. Fees for such inspection shall be charged in accordance with the rules and regulations of the State Board of Electricity. Evidence of payment of fees shall be

provided by the Contractor with their Application for Payment. E. Mechanical Contractor(s) shall be responsible to provide for all State or local inspector tests required by the current codes. Verify with the project inspector the tests, reports and

witnessing that is required before construction begins.




1.6 CONTRACT TYPE

A. The Mechanical addition and remodeling installation to be made under Divisions 21, 22 and 23 is set up for Contract bidding as follows:

1. Combined or Individual Plumbing, Fire Protection Sprinkler, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contracts as sub bids to the Construction Manager. 2. See Division 01 for Contract breakdown and bid package requirements. 1.7 WORK SEQUENCE (SEE DIVISION 01) A. Install Work in stages to accommodate Owner's occupancy requirements. During the construction period coordinate mechanical schedule and operations with Owner

Construction Manager. 1.8 ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms shall be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the

Owner's option. Accepted Alternate Prices shall be identified in Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required. C. See Division 01 for Alternates. 1.9 REFERENCES A. All equipment, piping, etc., shall be new and shall be installed to meet the approval of the

following additional ordinances: ASME Rules for Pressure Tanks, National Board of Fire Underwriter's Rules, American WaterWorks and the American Gas Association. 1.10 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division 1 and/or where noted in specific

sections of the Specification. B. Proposed Products List: Include information on products specified in the following

Sections for Engineer’s review, approval and for inclusion in the Owner’s Manuals: 1. 210500 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 2. 211313 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems 3. 221100 Facility Water Distribution and Specialties 4. 221300 Facility Sanitary Sewerage and Specialties 5. 221400 Facility Storm Drainage and Specialties 6. 224000 Plumbing Fixtures 7. 230529 Hangers, Supports, Safety Rails and Firestopping for Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC Piping and Equipment 8. 230553 Identification for HVAC, Plumbing Piping and Equipment




9. 230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 10. 230700 HVAC and Plumbing Insulation 11. 230923 Direct Digital Control System for HVAC Extension of Existing Automation System 12. 230933 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers 13. 230993 Sequence of Operation 14. 232113 Hydronic Piping 15. 232126 Glycol System 16. 233300 Air Duct Accessories 17. 233405 HVAC Fans 18. 233600 VAV - Air Terminal Units 19. 233700 Air Outlets and Inlets 20. 234000 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices 21. 238105 Equipment Screens 22. 238103 Packaged Rooftop A.C. Air Handling Units 23. 238200 Terminal Heating Units C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related

systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal for each specification section. D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. E. Electronic Submittals: 1. If shop drawings are being submitted electronically they shall be submitted in the same format as described above and shall bear the contractors dated review stamp. 2. All shop drawings shall include a transmittal cover sheet from the contractor that shall be attached to the same shop drawing file so the Engineer or Construction Manager do not have to electronically merge files. If there are multiple

transmittals involved due to construction management or sub-contracting, all of the transmittals shall be attached within the same shop drawing file.

3. Multiple shop drawings in a book format with one transmittal shall not be acceptable as each specification section requires its own transmittal and review

stamp. F. NOTICE: Before release of the shop drawing is acceptable, the Contractor’s stamp, initialed or signed, must be provided certifying their review of the submittal, verification of products, verification of field measurements and field construction criteria, and

coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. If shop drawings are not stamped by the Contractor and marked as "Reviewed", “Approved” or “Approved as Noted”, they may not be

processed by the Engineer. If the Engineer does review them in this instance, the contractor is still responsible for reviewing them and stamping them before release to their supplier.

G. It is the contractor’s responsibility to provide submittals that are fully-compliant with the requirements of the construction documents. The engineer will review the equipment submittals for compliance with the requirements of the plans and specifications. After




the submittals have been reviewed, they will be marked “Approved”, “Approved as Noted” or “Rejected – Re-Submit”. The engineer will make every effort to identify non-compliant equipment in the submittal process, but the engineer will not be responsible for any costs that may be required to correct non-compliant conditions (up to and including replacement of installed non-compliant equipment with the correct equipment), regardless of the fact that the submittal may be marked “Approved” or “Approved as Noted”.

1.11 SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Refer to symbol sheets on drawings. Other symbols are in common usage, but if uncertainty exists regarding any plan symbols or abbreviations, they shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer and he shall clarify same by issuing an addendum or clarification.

B. Where the phrase starts “Provide…..,” “provide” shall be construed to mean the same as

“Furnish and install…………”. 1.12 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Throughout these specifications or addendums, manufactures and materials are listed as approved equal. The approval applies only in so far as they comply with the requirements of the drawings and specification and is subject to final approval with submission of shop drawings.

B. Any extra costs of any changes in any trade’s work, as a result of any substitutions, shall

be borne by the CONTRACTOR making the substitutions.

1.13 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. 1.14 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 01. 1.15 PRE-CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION AND VERIFICATION A. This Contractor shall coordinate his Work with other Contractors on this job. Any

conflict which cannot be resolved shall be settled by the Architect/Engineer. B. Field verification of scale dimensions on Drawings is directed since actual locations, distances and levels shall be governed by actual field conditions. C. The Contractors shall check architectural, structural, plumbing, heating, ventilating and electrical conditions drawings to avert possible installation conflicts. Shall drastic changes from original Drawings be necessary to resolve such conflicts this Contractor




shall notify the Architect/Engineer and secure written approval and agreement on necessary adjustments before the installation is started.

D. Discrepancies shown on different Drawings or between Drawings and actual field

conditions or between Drawings and Specifications shall promptly be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for a decision. Contractor shall not scale drawings for exact locations of equipment. (Verify final location.) All dimensions shall be taken from Architectural Drawings.

E. The Contractor shall consider and review existing site conditions and the complete set of documents, etc., Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, etc., (Drawings and Specifications) as his complete set. He shall be responsible for any and all mechanical Work shown or stated (to be by him), to include this Work in his bid and install such items even though they are not specifically shown or stated on the Mechanical Sections of the Drawings and Specifications. 1.16 INTERPRETATIONS OF DOCUMENTS A. Contractors shall promptly notify the Engineer of inconsistencies, errors and omissions found in the Drawings and Specifications prior to bid date. B. Questions regarding the bidding and requests for interpretation of the Drawings and

Specifications shall be submitted to the Engineer in writing in sufficient time to be received prior to the date for receipt of bids.

C. Interpretation and correction of the Drawings and Specifications shall be made by

addendum. Interpretations and corrections made by any other method shall not be binding on the Owner or the Engineer.

D. The drawings and Specifications are complementary to one another. This defines a

relationship such that any item which is called for in one document is to be considered called for in both sets of documents. Where conflicts exist between the Specifications and/or drawings, the more stringent requirement shall apply. 1.17 TEMPORARY HEATING DEHUMIDIFICATION AND VENTILATING FOR REMODELING AND NEW CONSTRUCTION WORK A. The various types of air handling equipment and systems shall not be used for temporary heating, ventilation or cooling during the construction of this project without the written permission of the Engineer. B. When deemed acceptable by the Engineer, the air handling equipment and systems may be used provided that all return air duct and grille openings are protected by a filter with a

20% efficiency rating of MERV 6 or higher. C. Filters in the air handling equipment shall be in place during all temporary heating,

ventilating or cooling operation. When temporary operation is completed, the filters shall




be replaced with new, specified units and an additional set of filters shall also be stored for the first filter change per Specification Section 234000. D. If air handling equipment and systems are operated in deference to the restrictions, the Engineer may request all affected ductwork, equipment and coils be internally cleaned, by the Mechanical Contractor, at no additional cost to the owner or Engineer. E. All installed ductwork and air handling equipment openings shall be protected from

intrusion of construction dust and dirt using taped or securely fastened plastic protective covers. Leave protection in place until final connections are completed. 1.18 ACCESS DOORS A. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all necessary hinged access doors on finished walls, floors or ceilings to adjust and/or reset the mechanical systems behind these finished surfaces. B. The Contractor shall familiarize themselves with the plans, wall, floor and ceiling finish schedules, details and fire ratings. C. Provide fire-rated access doors on fire-rated surfaces. 1.19 CUTTING, PATCHING AND FIRESTOPPING A. This Mechanical Contractor shall set all sleeves in construction for the mechanical

equipment installation. Where cutting is required, it shall be done by this Contractor. All patching left after demolition and left by new cutting shall be done by the Mechanical

Contractor unless noted otherwise due to size or type of finished surface patching that is required. Such locations, if any, shall be noted on the Plans. Mechanical

Contractor shall provide and install firestopping materials as specified in Divisions 21, 22 and 23 for mechanical penetrations. B. All penetrations of masonry wall by piping and round ducts shall be core drilled for neat appearance and minimal patching. C. Lintels: 1. The installation of support lintels at existing masonry walls, brick faces or stone faces (where the openings are cut by the Mechanical Contractor) shall be the

responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor unless specifically noted or detailed otherwise on the Architectural or Structural drawings. 2. This work shall also include modifications to existing openings for piping and ductwork or equipment installations such as recessed cabinet unit heaters.




1.20 ELECTRICAL A. Electrical Contractor shall furnish all motor starters and motor controls and provide all wiring for motor control operation, except if specified otherwise. 1.21 ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL AND AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS

COSTS A. If the Mechanical Contractor substitutes equipment that was approved equal for bidding instead of the scheduled units, the Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for any additional electrical A.T.C. installation costs for this substitution regardless of whether the other equipment was listed as equal in the Specification or was listed as an approved equal after the Project was in the bidding process. 1.22 GUARANTEE / WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation and working of everything in their portion of the project and shall guarantee to remedy free of charge any defects in workmanship and materials that may appear to give or gives rise to trouble of any kind for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion of the work (unless

noted otherwise as a longer warranty period in an individual specification section). 1.23 OWNER'S MANUALS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Under this Contract the Mechanical Contractor shall furnish the Owner with two, 3-ring binders of all pertinent systems information and related documents. Submit these

manuals to the Engineer for his review. The books shall contain the following items: 1. Shop drawings on all major equipment, complete with Engineer’s approval stamp. 2. Operating Instructions for all major equipment. 3. Packaged RTU start-up reports. 4. Document RTU training method, date of training and list of personnel that was present. 5. VFD start-up report for each VFD unit. Document when training was provided, what information was shared, who provided the training and who was present. 6. Submit certification reports to Engineer showing that all required testing for the project, including water piping, sewer/vent piping, natural gas piping and storm piping. 7. Maintenance instructions for all major equipment. 8. Wiring diagrams for all equipment. 9. Automatic Temperature Control points and sequence of operation verification report and compliance statement. 10. Final Test and Balance Report. 11. Final Glycol Analysis for hot water systems.




B. Using the Owner's manuals, the Mechanical Contractor shall instruct the

Owner/Owner's Representative on the proper operation of all equipment installed as part of this Contract. These instructions shall include, but not be limited to preventative maintenance, safety instructions and normal operating procedures.

C. After the Owner has been instructed, the Contractor shall submit a letter to the Mechanical Engineer documenting that the information was given to the Owner and that

he has signed off on this part of the Contract. 1.24 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND TRAINING A. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for providing both a heating season start- up and cooling season start-up of heating, cooling, humidification, ATC and

dehumidification equipment including: 1. Training the owner in all methods needed for winterization of equipment, coils, drain down, etc. 2. Training the owner regarding lubrication of all components and establishing a preventative maintenance schedule. 3. Training the Owner in regards to ATC programming modifications and seasonal changes. 4. Training the Owner in proper operation and maintenance of all seasonal equipment, again using the O & M manuals. 5. Observing and establishing a recommended filter changing schedule or establishing a static pressure point for change based on pressure differential measuring. 1.25 DEMOLITION A. If, in the process or removing piping, equipment, wiring or duct work the support of other

apparatus is affected, such supports shall be rearranged or additional supports added as required to meet code. All such work shall be included in the bid. B. Any piping, equipment, wiring or duct that is inadvertently removed or damaged during demolition shall be replaced in the same or better condition than the existing installation. C. Any unused supports that remain after demolition and after new equipment, wiring,

piping or ductwork locations are established shall be removed. Any resulting damage to walls, floor or ceilings shall be patched to match existing conditions. 1.26 EQUIPMENT ACCESS

A. The installing Contractor shall be responsible for determining means and methods for gaining access to building spaces for the purpose of removing equipment and/or installing new equipment. The plans may or may not include information related to equipment access. In the process of removing old equipment and/or installing new equipment, it may be necessary to remove existing mechanical (ductwork, piping,




supports, etc.), electrical (conduits, wiring, lighting, etc.), or general construction building elements (walls, roofs, door frames, etc.) in order to gain adequate access to the spaces. All costs associated with this work shall be the Mechanical Contractor’s responsibility and shall be included in the Mechanical Bid. The Owner shall not be responsible for any additional costs associated with equipment access. B. The installing Contractor shall coordinate adequate space for maintenance personnel to work on the installed equipment regardless of location. This is a critical issue that needs to be discussed and coordinated early in the Contractor coordination meetings.

C. Equipment installed above a ceiling shall have ceiling tile or ceiling access panels coordinated such that they provide best possible arrangement for ladder access and full shoulder width access for maintenance personnel. If necessary, the ceiling grid may need to be adjusted to a non-symmetrical centering in the room involved. D. All equipment (requiring servicing) that is located above a ceiling shall be no more than 20” above the ceiling. Coordinate with all other trades to provide for this requirement. 1.27 ASBESTOS INSULATION AND/OR LEAD CONTAMINATION A. Where insulation on existing piping or equipment being removed under this Contract contains asbestos products or has lead contamination, the Contractor shall stop all Work and notify the Owner/Architect/Engineer and not proceed with any further Work until the

asbestos has been removed and/or encapsulated by others under a separate Contract between the Owner and the asbestos removal company. If lead is encountered, the

Owner shall have the quantities and hazard identified and shall inform the Contractor of the necessary steps required to eliminate the hazard. 1.28 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL A. The Mechanical Contractor shall remove all unused piping, plumbing fixtures,

mechanical equipment and ductwork as noted and/or where existing is not to be re-used for the Project. B. The Owner shall have the right of first refusal for all removed equipment. If refused, the Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for disposal.

C. When removed equipment is to be reinstalled as part of the project, the Contractor that removes the equipment shall be responsible for storage and protection. Any damage or loss prior to re-installation shall be the responsibility of this Contractor.

1.29 WINTERIZATION A. Some equipment or systems (i.e., piping, coils, etc.) may require special seasonal

shutdown or winterization to protect the systems from damage due to freezing. The installing Contractor shall be responsible for all necessary material and labor

required to winterize the equipment to provide protection from freezing for the first




winter season after the equipment has been installed. When completing the winterization procedures, the Contractor shall be responsible for training the Owner on the proper

methods for winterization. Documentation of the training signed by the owner, along with type-written procedures for future reference, shall be included in the O&M manual. B. The installing Contractor shall be responsible for any labor and material costs associated with equipment repair or replacement due to damage related to equipment that has not been properly winterized. 1.30 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. The details and arrangements shown on the plans may be specific to the products

included on the product schedule (i.e. RTUs, ERV, etc.). Utilizing products by other approved manufacturers (approved equals) may result in the requirement for

modifications to the equipment arrangement or installation materials including different piping configurations, valving, venting, clearances, access, etc. It shall be the

Contractor's responsibility to identify any necessary changes. Any modifications that are required to provide a fully functioning system that meets the project requirements and complies with the equipment manufacturer's installation recommendations shall be

provided as part of the project at no additional cost to the owner. B. If changes are required, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing a description and drawing that shows the necessary modifications for Engineer review prior to

equipment installation. This drawing shall be submitted with the shop drawings for the equipment that is impacted and shall be drawn to the same scale as the original plans where this equipment is shown. 1.31 COMMISSIONING

A. This project will be subject to Commissioning activities as detailed in a separate agreement directly with the Owner. The Mechanical Contractors shall provide assistance to the Commissioning authority as detailed in the Specification to commission the Mechanical systems that are provided and installed as part of their work scope.

PART 2 PRODUCTS \\Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION \\Not Used END OF SECTION 230500




BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC.

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS, SUPPORTS & FIRESTOPPING FOR PLUMBING, FIRE PROT., HVAC PIPING & EQUIP. Page 1

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS, SUPPORTS, SAFETY RAILS AND FIRESTOPPING FOR PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Hanger rods. 3. Inserts. 4. Flashing. 5. Equipment curbs. 6. Sleeves. 7. Mechanical sleeve seals. 8. Formed steel channel. (Unistrut) 9. Exterior pipe and duct support. 10. Firestopping. 11. Firestopping accessories. 12. Equipment bases and supports. 13. Roof rails and curbs.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 221100 – Water Distribution and Specialties: Execution requirements for

placement of hangers and supports. 2. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping: Execution requirements for placement of

hangers and supports specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. 2. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops. 4. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 5. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.

C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.





D. FM Global: 1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved

By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation.

E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.


A. Firestopping Materials: ASTM E119, ASTM E814, UL 263 and UL 1479 to achieve fire ratings of adjacent construction in accordance with FM and UL Design Numbers.

B. Surface Burning: ASTM E84 and UL 723 with maximum flame spread / smoke developed rating of 25/450.

C. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials and components.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Firestopping: Conform to FM and UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe hanger types and sizes. Indicate fire-stopping products and intended use and locations.

C. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.





2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.

D. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly.

E. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. Indicate calculations used to determine load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. 2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.

G. Engineering Judgments: For conditions not covered by FM or UL listed designs, submit judgments by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.


A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour.

1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour.

2. Floor Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. a. Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is not required.

B. Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion.

1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating connecting maximum of three stories. 2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories.

C. Surface Burning Characteristics: 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

D. Perform Work in accordance with AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Division 01 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing and protecting products.





B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.

C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original packaging.


A. Division 01 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60°F.

C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials.

D. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.



1.11 WARRANTY


B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and supports.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers - B-Line

B. Riser Clamps - B-Line C. Expansion Anchors - Hilti D. Power Driven Fasteners - Hilti

E. Anvil International (Hangers and Clamps) F. Tolco/Nibco G. Pipe Hangers and Devices "P.H. & D.".





2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch split ring or clevis of malleable iron with

adjustable swivel. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches and Cold Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Carbon

steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook or knee brace and clevis hanger. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel

clamp; adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over. F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. G. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. H. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gauge galvanized steel shield over

insulation in 180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support. I. Shields for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Hard block non-conducting saddles

in 90 degree segments, 12 inch minimum length, block thickness same as insulation thickness.

J. All cold water plumbing water piping shall have hangers sized to accommodate pipe

insulation so the pipe does not come in contact with the hanger. 2.3 HANGER RODS A. Steel Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end or continuous threaded. 2.4 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded

connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.5 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26 gauge thick galvanized steel. B. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing. C. Caps: Steel, 22 gauge minimum; 16 gauge at fire resistant elements.





2.6 EQUIPMENT CURBS A. Mechanical Contractor shall provide factory-fabricated curbs for roof-mounted

equipment. Refer to Plan Sheets for details and scheduling of any curbs that may be provided with the equipment served.

2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 20 gauge galvanized steel

or Schedule 40 PVC. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet

Floors: Form with steel pipe or 20 gauge galvanized steel or Schedule 40 PVC. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and

Fireproofing: Sleeves shall comply with firestopping manufacturer’s published requirements.

D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel or wood. (Remove wood

blocking after concrete has set.) F. Stuffing Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible. G. Caulk: Silicone sealant of quality specified in Division 07. H. Pre-fabricated wall sleeves by Thunderline or equal. I. Wall and floor seals by Pyropal or equal are an acceptable option. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.

Provide for continuous insulation wrapping through sleeve. B. Design hangers with disengagement of supported pipe. C. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper hot water piping. 2.9 ROOF RAILS AND CURBS A. Provide 14” high by 3” wide roof rails for roof mounted equipment support. Refer to

plan details for coordination information. B. Provide prefabricated roof curbs for mounting of exhaust, relief and intake equipment on

the roof. Refer to plan details for coordination information.





2.10 FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl

spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. 2.11 EXTERIOR PIPE AND DUCT SUPPORT A. Manufacturer 1. PHP Systems Design 2. Erico 3. MIPO Industries B. Base: 1. PHP Systems Design with a18"x18"x3" or 18" round x 3" base weighing 7 or 10.5 pounds. Injection molded HDPE with UV inhibitors and antioxidants. 2. Erico Pyramid “Caddy” with 8”x19”x 4” high base weighing 5 pounds. Injection molded HDPE with UV inhibitors. 3. MIRO Industries with 16”x18”x3” high base made with polycarbonate. C. Framing: 1-5/8" or 1-7/8" 12 gauge struts as required by load and as recommended by

manufacturer. Struts are roll-formed, three-sided tubular shape with 9-1/16" holes at 1-7/8" centers on all three sides.

D. Finish: Hot dipped G90 galvanized. E. Hardware: Hot dipped galvanized.

F. Supports designed for use on flat roofs and sloped roofs up to 2/12 pitch.

G. PHP Model #PP-10 with channel for piping up to 1-1/2”. PHP Model #PSE-2-2 for piping 2” and larger utilizing clevis hanger and saddles.

2.12 FIRESTOPPING

A. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. Fire Trak Corp. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. International Protective Coating Corp. 5. 3M fire Protection Products. 6. Specified Technology, Inc. 7. Metacaulk.

B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single or multiple component

silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant.





2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single or multiple component foam compound. 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated

compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral or ceramic fiber

stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with

incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops.

6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain.

7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.

2.13 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings.

B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard. 2. Sheet metal. 3. Alumina silicate fire board.

C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams and other devices required to position and retain materials in place.

D. General: 1. Furnish UL listed products. 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated.

E. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish mechanical sealing device to continuously fill annular space between piping and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.

C. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.





3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.

C. Install backing or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.

E. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.

3.3 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete form work. B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut covered by 2" concrete topping on

floor. 3.4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows:

MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING FEET

PIPE SIZE STEEL COPPER HANGER DIAMETER 1/2" to 3/4" 6 5 3/8" 1" - 1-1/2" 6 6 3/8" 2" 7 7 3/8" 2-1/2" 10 8 1/2" 3" 10 10 1/2" 4" 10 10 5/8" 6" 10 10 3/4" 8"-12" 12 10 1" 14" OVER 12 N/A 1"





MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING FEET HANGER DIAMETER PVC (ALL SIZES) 2'-8" 3/8" 2" - 8" CAST IRON 5'-0" AND AT JOINTS 5/8" 10" AND 12" CAST IRON 5'-0" AND AT JOINTS 7/8" 1. If local Code is more stringent, install per local Code requirements. 2. PEXa piping (2” and smaller) that is installed inside the specified galvanized support channel shall use the same spacing and hanger requirements as copper piping of that same size. B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished insulation covering

and adjacent work. C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each joint, with 5 feet maximum spacing

between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or

trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Use of side clamps to hang piping 1-1/2" and smaller from side of bar joists is allowed.

Clamp shall be located within 3" of welded panel point. J. Do not use side clamps to hang support rods from the side of bar joists for piping 2" and

larger. Hang from the center of a bar joist with a threaded rod in the center of the two joist angles.

K. The use of supports connected to steel decking shall be limited to piping 1" and smaller

and to ductwork that is 14" diameter or smaller and equivalent rectangular duct. Equipment shall not be suspended from roof deck hangers.

3.5 BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. B. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. C. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.





D. Mechanical Contractor shall provide roof curbs or roof rails for the following equipment. Mechanical Contractor shall locate all roof openings for the Steel Contractor. Steel Contractor shall install curbs and rails along with any support steel required for the steel decking.

1. Powered Ventilators 2. Packaged RTU’s 3. Energy Recovery Ventilators 4. Roof Reliefs E. Verify depth of blocks or steel supports required at floor for deep seal condensate trap

and piping pitch to floor drain or janitor sink.

F. Properly anchor all equipment to equipment bases and supports (i.e. floor slab, roof curb, roof rail, etc.). When installing equipment on a building roof, ensure that adequate anchoring is provided to prevent equipment from blowing off support bases due to high wind conditions.

3.6 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter-flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate

weather or waterproofed walls, floors and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 8 inches minimum above finished roof surface with

lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter-flash and seal.

C. Fasten floor drain flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor and mop sink drains watertight to adjacent materials. 3.7 SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in form work. Provide re-enforcing around sleeves. B. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full

depth and provide floor plate. C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe

or duct and adjacent work with stuffing or fire stopping insulation and caulk seal air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

D. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. Use plastic escutcheons in

damp areas of toilet/showers. 3.8 HANGER AND SUPPORT PAINTING A. None.





3.9 STRUCTURAL PENETRATIONS

A. Obtain permission from Architect or Structural Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members and reinforced concrete.

3.10 INSTALLATION – FIRESTOPPING A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating

sleeves, piping, ductwork, and other items, requiring firestopping. B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and

substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings. C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness with uniform density and texture to

achieve required fire and smoke rating. D. Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size.

E. Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and

spaces. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials. F. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required. G. Fire Rated Surface:

1. Seal opening at floor, wall and ceiling as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch

on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and

building element. c. Pack void with backing material. d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to

meet fire rating of structure penetrated. 2. Where conduit or wire-way penetrates fire rated surface, install firestopping

product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

H. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition floor, ceiling and roof opening as follows:

a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element.

b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element.

c. Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install escutcheons floor plates or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates non- fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling.





3. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical sealing device to size of piping and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.11 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Refer to SMACNA standards for recognized methods of support, hanger strength and spacing.

B. Use of side clamps to hang ductwork from side of bar joists shall be limited to 50 lbs. at

each panel point. Clamps shall be located within 3 inches of welded panel point.

3.12 ROOF RAILS AND CURBS A. Provide standard 14” high curbs or rails for mechanical roof installations with top of

curb a minimum of 12 inches above roofing surface. Flexible sheet-flash and counter- flash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Refer to installation details to assure outside air intake clearance requirement to finish roof surface. Provide additional blocking as required.

1. Refer to plan schedules and details for any curbs or rails that are required to be taller, such as RTU’s, Intake Penthouses, etc.


A. Division 01 - Quality Requirements and Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting and balancing.

B. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.

3.14 CLEANING


B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

3.15 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.

B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.






BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC, PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 1

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC, PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Tags. 3. Pipe markers. 4. Ceiling tacks. 5. Labels.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting

specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures and installation.



B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers.


A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Craftmark Identification Systems. 2. Safety Sign Co. 3. Seton Identification Products. 4. Brady Markers. 5. Marking Services, Inc. (MSI) 6. EMED, Inc. 7. Brimar Industries 8. Mifab

2.2 TAGS

A. Plastic Tags: 1. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter.

B. Metal Tags: 1. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with finished

edges.

C. Information Tags: 1. Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size

3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties.

D. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location, plastic laminated.

2.3 PIPE MARKERS

A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.

B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: 1. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed

markings. Wrap arrows on-a-roll pressure sensitive tape completely around the pipe label overlapping itself and the end of the pipe marker by 1/2 inch.

2.4 CEILING TACKS

A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color-coded head.

B. Ceiling Grid Color Code as follows: 1. VAV boxes shall be labeled with a clear tape and 3/8" tall black letters. 2. Heating valves and reheat coils shall be identified with a 1/2" diameter red dot. 3. Domestic valves shall be identified with a 1/2" diameter blue dot.




4. Fire dampers and combination smoke/fire dampers shall be identified with a 1/2" diameter orange dot.

5. All other devices requiring service shall be marked with a yellow dot on the ceiling grid.

2.5 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Indoor type description: Engraved phenolic, size 4.0 inch wide x 1-1/2 inch tall, adhesive backed with 3/4” high printed identification. Yellow label with black lettering.

B. Outdoor type description: 0.020” thick aluminum, size 4.0 inch wide x 1-1/2 inch tall with two mounting holes or optional adhesive. Red label with ¾” tall engraved aluminum lettering and symbols.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Equipment Nameplates: Install with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 1. Install outdoor equipment tags on north or shadiest side of equipment to minimize damage from sun exposure.

B. Tags: Install plastic or stamped type with corrosive-resistant chain. C. Pipe Markers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Equipment: Identify RTUs. E. Provide identification tags on the bottom of VAV boxes. Tag location shall be readily

visible after removal of ceiling tile. F. Controls: Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic

nameplates. G. Valves: Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags indicating a valve number and

fluid type being circulated. H. Piping: Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with pipe markers. 3.2 VALVE CHART AND SCHEDULE A. Provide two valve charts and schedules framed under clear plastic shield. Chart shall cross

reference the valve number, type, manufacturer, size and system served and valve location. Turn over to Owner.




3.3 CEILING IDENTIFICATION MARKERS A. Install marking stickers on ceiling grids at points over which mechanical items requiring

service or adjustment are located. B. Familiarize the Owner's maintenance personnel with the location and function of the

markers. 3.4 PIPE MARKING A. Identify piping, concealed above accessible ceilings, with pipe markers or color coded

banding. Identify service, flow direction and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 40 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure and at each obstruction.

B. All exposed piping both covered and uncovered shall be designated by color code in

accordance with the following: 1. Coding shall be accomplished by self-adhesive pipe markers running parallel to pipe

axis. Similar to Seaton "Opti-Code" pipe markers 8" long with 3/4" high letters up to 2-3/8" OD and 12" long with 1-1/4" high letters up to 7-7/8" OD. (8" long color field)

2. At each end of the marker, directional flow arrows shall completely encircle the pipe/or pipe covering. Banding shall be similar to Seaton arrows on-a-roll tape, two inch wide band. Overlap marker and arrow tape.

C. The standard piping color code is as follows:

Color Opti-Code No. Legend Function Yellow/Black M6850 Heating Water Heating Supply Yellow/Black M6849 Heating Water Heating Return Green/White M4208 Domestic Cold Water Yellow/Black M4267 Domestic Hot Water Yellow/Black M8146 Dom. Hot Wtr Return (Recirc.) Green/White M4222 Rain Water Leader

Red/White M4289 Sprinkler-Fire (In Mech Rms Only)




DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Testing, adjusting and balancing of air systems. 2. Testing, adjusting and balancing of hydronic systems. 3. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230923 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: Requirements for

coordination between DDC system and testing, adjusting, and balancing work. 2. Section 230993 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls: Sequences of

operation for HVAC equipment.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Associated Air Balance Council: 1. AABC MN-1 - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating,

Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of

Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems.

C. Natural Environmental Balancing Bureau: 1. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of

Environmental Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Prior to commencing Work, submit proof of latest calibration date of each instrument.

C. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 National Standards for Total System Balance forms or NEBB Report forms. Submit data in S.I. units.

D. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.

E. Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample




report forms and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty or Copy of NEBB Certificate of Conformance Certification.

F. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project.

G. Furnish reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with table of contents page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.



B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and balancing valves.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish final copy of testing, adjusting, and balancing report inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.


A. Perform Work in accordance with AABC MN-1 National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.


1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A Approved Agencies 1. Mechanical Test and Balance (AABC) 2. Test and Balance Associates, Inc. (Minneapolis – 612/272-5651) 3. Systems Mgmt. and Balancing - Center City, MN (AABC) 4. Air Systems Engineering - St. Louis Park 5. Bal-Tech - St. Louis Park (NEBB) 6. Flow Dynamic Balancing – Minneapolis (NEBB) – Sioux Falls, SD (NEBB)

B. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance or NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting registered professional engineer experienced in performance of this Work.

C. The Balancing Agency shall be an independent firm hired by the Mechanical Contractor and shall not be part of the Mechanical Contractor's corporation.

1.7 PRE-BALANCING MEETINGS

A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.




B. Convene minimum of one 85-95% progress inspection week(s) prior to commencing work of this section.

1.8 SEQUENCING

A. Division 01 - Summary: Work sequence.

B. Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 SCHEDULING


1.10 RE-BALANCING

A. Contractor shall further balance the air and/or water distribution systems to meet the air volumes and/or flows as shown on the plan and any re-balancing required during the first year of operation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Verify the following: 1. Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in

addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage is minimized. 12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented. 13. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place or in normal position. 14. Service and balancing valves are open.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Furnish instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations.

B. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus or minus 10 percent of design to space.

C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting and balancing.

B. Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If disrupted, verify correcting adjustments have been made.

E. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system balance.

F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

G. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by Owner.

3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to obtain required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities. 1. It shall be the Balancing Company's responsibility to change sheaves and/or

drives as necessary on up to 25 percent of the equipment installed.

B. Make air quantity measurements in main ducts by pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts.




E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by using volume dampers located in ducts.

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive changes to vary fan speed. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.

H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops and total pressure across fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.

I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.

J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air and exhaust dampers to check leakage.

K. At modulating damper locations, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum airflow rate, full cooling, and at minimum airflow rate, full heating.

3.6 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust water systems, after air balancing, to obtain design quantities.

B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow-metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature and pressure difference across various heat transfer elements in system.

C. Adjust systems to obtain specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing.

D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open or in normal position to heat transfer elements.

E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.

F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, simulate full flow in one part by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.




3.7 SCHEDULES

A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting and Balancing: 1. Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units. 2. Air Coils. 3. Terminal Heat Transfer Units. 4. Exhaust Fans. 5. Air Filters. 6. Air Terminal Units. 7. Air Inlets and Outlets. 8. Energy Recovery Units.

B. Report Forms 1. Title Page:

a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency c. Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

Agency d. Project name e. Project location f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor i. Project altitude j. Report date

2. Summary Comments: a. Design versus final performance b. Notable characteristics of system c. Description of systems operation sequence d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate building

pressurization e. Nomenclature used throughout report f. Test conditions

3. Instrument List: a. Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date

4. Electric Motors: a. Manufacturer b. Model/Frame c. HP/BHP and kW d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load e. RPM f. Service factor g. Starter size, rating, heater elements




h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 5. V-Belt Drive:

a. Identification/location b. Required driven RPM c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual

6. Heating Coil Data: (RTU, Reheat) a. Identification/number b. Location c. Service d. Manufacturer e. Air flow, design and actual f. Water flow, design and actual g. Water pressure drop, design and actual h. Air pressure drop, design and actual

7. Air Moving Equipment: (RTU, ERV) a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge f. Air flow, specified and actual g. Return air flow, specified and actual h. Outside air flow, specified and actual i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual j. Inlet pressure k. Discharge pressure l. Sheave Make/Size/Bore m. Number of Belts/Make/Size n. Fan RPM

8. Return Air/Outside Air Data: (RTU) a. Identification/location b. Design air flow c. Actual air flow d. Design return air flow e. Actual return air flow f. Design outside air flow g. Actual outside air flow

9. Small Exhaust Fans: a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Air flow, specified and actual f. Fan RPM




10. Duct Traverse: a. System zone/branch b. Duct size c. Area d. Design velocity e. Design air flow f. Test velocity g. Test air flow h. Duct static pressure

11. Air Flow Measuring Station: a. Identification/number b. Location c. Size d. Manufacturer e. Model number f. Serial number g. Design Flow rate h. Actual/final flow rate

12. Terminal Unit Data: a. Manufacturer b. Variable, single, duct c. Identification/number d. Location e. Model number f. Size g. Minimum static pressure h. Minimum design air flow i. Maximum design air flow j. Maximum actual air flow k. Inlet static pressure

13. Air Distribution Test Sheet: (Diffusers, Registers) a. Air terminal number b. Room number/location c. Terminal type d. Terminal size e. Area factor f. Design velocity g. Design air flow h. Test (final) velocity i. Test (final) air flow j. Percent of design air flow

3.8 IMPORTANCE AND PAYMENTS A. The entire HVAC portion of this project shall not be considered substantially complete until the balancing is acceptable to the Engineer. Total mechanical payment for HVAC portion of the project beyond 90 percent will not be approved until such balancing and commissioning is acceptable to the Engineer.




BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 230700 - HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION Page 1

SECTION 230700 - HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Piping system insulation. 2. Piping insulation jackets. 3. Insulation accessories including vapor retarders and accessories. 4. Ductwork insulation. 5. Ductwork insulation jackets. 6. Duct Liner.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports and Firestopping for Piping and

Equipment: Product and Execution requirements for inserts at hanger locations. 2. Section 230553 - Identification for Piping and Equipment: Product requirements

for piping and equipment identification. 3. Section 233100 - Double Wall Duct.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet

and Plate. 2. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements

and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.

3. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.

4. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.

5. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.

6. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.

7. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 8. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. 9. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal

Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 10. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal

Insulation. 11. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing

Materials for Thermal Insulation. 12. ASTM C1126 - Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular

Phenolic Thermal Insulation.




13. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.

14. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts.

15. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

16. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

17. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 18. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using

a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each service, and location.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper installation procedures.


A. Test pipe, duct and equipment insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index not exceeding 50 within plenum in accordance with ASTM E84.


A. Division 01 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storage and protecting products.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original wrapping.


A. Division 01 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer.




C. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.



1.8 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS (PIPE INSULATION) A. Owens Corning Fiberglass B. Certainteed C. Johns-Manville D. Knauf, Inc. E. Rubatex F. Armoflex G. Imcoshield/Imcolock H. Therma-Cel 2.2 INSULATION (PIPE INSULATION) A. Type A: Glass fiber insulation; ANSI/ASTM C547; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75°F

noncombustible. ASTM C-335. B. Type B: Cellular glass; Not Used. C. Type C: Extruded polystyrene insulation: Not Used. D. Type D: Cellular Foam Insulation: Standard of design is Armaflex Model #AP or AEROCEL, ASTM C518 and C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded or sheet.

1. 'K' ('ksi') value: ASTM C177 or C518; 0.28 at 75°F. 2. Minimum service temperature: -40°F. 3. Maximum service temperature: 220°F. 4. Maximum moisture absorption: ASTM D1056; 1.0 by volume. Pipe or sheet. 5. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.17 perm inches. 6. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.




E. Type E: Polyisocyanurate Foam: Not Used.

F. Type F: Polyolefin/Polyethylene foam (NOT ALLOWED) 2.3 JACKETS (PIPE INSULATION) A. Vapor Barrier Jacket "ASJ" 1. ASTM C921, ASJ white kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to

aluminized film. 2. Vapor barrier for polyisocyanurate foam is 4 mil saran vapor barrier film with

saran tape at the joints and fittings. 3. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm inches. B. Indoor, Exposed or Concealed Applications: Insulated pipes conveying fluids above

ambient temperature shall have standard ASJ type jacket stapled on six inch centers. Cover fittings, joints and valves.

C. Indoor, Exposed or Concealed Applications: Insulated dual-temperature pipes or cold

pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature shall have vapor barrier jackets, ASJ or saran type with positive sealing system. Cover all That fittings, joints, and valves.

D. Tie Wire: 18 gauge stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. E. Where jacketing is near a hot surface, use white aluminum covering for the last six inches

of covering. F. PVC Plastic 1. Jacket: ASTM C921, one piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off

white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: -40°F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150°F. c. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.002 perm inches. d. Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E84; 25. e. Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E84; 50. f. Thickness: 20 mil. g. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive or pressure sensitive color

matching vinyl tape. 2.4 ACCESSORIES (PIPE INSULATION) A. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation. B. Insulation Bands: 3/4 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick galvanized steel or 0.007 inch thick

aluminum. C. Metal Jacket Bands: 1/2 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum or 0.010 inch thick

stainless steel.




D. PVC Covers: Zestone, Foster, Speedline or equal 0.020 inch thick pre-formed covers for fittings, valves and joints.

E. Flexible valve and fitting covers as manufactured by No Sweat outer wrap shall be

impermeable DuPont TyChem over 2" thick insulation blanket and shall be easily removed and reinstalled after service work is completed.

2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - (DUCT INSULATION) A. Owens Corning B. Certainteed C. Johns Manville D. Knauf E. CSG 2.6 MATERIALS (DUCT INSULATION)

A. Type A: Flexible glass fiber duct liner; ANSI/ASTM C553; 'k' 0.28 per inch at 75°F; 1.5 lb/cu ft minimum density; coated air side for maximum 4,000 ft/min air velocity.

B. Type B: Rigid glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C612, Class 1; 'k' value of 0.24 per inch at 75°F;

3.0 lb/cu ft minimum density, 0.002 inch foil scrim or FSK facing for air conditioning, heating and venting ducts.

C. Type C: Flexible glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C612; commercial grade; 'k' value of 0.29 per inch at 75°F, 0.75 lb/cu ft minimum density, 0.002 inch foil scrim or FSK facing for

air conditioning, heating and venting ducts. D. Type D: Flexible glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C612, Class 1; ‘k’ value of 0.29 per inch at

75°F, 0.75 lb/cu.ft. Minimum density, 0.002 metalized fiberglass scrim provided in five foot slide-over sleeve length.

E. Type E: AP Armaflex sheet or AP Coilflex Duct Liner: Flexible elastomeric thermal insulation board, 'k' value of 0.25 per inch at 75°F, 3.0 lb/cu.ft. density, with anti-

microbial coating, manufactured without use of CFCs, HFCs or HCFCs and suitable for mechanical fasteners or for gluing only with Armaflex 520 adhesive. Support LEED, IECC and ASHRAE 90.1 with R-4.2 at 1” thick, R-6 at 1.5” thick and R-8 at 2” thick.

F. Adhesives: Waterproof fire-retardant type. G. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive to ASTM E84, NFPA 255, UL 723. H. Joint Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh. I. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gauge.




J. Mechanical Fasteners: Pin-type with welded connection to duct side wall. Do not use nail-type fasteners or glue type connections.

K. Vapor Barrier Jacket 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, 0.0032

inch ASJ jacket. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM #96; 0.04 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. 2.7 ADHESIVE FOR DUCT INSULATION A. Water Base Type

1. Cain – Hydrotak 2. Duro Dyne – WSA 3. Hardcast - IA-901 4. Kingco - 10-568 5. Miracle - PF-101 6. Mon-Eco - 22-67 7. Techno Adhesive – 133 8. United McGill - Unitack

B. Solvent Base (Non-Flammable) 1. Cain - Safetak 2. Duro Dyne - FPG 3. Hardcast - Glas-Grip 648-NFSE 4. Kingco - 15-137 5. Miracle - PF-91 6. Mon-Eco - 22-24 7. Techno Adhesive - ‘Non-Flam’ 106 2.8 FASTENERS FOR DUCT INSULATION A. Adhesively secured fasteners not allowed. B. Approved Manufacturers 1. AGM Industries, Inc - “DynaPoint” Series DD-9 pin 2. Cain 3. Duro Dyne

4. Omark dished head “Insul-Pins”

C. Grip nails may be used if each nail is installed by “Grip Nail Air Hammer” or by Automatic Fastener Equipment” in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.




PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - Administration Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. C. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed and dry. 3.2 INSTALLATION (PIPE INSULATION) A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as required to meet or

exceed the Model Energy Code minimum values. B. Insulated pipe supported on trapeze type supports shall have a sheet metal saddle

installed between the insulation jacket and support (see Specification Section 23 05 29). Notching of pipe insulation around the support member is not acceptable.

C. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations, i.e. through floor slab and

wall sleeves. D. In exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. E. On insulated piping with vapor barrier, insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers,

flexible connections, and expansion joints. For insulation with self-sealing adhesive tab, install insulation such that the vapor barrier seal tab folds down towards the bottom of the pipe.

F. For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier. 2. For hot piping conveying fluids 140°F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at

equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. (Domestic water) 3. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140°F insulate flanges and unions at

equipment but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations. (Hydronic Piping) 4. Piping (6" or smaller): Insulate fittings, joints and valves with insulation of like

material and thickness as adjoining pipe and finish with ASJ or PVC jacket as follows in this Part 3.

G. Insulated cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature. (Domestic cold) 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets with the factory applied positive sealing system at

seams. (Also seal all joints.) 2. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers and other pipe

penetrations. 3. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible

connections, pump bodies and expansion joints.




4. Piping (6" and smaller): Insulate fittings, joints and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe finish with ASJ or PVC jacket as follows in this Part 3.

H. Provide an insert, not less than 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining

insulation, between support shield and piping, but under the finish jacket, on piping 2 inches diameter or larger, to prevent insulation from sagging at support points. Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts may be used.

I. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions and interruptions. J. Pipe covering shall be started at the coil or piece of equipment. All piping and valves

serving each coil or item of equipment including all branch arms shall be insulated. The last few feet of piping may not be left uninsulated.

K. For pipe exposed in finish spaces finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. Piping in roof

truss space of a finished space does not require PVC jacketing. L. Install No-Sweat flexible insulation system at all cold domestic valves and flow fittings

such that removal for servicing and testing and balancing leave the jacket and insulation intact and ready for reinstallation.

3.3 TOLERANCE A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at

normal conditions, as materials indicated. Substituted materials must be submitted for Engineer’s approval prior to installation.

3.4 SCHEDULE INSULATION PIPING TYPE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS Domestic Cold Water A/D Up to 3/4" 1/2" Domestic Cold Water A/D 1" and Over 1" Domestic Hot Water A/D Up to 1-1/4" 1" Domestic Hot Water A/D 1-1/2" and Over 1-1/2" Circulating Hot Water (Insulate same as domestic hot water) Rain Water, A.F.F., Vertical Piping A All 1" Rain Water, A.F.F., Horizontal Piping A All 1" Roof Drain Sump Bowls A All 1" Heating Water Supply and Return A 3/4" to 1-1/4” 1-1/2" Heating Water Supply and Return A 1-1/2” and up 2" Note: For hot water piping exposed to outdoor air, increase insulation thickness by 1". Note: PEXa and polypropylene piping shall have same insulation requirements as copper or steel.




Note: For hot water piping and domestic cold water piping smaller than 1-1/2” and located within a partition in the “conditioned spaces” reduction of pipe insulation

thickness by 1 inch shall be permitted, but not to a thickness less than 1 inch. * = Insulation installed in two layers with staggered joints and seams. 3.5 PAINTING (PIPE INSULATION)

A. None. 3.6 EXPOSED TOILET PIPING INSULATION A. All exposed hot water, cold water and drain, piping in the toilet areas shall be insulated

and covered with PVC jacket from floor, wall or ceiling to connected equipment. 3.7 PREPARATION (DUCT INSULATION)

A. Install external materials after ductwork has been approved. B. Insulated ductwork conveying air conditioning, room air or air below ambient

temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible

connections, and expansion joints. C. Insulated ductwork conveying heating air or air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends

of insulation.

D. Liner (Type A) Application: Only downstream of VAV Boxes 1. Adhere insulation with mechanical fasteners and adhesive for 100 percent

coverage. Secure insulation with mechanical fasteners on 15 inch centers maximum on all sides of ductwork per manufacturer's instruction. Seal and smooth joints. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.

E. External Insulation (Type B or Type C) Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor

barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. 3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical

fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping.




4. Seal all insulation butt joints and insulation terminations at diffusers, registers, branch ducts and main duct connections with tape such that no insulation is left exposed to ambient air.

F. External Insulation (Type D) Application:

1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier sleeve using vapor barrier adhesive tape. 2. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow

operation without disturbing wrapping or vapor barrier. 3. Slide sleeve over round branch ducts in five foot lengths. 4. Seal all insulation butt joints and insulation terminations at diffusers, registers,

branch ducts and main duct connections with tape such that no insulation is left exposed to ambient air.

G. Liner (Type E) Application: 1. Adhere insulation with mechanical fasteners adhesive for 100 percent coverage.

Secure insulation with mechanical fasteners on 15 inch centers maximum on all sides of ductwork per manufacturer's instruction. Seal and smooth joints. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.

2. As an option Armaflex 520 adhesive may be used without additional fasteners.

H. Ductwork dimensions indicated on Drawings are actual metal dimensions. Increasing duct dimensions for duct liner insulation thickness is not necessary. Round dimensions are the clear inside diameter after insulation.

I. Lag ductwork where indicated by applying insulation wrap with weighted jacket over to

ductwork. Applied covering to be airtight. Attach covering to duct per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.8 TOLERANCE (DUCT INSULATION) A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at

normal conditions, as materials indicated. 3.9 FAN POWER SYSTEMS (DUCT INSULATION) A. All fan powered supply air system such as packaged rooftop units shall have Type E liner

for a minimum of the first fifteen feet of supply and return duct (or more as shown on the plan sheets). The minimum fifteen feet shall include the vertical drop from RTU equipment.

B. After the minimum fifteen feet (or more as shown) of Type-E lined duct from the fan discharge, externally wrapped duct insulation and vapor barrier jacket shall be used. 3.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS (DUCT INSULATION) A. Provide 1" fiberglass insulation and vapor barrier jacket over entire connector to a point

12" downstream of connector.




3.11 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE INSULATION DUCTWORK TYPE THICKNESS FINISH

Internal Lining Downstream of VAV Boxes A / E 1” None Internal Lining in Supply Ducts (Where Noted) E 1" None Internal Lining in Return Ducts (Where Noted) E 1" None Internal Lining in Return Air Transfer A 1" None Unlined Exh/Relief within 10' of Exterior Opening B 1-1/2" Vapor Barrier (Refer to notes below about R-8 requirements) Round Metal Supply Ducts C 1-1/2" Vapor Barrier Round Metal Supply Ducts D 1-1/4" Vapor Barrier Rectangular Supply Ducts (Where duct is unlined) B / C 1-1/2" Vapor Barrier Flexible Connectors at Supply Air Ductwork B / C 1-1/2" Vapor Barrier VAV Box Reheat Coils B / C 1-1/2" Vapor Barrier Notes: 1. On the Plans where ductwork is noted as “10/10L”, the “L” designates duct liner. 2. On the Plans where ductwork is noted as __ ”∅ I.D.”, “the I.D.” designates the duct as double wall insulated duct. External insulation is not required. 3. Supply air ductwork downstream of VAV box shall have 1” Type E liner for a minimum of five feet or more as shown on plans. 4. All external wrap insulation exposed from floor to 8' above finish floor shall be rigid Type-B insulation with vapor barrier jacket. 3.12 LOCAL CODES - INSULATION THICKNESS A. Where local codes are more stringent than the material thickness specified above,

Contractor shall increase insulation thickness to comply with applicable Codes. Do not increase duct liner thickness without consulting the Engineer.





BLANK PAGE




SECTION 230923 – DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM Page 1

SECTION 230923 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 PRODUCTS FURNISHED, BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 232113 Hydronic Piping 1. Flow Meters 2. Flow Switches 3. Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets 4. Control Valves B. Section 230933 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers that are provided as part packaged

equipment RTU’s. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 230500 - Basic Fire Protection, Plumbing and HVAC Requirements

B. Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC

C. Section 230933 - Variable Frequency Motor Controllers D. Section 230993 - Sequence of Operation

E. Section 238103 -Packaged Rooftop AC Units

F. Section 260500 - Basic Electrical Requirements

1.3 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES

A. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA)

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

C. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 1. ASHRAE 135-2004 BACnet Standard

D. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

E. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

F. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

I. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)





J. U.S. National Archives and Records Administration (NARA) 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Insure terminology used in submittals conforms to ASHRAE\85 or ASME MC85.1. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Automatic temperature control field monitoring and control system using field

programmable micro-processor based units. All new equipment shall be compatible with the existing system.

B. All necessary central and remote hardware, software and interconnecting wire and

conduit shall be provided. C. Terminal unit controls for variable air volume terminals, radiation, reheat coils, unit

heaters, air handling units shall all be electronic. 1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Extensive effort has been performed to provide a detailed written Sequence of Operations on the plan sheets. This Temperature Control Contractor shall insert the Sequence of Operations from the plan sheets directly into their submittal. 1. If the Contractor wishes to change the description in any way, that change must be approved by the Design Engineer before their drawings are submitted. 2. Submittals that do not include this sequence of operations requirement will not be reviewed or approved. 3. This is being required to ensure the best coordination possible between this submittal and the drawings original intent, to avoid contradictions and to provide the best clarity possible for the owner.

B. Shop drawings shall be 11 inch by 17 inch, landscape, bound on the left edge. They shall be produced with Microsoft Visio. Organize the packages by building.

1. All valve and damper schedules shall be as large as possible on individual 11x17 sheets.

C. All text based documents and product data sheets shall be 8 ½ inch by 11 inch format bound on the left edge. To the maximum extent possible, Adobe Acrobat shall be used to produce the documents in a portable document format (PDF).

D. Software files shall be submitted on fully labeled CDs that shall include a table of contents file in PDF format that provides a description of all of the files on the CD.

E. Submittals Prior To Construction 1. Shop Drawings

a. System Architecture Design Diagram 1) This is a riser diagram that shall show the IP layer and all of the

field bus layers.





2) It shall show each computer, printer, router, repeater, controller, and protocol translator that is connected to either the IP layer or any of the field busses.

3) Each component that is shown shall have a name that is representative of how it will be identified in the completed database and the manufacturer’s name and model number.

4) The physical relationship of one component to another component shall reflect the proposed installation. Example: If AHU1 controller is the closest controller to the Building Controller on the field bus, then this device shall be shown as the first device on the riser diagram just below the Building Controller.

5) This diagram shall not include power supplies, sensors or end devices.

b. Layout Design Drawing for each control panel: 1) The layout drawing shall be to scale with all devices shown in

their proposed positions. 2) All control devices shall be identified by name. 3) All terminal strips and wire channels shall be shown. 4) All control transformers shall be shown. 5) All 120 VAC receptacles shall be shown. 6) All IP connection points shall be shown.

c. Wiring Design Diagram for each control panel. 1) The control voltage wiring diagram shall clearly designate

devices powered by each control transformer. If the control devices use half wave power, the diagram shall clearly show the consistent grounding of the appropriate power connection. All wire identification numbers shall be annotated on the diagram.

2) The Field Bus wiring diagram shall clearly show the use of the daisy chain wiring concept, the order in which the devices are connected to the Field Bus, and the location of end of segment termination devices. All wire identification numbers shall be annotated on the diagram.

3) If shielded communication wiring is used, the grounding of the shield shall be shown.

4) The terminal strip wiring diagram shall identify all connections on both sides of the terminal strip. Wiring label numbers for all wiring leaving the control panel shall be annotated on the diagram.

d. Wiring Design Diagram for individual components (controllers, protocol translators, etc.): The wiring diagram for each component shall identify all I/O, power, and communication wiring and the locations on the terminal blocks to which the wires are landed. Example: Fan Status sensor is wired from terminals 5/6 on the controller to terminals 17 and 18 on the terminal strip.

e. Installation Design Detail for each I/O device. 1) A drawing of the wiring details for each sensor and/or end

device.





2) For devices with multiple quantities, a standard detail may be submitted.

f. A System Flow Design Diagram for each controlled system. 1) A two dimensional cross sectional diagram showing key components such as fans, coils, dampers, valves, pump, etc. 2) Identify the locations and names of all sensors and end devices

that are associated with the control system. Label the panel name and terminal numbers where the connections are landed.

3) A legend shall be provided for all symbols used. g. Product Data: Provide data for each system component and software module. h. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include for all manufactured components. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual location of control components, including panels, thermostats

and sensors. B. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences. Also show

any existing system modification to the existing system. Submit two sets of revised drawings to the owner at completion of the contract.

C. During the construction, Contractor shall maintain a clean set of drawings for the sole

purpose of recording changes and actual “as installed” information. Marking of the record set shall be done methodically as work progresses, clearly and neatly, in color.

D. As a general guide, the type of information to be recorded on the record set includes: 1. Revisions made, except minor or non-critical dimensions. 2. Omissions, including work omitted by accepted alternates. 3. Locations of control valves and dampers. 4. Additions to the work. 5. Changed footage or other elevations.

6. Changes in locations of control panelboards, control equipment, outlets, control dampers and other similar data.

E. Include above data specified in "Submittals" in final "Record Documents" form. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Include interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed system with identified

and numbered, system components and devices. C. Include keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator

function.





D. Include inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances.

1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Teletrol B. Installer: Climate Makers 1.10 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene a conference one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under

provisions of Division 01. B. Require attendance of all parties directly affecting the work of this Section. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Insure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components

in other systems. B. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems

equipment such as RTU’s and VAV air terminal units. C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the complete installation and commissioning

of the DDC System extension including, but not limited to, interfacing of new and existing DDC equipment, sensors and controls, existing central computer, programming peripherals, communication links and new remote panel programming.

D. After the installation the Contractor shall be responsible for debugging and calibration,

including software and application strategies. E. Contractor shall be responsible for “all on-site programming and editing required to

provide a fully operational DDC System extension. (System extension shall be 100 percent programmed for all points listed in I/O Summary Table.)

F. Ensure system is completed and commissioned. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty under provisions of the contract following final acceptance of

the project by the Architect/Owner. B. Warranty: Include coverage for field programmable micro-processor based units and all

installed equipment and accessories.





PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS (BMS) BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS A. Teletrol by Climate Makers. B. No approved equals. 2.2 GENERAL PRODUCT DESCRIPTION A. The extension of the existing Facility Management System (FMS) shall be capable of integrating multiple building functions, including equipment supervision and control,

alarm management, energy management and trend data collection. B. The FMS shall consist of the following: 1. Connection to the existing Digital Panel 2. Standalone Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) C. The system is modular in nature and shall permit expansion of both capacity and

functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, ASCs and operator devices. Each remote panel shall have a minimum of 10 percent spare capacity for future point connection. The type of spares shall be in the same proportion as the implemented I/O functions of the panel, but in no case shall there be less than two (2) spares of each implemented I/O type. Provide all processors, power supplies and communication controllers complete so that the implementation of a point only requires the addition of the appropriate point input/output termination module and wiring. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and have at least 15 percent of the additional memory available for future use.

D. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices.

2.3 NETWORKING/COMMUNICATIONS A. The extension of the existing FMS shall be integrated into existing network. Inherent in

the system's design shall be the ability to expand or modify the network either via a local or web-based network.

B. Local Network 1. Computer/Panel Support: The existing Computer or Digital Panel shall directly

oversee a local network such that communications may be executed directly to and between ASCs. The Personal Computer version and Digital Panel version shall be referred to as the "Digital Panel(s)" throughout this document.

2. Data Access: All operator devices shall have the ability to access all point status and application report data on the network. Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the facility management system.

3. Global Data Sharing: Global Data Sharing or Global Point Broadcasting shall allow point data to be shared between ASCs, when it would be inefficient or





impractical to locate multiple sensors. 4. General Network Design: Network design shall include the following provisions:

a. Data transfer rates for alarm reporting and quick point status from multiple ASCs. The minimum baud rate shall be 9600 baud.

b. Support of any combination of ASCs. A minimum of 100 ASCs shall be supported on a single local network. The bus shall be addressable for up to 155 ASCs.

c. Detection of a single or multiple failures of ASCs or the network media. d. Error detection, correction and retransmission to guarantee data integrity. e. Commonly available, multiple-sourced, networking components shall be

used.

f. Use of an industry standard protocol, such as Optomux and IEEE RS-485 communications interface.

2.4 DIGITAL PANELS A. General: Digital panels shall be microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, multi-user, digital

control processors. B. Memory: Each digital panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating

system and data bases including: 1. Control processed 2. Energy Management Applications 3. Alarm Management 4. Trend Data 5. Maintenance Support Applications 6. Operator I/O 7. Dial-Up Communications 8. Manual Override Monitoring

C. Expandability: The system shall be modular in nature and shall permit easy expansion

through the addition of field controllers, sensors and actuators.

D. Serial Communication Ports: Digital panels shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices such as lap-top computers, personal computers and video display terminals. E. Hardware Override Monitoring: Digital panels shall monitor the status of all overrides and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. F. Integrated On-Line Diagnostics: Each digital panel shall continuously perform self- diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all subsidiary equipment. Digital panels shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each digital panel.





G. Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard 587-1980. Isolation levels shall be sufficiently high as to allow all signal wiring to be run in the same conduit as high voltage wiring where acceptable by electrical code.

H. Power Fail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of the Digital Panel to prevent the loss of data base or operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery backup shall be provided to support the real time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. Upon restoration of normal power, the Digital Panel shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. Should Digital Panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the Digital Panel via the local RS-232C port or telephone line dial-in.

2.5 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES A. General 1. All necessary software extensions to form a completely integrated operating

system for the entire complex, as described in this specification, shall be provided. 2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral

part of the Digital Panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.

B. Control Software Description 1. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for

limiting the number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.

2. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.

C. Energy Management Applications: Digital Panels shall have the ability to perform any or

all of the following energy management routines: 1. Time of scheduling 2. Calendar based scheduling 3. Holiday scheduling 4. Optimal start 5. Optimal stop 6. Load rolling 7. Heating/Cooling interlock

D. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention

and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment described in the "Execution" portion of this specification.

E. Programming Capability: Digital Panels shall be able to execute configured processes

defined by the user to automatically perform calculations and control routines.





1. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a configured process: a. Any system-measured point data or status b. Any calculated data c. Any results from other processes d. Boolean logic operators (and, or)

2. Process Triggers: Configured processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following:

a. Time of day b. Calendar date c. Other processes d. Events (e.g., point alarms)

3. Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other ASCs.

4. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other ASCs on the local network.

2.6 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS - HVAC APPLICATIONS A. Each digital panel shall be able to extend its monitoring and control through the use of standalone Application Specific Controllers (ASCs). B. Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified

control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a micro-processor-bases, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor.

C. Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data

bases including: 1. Control Processes 2. Energy Management Applications 3. Operator I/O (Portable Service Terminal)

D. Application Descriptions: 1. VAV Modular Assembly (VMA): a. The VAV Modular Assembly shall provide both standalone and networked

direct digital control of pressure-independent, variable air volume terminal units. It shall address both single and dual duct applications.

b. The VAV Modular Assembly shall be a configurable digital controller with integral differential pressure transducer and damper actuator. All

components shall be connected and mounted as a single assembly that can be removed as one piece.

c. The integral damper actuator shall be a fast response stepper motor capable of stroking 90 degrees in30 seconds for quick damper positioning to speed commissioning and troubleshooting tasks.

d. The controller shall determine airflow by dynamic pressure measurement using an integral dead-ended differential pressure transducer. The transducer shall be maintenance-free and shall not require air filters.

e. Each controller shall have the ability to automatically calibrate the flow





sensor to eliminate pressure transducer offset error due to ambient temperature/humidity effects.

f. The controller shall utilize a proportional plus integration (PI) algorithm for the space temperature control loops. g. Each controller shall continuously, adaptively tune the control algorithms to improve control and controller reliability through reduced actuator duty cycle. In addition, this tuning reduces commissioning costs, and eliminates the maintenance costs of manually re-tuning loops to compensate for seasonal or other load changes. h. The controller shall provide the ability to download and upload VMA

configuration files, both locally and via the communications network. Controllers shall be able to be loaded individually or as a group using a zone schedule generated spreadsheet of controller parameters.

i. Control setpoint changes initiated over the network shall be written to VMA non-volatile memory to prevent loss of setpoint changes and to provide consistent operation in the event of communication failure. j. The controller firmware shall be flash-upgradeable remotely via the communications bus to minimize costs of feature enhancements. k. The controller shall provide fail-soft operation if the airflow signal becomes unreliable, by automatically reverting to a pressure-dependent control mode. l. The controller shall interface with balancer tools that allow automatic

recalculation of box flow pickup gain ("K" factor), and the ability to directly command the airflow control loop to the box minimum and maximum

airflow setpoints. m. Controller performance shall be self-documenting via on-board diagnostics. These diagnostics shall consist of control loop performance measurements executing at each control loop's sample interval, which may be used to continuously monitor and document system performance. The VMA shall calculate exponentially weighted moving averaged (EWMA) for each of the following. These metrics shall be available to the end user for efficient management of the VAV terminals.

1) Absolute temperature loop error. 2) Signed temperature loop error. 3) Absolute airflow loop error. 4) Signed airflow loop error. 5) Average damper actuator duty cycle.

n. The controller shall detect system error conditions to assist in managing the VAV zones. The error conditions shall consist of: 1) Unreliable space temperature sensor. 2) Unreliable differential pressure sensor. 3) Starved box. 4) Actuator stall. 5) Insufficient cooling. 6) Insufficient heating.

o. The controller shall provide a flow test function to view damper position vs. flow in a graphical format. The information would alert the user to check damper position. The VMA would also provide a method to calculate actuator duty cycle as an indicator of damper actuator runtime.





p. The controller shall provide a compliant interface for ASHRAE Standard 62-1989 (indoor air quality), and shall be capable of resetting the box minimum airflow based on the percent of outdoor air in the primary air stream.

q. The controller shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 (energy efficiency) by preventing simultaneous heating and cooling, and where the control strategy requires reset of airflow while in reheat, by modulating the box reheat device fully open prior to increasing the airflow in the heating sequence.

r. Inputs: 1) Analog inputs with user defined ranges shall monitor the following

analog signals, without the addition of equipment outside the terminal controller cabinet: • 0-10 VDC Sensors • 1000ohm RTDs • NTC Thermistors

2) Binary inputs shall monitor dry contact closures. Input shall provide filtering to eliminate false signals resulting from input "bouncing."

3) For noise immunity, the input shall be internally isolated from power, communications, and output circuits.

4) Provide side loop application for humidity control. s. Outputs: 1) Analog outputs shall provide the following control outputs: 0-10 VDC. 2) Binary outputs shall provide a SPST Triac output rated for 500 mA at 24 VAC. 3) For noise immunity, the outputs shall be internally isolated from power, communications and other output circuits.

t. Application Configuration 1) The VAV Modular Assembly shall be configured with software

tools that provide a simple Question/Answer format for developing applications and downloading.

u. Sensor Support 1) The VMA shall support an LCD display room sensor. 2) The VMA shall also support standard room sensors as defined by analog input requirements. 3) The VMA shall support humidity sensors defined by the AI side loop.

2. RTU Controllers: a. RTU controllers shall support, but not be limited to the following configurations of systems to address current requirements as described in the "Execution" portion of this specification and for future expansion:

Mixed Air-Single Path Generic Point Multi-plexing

b. RTU controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion.





c. RTU controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to perform the Sequence of Operation specified in the "Execution" portion of this specification.

d. Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Each AHU Controller shall automatically and continuously maintain a history of the associated zone temperature to allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and

equipment performance for the past 24 hours. A minimum of two samples per hour shall be stored.

e. Alarm Management: Each RTU controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by

reducing unnecessary communications. 2.7 OPERATOR INTERFACE A. Dynamic Graphic Displays: Graphic system schematics for each new piece of

Mechanical equipment, rooftop units, terminal units and VAV reheats shall be provided as specified in the Execution portion of this specification to optimize system performance

analysis and speed alarm recognition. Graphics shall be provided to the same level of complexity as other equipment and systems within the current BAS.

1. System Selection/Penetration. The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection or text-based commands.

2. Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention.

B. System Configuration and Definition: All new temperature and equipment control

strategies and energy management routines shall be definable by the operator. System definition and modification procedures shall not interfere with normal system operation and control.

1. The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation necessary to allow an operator to independently perform control/programming functions.

2. Programming Description: Definition of operator device characteristics, ASCs, individual points, applications and control sequences shall be performed through

fill-in-the-blank templates. a. Network-Wide Strategy Development: Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be restricted to a single ASC, but shall be able to include data from any and all other ASCs to allow the development of network-wide control strategies. 3. System Definition/Control Sequence Documentation: All portions of system

definition shall be self-documenting to provide hardcopy printouts of all configuration and application data.





4. Data Base Save/Restore/Back-Up: Back-up copies of all ASC and Digital Panel data bases shall be stored in at least one personal computer or lap-top. Users shall also have the ability to manually execute downloads of an ASC or Digital Panel data base.

2.8 SENSORS AND INSTRUMENTATION DEVICES

A. Transmitters 1. The electrical output of a transmitter shall be 0 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 milliamps or 0

to 20 milliamps for analog variables and binary contacts for status variables. 2. The resolution of a transmitter may not exceed the following:

a. 0.01 Volts per increment for 0-10 VDC transmitters b. 0.02 Milliamps per increment for 4-12 or 0-20 milliamp transmitters. c. The process variable change that corresponds to the transmitter

resolution is the smallest reportable change that can be processed. 3. Transmitters that connect directly to the FT-10A field bus are considered to be

application specific devices.

B. Temperature Sensors 1. Temperature sensors shall be resistance element detector (RTD) type or sealed

element thermistor type. 2. Space temperature sensors shall be provided with blank covers with no exposed

setpoints or setpoint adjustment. 3. Duct temperature sensors shall be rigid stem or averaging type as required for the

application. All mixed air and discharge air temperature sensors shall be of the remote bulb type.

4. Temperature sensors may be transmitters or thermistors as long as all performance requirements are met.

5. RTD’s shall only be used with transmitter based sensors. They shall not be wired directly to a controller.

6. Conditioned Space Temperature Sensors a. Operating Range: 50 to 86°F b. Conformity: +/- 1 degree F over the specified operating range

7. Duct Temperature Sensors a. Operating Range: 40 to 140°F b. Conformity: +/- 2 degrees F

C. Point Temperature Sensors 1. Shall be encapsulated in epoxy, series 300 stainless steel, anodized aluminum, or

copper.

D. Thermowells 1. Thermowells shall be series 300 threaded stainless steel. 2. Inside diameter and insertion length shall be as required for the application.





E. Relative Humidity Sensors 1. Shall use bulk polymer, resistive or thin film capacitive type, non-saturating

sensing elements capable of withstanding a saturated condition without permanently affecting calibration or sustaining damage.

2. Shall include removable protective membrane filters. 3. For exterior installations, the sensors shall survive below freezing temperatures

and direct contact with moisture without affecting sensor calibration. 4. For indoor installations, the sensor calibration shall not be altered by exposure to

a condensing air stream. 5. The sensors shall be of the wall mounted or duct mounted type as required by the

application and shall be furnished will all accessories for a complete and functional installation.

6. Sensors used in duct high limit applications shall use a bulk polymer resistive sensing element.

7. Duct mounted sensors shall be equipped with a duct probe designed to protect the sensing element from dust accumulation and mechanical damage.

8. Operating Range: 0 to 100% relative humidity. 9. Conformity: +/- 2 % relative humidity. 10. Environmental Range: 25 to 140°F.

F. Thermostats

1. Electric Low Limit Duct Thermostat: a. Snap acting, single pole, single throw, manual reset switch tripping when

temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or below setpoint.

b. Bulb length: Minimum 20 feet. c. Furnish one thermostat for every 20 sq. ft of coil surface.

2. Electric High Limit Duct Thermostat: a. Snap acting, single pole, single throw, automatic reset switch tripping

when temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or above setpoint.

b. Bulb length: Minimum 20 feet. c. Furnish one thermostat for every 20 sq. ft of coil surface.

3. Fire Thermostats: a. UL labeled, factory set in accordance with NFPA 90A. b. Normally closed contacts, manual reset.

G. Flow Nozzles 1. Flow nozzles shall be made of austenitic stainless steel with an accuracy of +/-

1% of full flow. 2. The inlet nozzle form shall be elliptical and the nozzle throat shall be the

quadrant of an ellipse. The thickness of the nozzle wall and flange shall be such that distortion of the nozzle throat from strains caused by the pipeline temperature and pressure, flange bolting, or other methods of installing the nozzle in the pipeline shall not cause the accuracy to degrade beyond the specified limit.

3. The outside diameter of the nozzle flange or the design of the flange facing shall be such that the nozzle throat shall be centered accurately in the pipe.





H. Venturi Tubes 1. Venturi tubes shall be made of cast iron or cast steel and shall have an accuracy

of +/- 1% of full flow. 2. The throat section shall be lined with austenitic stainless steel. Thermal

expansion characteristics of the lining shall be the same as that of the throat casting material. The surface of the throat lining shall be machined to a +/- 50 micro-inch finish, including the short curvature leading from the converging section into the throat.

I. Flow Switches 1. Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of +/-10% of actual flow setting.

Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the operating flow range. The switch shall have Form C snap-action contacts, rated for the application.

2. The flow switch shall have non flexible paddle with magnetically actuated contacts and be rated for service at a pressure greater than the installed conditions.

3. Flow switch for use in sewage system shall be rated for use in corrosive environments encountered.

J. Current Transducers 1. Current transducers shall accept an AC current input and shall have an accuracy

of +/- 2% of full scale. 2. An integral power supply shall be provided for the analog output signal if

required. The device shall have a means for calibration.

K. Current Sensing Relays 1. Current sensing relays (CSRs) shall provide a normally-open contact with a

voltage and amperage rating greater than its connected load. Current sensing relays shall be of split-core design.

2. The CSR shall be rated for operation at 200% of the connected load. Voltage isolation shall be a minimum of 600 volts. The CSR shall auto-calibrate to the connected load.

L. Voltage Transducers 1. Voltage transducers shall accept an AC voltage input and have an accuracy of +/-

0.25% of full scale. 2. An integral power supply shall be provided if required for the analog output

signal. The device shall have a means for calibration. Line side fuses for transducer protection shall be provided.

M. Occupancy Sensors 1. Occupancy sensors shall have occupancy-sensing sensitivity adjustment and an

adjustable off-delay timer with a range encompassing 30 seconds to 15 minutes. Occupancy sensors shall be rated for operation in ambient air temperatures ranging from 50°F to 104°F or temperatures normally encountered in the installed location. Sensors integral to wall mount on-off light switches shall have an auto-off switch. Wall switch sensors shall be decorator style and shall fit behind a standard decorator type wall plate. All occupancy sensors, power





packs, and slave packs shall be UL listed. In addition to any outputs required for lighting control, the occupancy sensor shall provide a contact output rated at 1A at 24 VAC or a SNVT output.

2. Passive Infrared Occupancy Sensors: PIR occupancy sensors shall have a multi-level, multi-segmented viewing lens and a conical field of view with a viewing angle of 180 degrees and a detection of at least 6 meters (20 feet) unless otherwise shown or specified. PIR Sensors shall provide field-adjustable background light-level adjustment with an adjustment range suitable to the light level in the sensed area, room, or space. PIR sensors shall be immune to false triggering from RFI and EMI.

3. Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensors: Ultrasonic sensors shall operate at a minimum frequency 32 kHz and shall be designed to not interfere with hearing aids. Dual-Technology Occupancy Sensor (PIR and Ultrasonic) Dual-Technology Occupancy Sensors shall meet the requirements of both PIR and Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensor.

4. Dew Point Sensor a. Sensor shall be suitable for measurement of dew point from -40 to +80

°F over a pressure range of 0 to 150 psig. The transmitter shall provide both dry bulb and dew point temperatures on separate outputs.

b. The end to end accuracy of the dew point shall be +/-5°F and the dry bulb shall be +/-1°F. Sensor shall be automatic zeroing and shall require no normal maintenance or periodic recalibration.

N. Temperature Switches 1. Duct Mounted Low Limit Safety Switch. Duct mount temperature low limit

switches (freezestats) shall be manual reset, low temperature safety switches with a minimum element length of 1 foot per square-foot of coverage which shall respond to the coldest 18 inch segment with an accuracy of 3.6°F. The switch shall have a field-adjustable set point with a range of at least +30 to +50°F. The switch shall have two sets of contacts, and each contact shall have a rating greater than its connected load. Contacts shall open or close upon drop of temperature below set point as shown and shall remain in this state until reset.

2. Pipe Mounted Limit Switch. a. Pipe mount temperature limit switches (aquastats) shall have a field

adjustable set point between 60 to 90°F, an accuracy of +/- 3.6°F) and a 10°F fixed dead band.

b. The switch shall have two sets of contacts, and each contact shall have a rating greater than its connected load. Contacts shall open or close upon change of temperature above or below set point as shown.

O. Damper End Switches 1. Each end switch shall be a hermetically sealed switch with a trip lever and over-

travel mechanism. 2. The switch enclosure shall be suitable for mounting on the duct exterior and shall permit setting the position of the trip lever that actuates the switch. The trip lever shall be aligned with the damper blade.





P. Combination Carbon Dioxide (CO2) and Temperature Sensor: 1. Infrared and maintenance-free carbon dioxide transmitter for installation

on indoor walls. 2. Measures the carbon dioxide concentration in the ambient air, up to 2,000 ppm,

and transforms the data into a 0-10V or 0-5V output signal. 3. Equip with passive temperature elements selectable at 1.8 kohm or 10 kohm. 4. Response time is less than three (3) minutes. 5. Utilizes non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) with diffusion sampling. 6. Accuracy of ±1% of measurement range and ±5% of measured value and

±10 ppm annual drift. 7. Temperature Sensor:

a. Operating Range at -40°F to 158°F. b. Output Signal at 0-10V. or 0 - 5V. c. Accuracy of ± 1.4°F at 77°F

Q. Thermostat and Sensor Guards

1. BAPI-GUARD, or approved equal manufacturer prior to bidding, for protection from tampering, adjustment and physical damage.

2. Constructed of thick, durable polycarbonate with: a. Key lock. b. Low profile, compact design. c. Suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.

R. Carbon Dioxide Sensor

1. Veris #OWL and CDL CO2, RH and Temperature sensing all in one unit including the following features: a. 5-year calibration interval. b. Low ambient sensitivity. c. Field-selectable outputs. d. Integrated transducer and probe. e. 4-20mA analog output. f. 32° to 122°F CO2, operating range. g. 0-2000 ppm CO2 range. h. 2% plus or minus CO2 accuracy. i. 0-100% RH range with ± 0.1% accuracy. j. 50°-95° RH and temperature operating range. k. 1°F ± accuracy.

S. Insertion Turbine Flowmeters 1. Veris Industries SDI-Series is standard of design.

2. Insertion Turbine Flowmeter accuracy shall be +/-1% of reading for a minimum turndown ratio of 1:1 through a maximum turndown ratio of 50:1. Repeatability shall be +/-0.25% of reading. The meter flow sensing element shall operate over a range suitable for the installed location with a pressure loss limited to 1% of operating pressure at maximum flow rate.

3. Design of the flowmeter probe assembly shall incorporate integral flow, temperature, and pressure sensors.





4. The turbine rotor assembly shall be constructed of Series 300 stainless steel and use Teflon seals.

2.9 OUTPUT DEVICES, VALVES AND DAMPERS

A. Output Devices 1. Output Devices as Application Specific Devices

a. Output Devices that receive commands as network variables are considered to be application specific devices.

b. These devices shall meet the requirements specified previously for application specific devices.

2. Actuators a. Actuators shall be electric (electronic). b. Electric actuators shall have an electronic cut off or other means to

provide burnout protection if stalled. Actuators shall have a visible position indicator.

c. Electric actuators shall provide position feedback to the controller as shown. Actuators shall smoothly open or close the devices to which they are applied.

d. Electric actuators shall have a full stroke response time in both directions of 90 seconds or less at rated load.

e. Where multiple electric actuators operate from a common signal, the actuators shall provide an output signal identical to its input signal to the additional devices.

f. Positive Positioning Devices: Positive positioning devices shall be a pneumatic relay with a mechanical position feedback mechanism and an adjustable operating range and starting point.

3. Electronic Damper Actuators a. Electronic damper actuators shall be direct shaft mount. b. Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided as required by the

Sequence of Operations. Damper sections shall be sized based on actuator manufacturer's recommendations for face velocity, differential pressure and damper type. The actuator mounting arrangement and spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally closed positions of the dampers, as required. All actuators (except terminal units) shall be furnished with mechanical spring return unless otherwise specified in the Sequences of Operations. All actuators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the travel in either direction and a gear release to allow manual positioning.

c. Modulating actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC power supply, consume no more than 15 VA and be UL listed. The control signal shall e 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA, and the actuator shall provide a clamp position feedback signal of 2-10 VDC. The feedback signal of one damper actuator for each separately controlled damper shall be wired back to a terminal strip in the control panel for trouble-shooting purposes.

d. Two-position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or 120 VAC power supply and be UL listed. Isolation, smoke, exhaust fan and other dampers, as specified in the sequence of operations, shall be furnished with adjustable end switches to indicate open/closed position or be hard wired to start/stop





associated fan. Two-position actuators, as specified in Sequence of Operations as "quick acting", shall move full stroke within 20 seconds. All smoke damper actuators shall be quick acting.

4. Electronic Valve Actuators a. Electronic valve actuators shall be manufactured by the valve manufacturer. b. Each actuator shall have current limiting circuitry incorporated in its design

to prevent damage to the actuator. c. Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided as required by the

Sequence of Operations. Actuators shall provide the minimum torque required for proper valve close-off against the system pressure for the required application. The valve actuator shall be sized based on valve manufacturer's recommendations for flow and pressure differential. All actuators shall fail in the last position unless specified with mechanical spring return in the sequence of operations. The spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally closed positions of the valves, as required. All direct shaft mount rotational actuators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the travel in either direction.

d. Modulating actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC and 120 VAC power supply and be UL listed. The control signal shall be 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA and the actuator shall provide a clamp position feedback signal of 2-10 VDC. The feedback signal shall be independent of the input signal and may be used to parallel other actuators and provide true position indication. The feedback signal of each valve actuator (except terminal valves) shall be wired back to a terminal strip in the control panel for trouble-shooting purposes.

e. Two-position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or 120 VAC power supply and be UL listed. Butterfly isolation and other valves, as specified in the Sequence of Operations, shall be furnished with adjustable end switches to indicate open/closed position or be hard wired to start/stop the associated pump.

5. Relays a. Control relay contacts shall have utilization category and ratings selected for

the application, with a minimum of two sets of contacts enclosed in a dust proof enclosure. Each set of contacts shall incorporate a normally open (NO), normally closed (NC) and common contact.

b. Relays shall be rated for a minimum life of one million operations. Operating time shall be 20 milliseconds or less. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices to limit transients to 150% of rated coil voltage.

6. Automatic Control Valves a. General

1) Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and stuffing boxes with extended necks to clear the piping insulation. Valve bodies shall meet ANSI/ASME B16.34 or ANSI/ASME B16.15 pressure and temperature class ratings based on the design operating temperature and 150% of the system design operating pressure.

2) Unless otherwise specified or shown, valve leakage shall meet ANSI/FCI 70-2 Class IV leakage rating (0.01% of valve Kv).





Unless otherwise specified or shown, valves shall have globe-style bodies.

3) Unless otherwise specified the following applies: (a) Bodies for valves 1.5 inches and smaller shall be brass or

bronze, with threaded or union ends. (b) Bodies for 2 inch valves shall have threaded ends. (c) Bodies for valves 2 to 3 inches shall be of brass, bronze, or

iron. (d) Bodies for valves 2.5 inches and larger shall be provided

with flanged-end connections. (e) For modulating applications, the valve coefficient shall be

within 100 to 125% of valve coefficient shown. (f) For two position applications, where the two positions are

full open and full closed, the valve coefficient shall be the largest available for the valve size.

(g) Valve and actuator combinations shall be normally open or normally closed as shown.

b. Ball Valves 1) Balls shall be stainless steel. 2) Valves shall have blow-out proof stems.

c. Butterfly Valves 1) Butterfly valves shall be threaded lug type suitable for dead-end

service and modulation to the fully-closed position, with carbon-steel bodies and non-corrosive discs, stainless steel shafts supported by bearings, and EPDM seats suitable for temperatures from -20 to +250°F.

2) The rated flow coefficient for butterfly valves shall be the value at 70% (60 degrees) open position.

3) Valve leakage shall meet ANSI/FCI 70-2 Class VI leakage rating. d. Two-Way Valves

1) Two-way modulating valves used for liquids shall have an equal- percentage characteristic.

e. Three-Way Valves: 1) Three-way modulating valves shall provide equal percentage flow

control with constant total flow throughout full plug travel. f. Hydronic System Control Valves:

1) All automatic control valves shall be fully proportioning and provide near linear heat transfer control. The valves shall be quiet in operation and fail-safe open, closed, or in their last position. All valves shall operate in sequence with another valve when required by the Sequence of Operations. All control valves shall be sized by the control manufacturer, and shall be guaranteed to meet the heating and cooling loads, as specified. All control valves shall be suitable for the system flow conditions and close against the differential pressures involved. Body pressure rating and connection type (sweat, screwed, or flanged) shall conform to the pipe schedule elsewhere in this Specification.)





2) Hot water control valves shall be modulating ball valves or butterfly, if required by the specific application. Modulating water valves shall be sized per manufacturer's recommendations for the given application. In general, valves (2 or 3-way) serving variable volume or constant air handling unit or rooftop unit coils shall be sized for a pressure drop of 4 PSI. 3) Ball valves shall be used for hot water applications, water terminal reheat coils, radiant panels, unit heaters, package air conditioning units and fan coil units except those described hereinafter.

3) Butterfly valves shall be acceptable for modulating large flow applications greater than modulating plug valves, and for all two-position, open/close applications. In-line and/or three-way butterfly valves shall be heavy-duty pattern with a body rating comparable to the pipe rating, replaceable lining suitable for temperature of system, and a stainless steel vane. Valves for modulating service shall be sized and travel limited to 50 degrees of full open. Valves for isolation service shall be the same as the pipe. Valves in the closed position shall be bubble-tight.

4) Valves shall have modified linear characteristics. 7. Control Dampers a. All dampers are integral within the packaged RTU’s. 2.10 AIR FLOW/TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT A. Manufacturers:

1. Ebtron - Gold Series Models 2. Air Monitor Corp. 3. Or approved equal prior to bidding

B. Air Flow/Temperature Measurement - General

1. The BAS Contractor shall verify the compatibility of the selected device with the intended airflow measuring application.

2. The air flow/temperature measurement station (AFTMS) indicated on the plans shall be capable of monitoring air flow and temperature rates at each measurement location. Sensors shall use thermal dispersion technology with two “bead in glass”, hermetically sealed thermistor probes at each measurement point. The system shall be factory tested prior to shipment and not require calibration or adjustment over the life of the equipment when installed in accordance to manufacturer’s guidelines. Each sensor probe shall be provided with a UL plenum-rated connecting cable with circular terminal connectors and gold plated contacts. Connecting cable shall be a minimum of 10 feet in length (up to 50 feet)

for each probe as required for mounting in location with proper ambient conditions. Sensor probes shall be “plug and play” design and do not have to be matched to a specific transmitter. All sensor calibration data shall be stored in the sensor probe. No additional devices or transducers shall be required to interface with the host controls.

3. Sensors shall be factory-calibrated at 16 air flow rates and 3 temperatures to NIST-





traceable standards for both airflow and temperature. Each sensing point shall independently measure airflow and temperature prior to averaging. Installed accuracy shall be percent of reading and demonstrated at both maximum and minimum air flow rates for each measurement location.

C. Duct and Plenum Mounted Sensor Probes

1. Sensor probes shall be constructed of gold anodized aluminum alloy tube with 303 stainless steel mounting brackets. Probes shall be constructed as insertion, internal, or standoff mounting, depending on the installation requirements.

2. Probe Performance Requirements: the sensor accuracy for airflow shall be at least 2% of Reading over the sensor probe operating ranges. The installed total accuracy for airflow shall be better than 3% of Reading over the sensor probe operating ranges when installed in accordance with manufactures’ guidelines. The sensor accuracy for temperature shall be better than 0.15°F over the entire operating range.

3. Probe Sensor Density: The number of independent sensing points shall be as indicated below:

Area (ft2) Sensors < = 1 2 >1 to <4 4 4 to <8 6 8 to <12 8 12 to <16 12 > = 16 16

4. Probe Operating Ranges” Airflow: 0 to 5,000 FPM Temperature: -20°F to +160°F Relative Humidity: 0 to 99% (non-condensing) D. Fan Inlet Velocity Sensors 1. Sensors shall be constructed with stainless steel sensor bodies, stainless steel

mounting brackets and with adjustable cadmium-plated mounting rods. 2. Fan Inlet Performance Requirements: The individual sensor accuracy for airflow shall be better than 3% of Reading over the sensor probe operating ranges when

installed in accordance with manufacturers’ guidelines. The installed accuracy for temperature shall be better than 0.15°F over the entire operating range.

3. Fan Inlet Sensor Density: Probes shall be provided with an adjustable mounting, and two sensors per inlet, for single or dual inlet fans.

4. Fan Inlet Sensor Operating Ranges: Airflow: 0 to 10,000 FPM Temperature: -20°F to +160°F Relative Humidity: 0 to 99% (non-condensing) E. Dynamic Pressure “Bleed Airflow” Sensors 1. Each sensing point shall independently measure bleed airflow rates and direction,

or dynamic differential pressure plus temperature. Sensor housing shall be constructed of an engineered thermoplastic with 1/2 NPT female threads on the inlet and outlet of the housing.





2. DP Sensor Performance Requirements: The installed total accuracy for airflow shall be better than 2% of reading 4% of reading for pressure, over the sensor operating range when installed in accordance with manufacturers’ guidelines. The sensor accuracy for temperature shall be better than 0.15°F over the entire operating ranges.

3. DP Sensor Operating Ranges: Bleed Airflow: -2,000 FPM to 2,000 FPM Or Differential Pressure: -0.25"WG to +0.25"WG And Temperature: -20°F to +160°F Relative Humidity: 0 to 99% (non-condensing) F. Air Flow Measurement Device Locations 1. Refer to control schematics. G. Fan Inlet Sensors 1. Refer to control schematics. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. BAS Wiring 1. All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation of the Building Management System, as herein specified, shall be provided by the BAS Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings under Division 26 Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of applicable portions of Division 26 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified otherwise in this section.

2. All BAS wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with BMs manufacturer recommendations. 3. The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays and raceways shall be the design responsibility of the BAS Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the BAS Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected components. 4. Class 2 Wiring

a. All Class 2 (24VAc or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit unless otherwise specified. b. Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations. Class 2 wiring not installed in conduit shall be supported every 5' from the building structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this application. Wiring shall be installed parallel to the building structural lines. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with local code requirements.

5. Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring 120VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal





wiring. 6. Provide for complete grounding of all applicable signal and communications cables, panels and equipment so s to ensure system integrity of operation. Grounding cabling and conduit at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops.

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Division 01. B. Start-up and commission system extension. Allow for start-up time and commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation. When

installation is complete, calibrate equipment and verify transmission media operation before the system is placed on-line. All testing, calibrating, adjusting and final field tests shall be completed by the installer. Provide a cross-check of each control point within the system by making a comparison between the command and the field controller device. Verify calibration of each field temperature sensor with a hand-held calibrated digital thermometer. Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in the specified failure mode upon panel failure or loss of power. Submit the results of functional and diagnostic tests and calibrations to the Owner/Engineer for the final acceptance. Provide test ports of sufficient size adjacent to all sensors and seal with removable plugs.

C. Compliance Inspection Checklist: Submit in the form requested, the following items of information to the Owner’s Representative and Engineer for verification of compliance to

the project specifications. The Owner’s Representative and Engineer will initial and date the checklist to signify Contractor’s compliance before acceptance of system.

1. Manually generate an alarm at each remote panel to demonstrate the capability of the on-site central computer to receive alarms within five (5) seconds.

2. Disconnect one (1) remote panel from the network to demonstrate that a single device failure shall not disrupt or halt communication. Panel to be disconnected will be selected by the Engineer. 3. At remote panel of the owner/Engineer’s choice, demonstrate the ability to display on the existing Portable Operator’s Terminal (POT);

a. At least one (1) temperature setpoint and at least one (1) status condition; i.e. on or off for a system or piece of equipment attached to that panel as well as for points on another remote panel on the network.

b. The diagnostic results as specified for a system or piece of equipment attached to that panel, as well as a system or piece of equipment attached to another remote panel.

D. Provide service engineer to instruct Owner's representative in operation of systems plant

and equipment for one day period. E. Provide basic operator training for the system extension on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution of commands and request of logs. F. The contractor shall provide three (3) bound copies of an owner’s manual describing all operating and preventative maintenance service procedures to be used with the system.





3.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. After the installation is complete and proper operation has been demonstrated, a 60-day acceptance test shall begin. The entire system shall be required to operate for 60 days with no malfunctions - field repairable malfunctions accepted. Any malfunction during the 60-day test which cannot be corrected with 24 hours by the supplier shall be considered a non-field repairable malfunction and, after repairs are complete, the test shall be repeated. B. The acceptance test shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section. C. Substantial completion may be obtained prior to starting the acceptance test. D. Final completion shall not be considered prior to successful completion of the acceptance

test. 3.4 INPUT/OUTPUT SCHEDULE - ON PLANS END OF SECTION 230923





BLANK PAGE




SECTION 230933 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 1

SECTION 230933 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes variable frequency controllers provided and installed by ATC Sub-Contractor and also VFD's provided within packaged equipment. Power wiring connections provided by Division 26.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230900 through 230993 - Automatic Temperature Controls. 2. Section 262813 - Fuses.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC

Power Circuits.

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 3. NEMA ICS 7 - Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable Speed Drives. 4. NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection,

Installation, and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems.

C. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power

Distribution Equipment and Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions and weights shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; and nameplate legends.

C. Product Data: Submit catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions and enclosure details.

D. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.

E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate start-up inspection findings.







B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions complying with NEMA ICS 7.1. Include procedures for starting and operating controllers, and describe operating limits possibly resulting in hazardous or unsafe conditions. Include routine preventive maintenance schedule.



B. Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide additional canvas or plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish.



B. Conform to NEMA ICS 7 service conditions during and after installation of variable frequency controllers.

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Maintenance service.

B. Furnish on-site service and maintenance of variable frequency controller for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. ABB B. Dan Foss/Graham C. Allen-Bradley D. Siemens, Inc. E. Square D (Altivar) F. Schneider Electric





G. Eaton/Cutler Hammer H. Emerson I. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. 2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide enclosed variable frequency controllers suitable for operating the indicated loads. Conform to requirements of NEMA ICS 3.1.

2.3 RATINGS

A. Rated Input Voltage: 208 or 480 volts, three phase, 60 Hertz. Refer to plan schedules.

B. Motor Nameplate Voltage: 200 or 460 volts, three phase, 60 Hertz. Refer to plan schedules.

C. Operating Ambient: 0°C to 40°C.

D. Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: 97 percent.

2.4 DESIGN

A. Employ microprocessor based inverter logic isolated from power circuits. Unit to have 5% full DC buss choke or DC link reactor is acceptable.

B. Design for ability to operate controller with motor disconnected from output.

C. Design to attempt five automatic restarts following fault condition before locking out and

requiring manual restart. 2.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES

A. Display: Provide integral digital display to indicate output voltage, output frequency, and output current.

B. Status Indicators: Separate indicators for over-current, over-voltage, ground fault, over-

temperature, and input power ON. Display of all functions, faults and programming shall be in the English language.

C. Volts Per Hertz Adjustment: Adjustable or microprocessor optimized.

D. Current Limit Adjustment: 60 - 110 percent of rated.

E. Acceleration Rate Adjustment: 0.1 - 30 minutes.

F. Deceleration Rate Adjustment: 0.1 - 30 minutes.





G. Provide HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC and manual speed control buttons on removable

keypad.

H. Input Signal: 0-10 V DC.

I. Safety Interlocks: Provide terminals for remote contact to inhibit starting under both manual and automatic mode.

J. Control Interlocks: Provide terminals for remote contact to allow starting in automatic

mode. K. Provide a non-fused disconnect built into the unit. L. Fuses: Provided in an internal fuse block with the VFD unit. 2.6 FABRICATION

A. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.

B. Enclosure: Suitable for location shown on plan or described in this section.

C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect and production-test each product specified in this section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify conditions under provisions of Division 01.

B. If the VFD is being remote mounted and is an integral part of a packaged unit such as a rooftop VAV unit the Contractor providing the VFD shall coordinate internal connection lug wiring with the packaged equipment supplier.

C. Verify that surface is suitable for controller installation.

D. Do not install controller until building environment can be maintained within the service

conditions required by the manufacturer. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide within packaged RTU.





3.3 INSTALLATION

A. VFD provided and installed by factory in packaged RTU.

B. Install controller where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and NEMA ICS 3.1.

C. Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing controller.

D. Fuses: Of size and type as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 23 05 53.

F. Installing Contractor shall provide all necessary control wiring between drive and

automation system. G. Drive shall be installed with a dedicated load side metallic conduit to the connected

motor. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage and grounding.

3.5 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare and start systems according to manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Make final adjustments to installed drive to assure proper operation of fan or pump system. Obtain performance requirements from installer of driven loads.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 23 05 93.

B. Demonstrate operation of controllers in automatic and manual modes.

3.8 POWER WIRING

A. The RTU manufacturer shall bring power to the frequency drive and shall run the power wiring from the drive to the associated motor.

3.9 VFD SCHEDULE

A. Provide new variable frequency drive for the following list of equipment: 1. RTUs as scheduled.




SECTION 230993 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR HVAC CONTROLS Page 1

SECTION 230993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR HVAC CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes sequence of operation for: 1. Variable Volume Rooftop Unit 2. Variable Volume Terminal Units 3. Fin-Tube Radiation and Radiant Panels 4. Cabinet Unit Heaters 5. Exhaust, Supply and Return Fans

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 23 - Specification Index B. Section 230923 - Direct Digital Control Systems

C. Section 230933 - Variable Frequency Controllers

D. Section 238103 - Packaged Roof-top Unit Controls

E. Refer to Mechanical Plan Sheet Schedules for dampers, valves, and other equipment

quantities. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. This Section defines the manner and method by which controls function. 1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate mechanical system controlled and control system components. 1. Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits. Submit written description of control sequence. 2. Submit flow diagrams for each control system, graphically depicting control logic. 3. Submit draft copies of graphic displays indicating mechanical system components, control system components, and controlled function status and value. 4. Coordinate submittals with information requested in Section 230900 and 230923.

C. Submit diagrams indicating mechanical system controlled and control system

components. Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits. Include written description of control sequence and flow diagrams for each control system.




SECTION 230993 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR HVAC CONTROLS Page 2

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01- Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and set points of controls, including changes to sequences made after submission of shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS \\Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Refer to Temperature Control Plan Sheets for Control Diagrams, Sequence of Operations and

Points Lists. 3.2 Refer to equipment schedules and standard details for valve and actuator requirements. END OF SECTION 230993




SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING Page 1

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Heating water piping, above ground. 2. Equipment drains and over flows. 3. Unions and flanges. 4. Pipe hangers and supports. 5. Valves.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230529 - Firestopping: Product requirements for firestopping for

placement by this section. 2. Section 230516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping: Product and

execution requirements for expansion compensation devices use in heating and cooling piping systems.

3. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports, sleeves, and firestopping for placement by this section.

4. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe identification for placement by this section.

5. Section 230700 - HVAC Insulation: Product requirements for Piping Insulation for placement by this section.

6. Section 232116 - Hydronic Piping Specialties: Product and execution requirements for piping specialties used in heating and cooling piping systems. section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 2. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 3. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 4. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings. 5. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-

Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought

Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 3. ASTM A312 - Seamless, Welded and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless

Steel.





4. ASTM A395/A395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures.

5. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 6. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 7. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 8. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 9. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic

Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 10. ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-

Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 11. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series). 12. ASTM D2846/D2846M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems. 13. ASTM F441/F441M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. 14. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly

(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 15. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe

Hangers. 16. ASTM D2464 - Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.

C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves. 3. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 4. MSS SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 5. MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 6. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 7. MSS SP 85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded. 8. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. 9. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and

Flared Ends.


A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, insure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Provide for access to flanges, union, and couplings.

B. Use of grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners is the Contractor’s option. Note that

additional costs for insulating joints shall be included by Contractor.





C. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus. Unions are not required if a grooved piping system is utilized.

D. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section 230529.

E. Use ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or

vertical risers.

F. Use globe, ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit

manufacturers catalog information. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for

each service. 3. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information including load

capacity.

C. Test Reports: Indicate results of piping system pressure test.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining procedures and isolation.

E. Welders’ Certificate: Include welders’ certification of compliance with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.

F. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown of compliance with ASME B31.4

1.5 CLOSE OUT SUBMITTALS


B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, equipment and accessories.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for installation and changing components, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.


A. Perform work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures.

B. Perform work in accordance with AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure.





C. All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.

D. All castings used for coupling housings fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability.



B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.





1.10 COORDINATION

A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.

1.11 WARRANTY


1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HEATING WATER/GLYCOL PIPING, ABOVE GROUND

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel

welding type.





2. Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller; welded or grooved for pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black, rolled grooved ends. 1. Fittings: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, grooved ends. 2. Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings meeting ASTM F1476.

a. Housing Clamps: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, enamel coated compatible with steel piping sizes, rigid or flexible type.

b. Gasket: Elastomer composition for operating temperature range from 86°F to 180°F.

c. Accessories: Grade 8 Steel or Stainless steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range

430 to 535°F. 3. Viega Pro-Press copper connection.

D. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn, rolled grooved ends.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.

2. Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings meeting ASTM F1476. a. Housing Clamps: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron,

enamel coated, compatible with copper tubing sizes, to engage and lock designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion.

b. Gasket: Elastomer composition for operating temperature range from 86°F to 180°F.

c. Accessories: Grade 8 Steel or Stainless steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

E. As an alternative to soldering, Pro Press System by Ridgid/Viega, Nibco or Vic-Press may be used. Press Fittings: Copper press fittings shall conform to the material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. O-rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM.

F. Refer to Specifications Sections 232114, 232118 and 232119 for PEXa and polypropylene piping options.

2.2 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS - GROOVED END COUPLINGS

A. Victaulic

B. Grinnell

C. Anvil-Gruvlok

D. Approved equal manufacturer prior to bidding.





2.3 GROOVED END COUPLINGS

A. Housing Clamps: Ductile iron to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction and expansion.

B. Rigid Type: Victaulic housings shall be cast with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads to provide rigidity and system support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and B31.9. 1. 2” through 8”: Installation-Ready couplings, designed for direct stab installation

onto grooved end pipe without field disassembly, Grade “EHP” EPDM gasket rated to +250 deg F. Victaulic Style 107-Quick-Vic™.

2. Or Anvil Gruvlok 7401/7400.

C. Flexible Type: For use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required. A minimum of three flexible couplings may be used in lieu of a flexible connector. The couplings shall be placed in close proximity to the source of the vibration. 1. 2” through 6”: Installation-Ready ‘stab-on’ coupling. Victaulic Style 177-Quick-

Vic with Grade “EHP” EPDM gasket. 2. Or Anvil Gruvlok 7001/7000.

D. Couplings for Grooved Copper Piping: 1. For copper tubing 2” through 8”, coupling shall be “Installation Ready”, stab on

design for installation onto roll grooved copper tube without prior field disassembly and no loose parts. Housing shall be ductile iron ASTM A-536, cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads, coated with copper colored alkyd enamel, Grade “EHP” EPDM gasket. Victaulic Style 607 Quick-Vic™.

2. Or Anvil Gruvlok 7400/6400.

E. Sealing Gasket: C-shape, Quick-Vic™, or FlushSeal® design, elastomer composition for operating temperature range from -30°F up to 250°F.

F. All sealing lubricants shall be those manufactured and recommended by the coupling manufacturer. (No exceptions.)

G. Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers meeting ASTM - A-183.

2.4 EQUIPMENT DRAINS, OVERFLOWS AND CONDENSATE DRAINS

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with

melting range 430 to 535°F. 1. Pro-Press copper connection.

B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241, SDR 21 or 26, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40, PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.





C. ABS Pipe: ASTM D2680 or ASTM D2751, Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) material. 1. Fittings: ABS, ASTM D2751. 2. Joints: ASTM D2235, solvent weld.

2.5 UNIONS, FLANGE ADAPTERS AND FLANGES

A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded. 2. Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with soldered joints. 3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.

B. Flange Adapters for Pipe 2" and Smaller: 1. Stainless Steel Piping: Austenitic stainless steel housing, Class 150, FF,

Vic Press 304 connection, ASTM A312. Victaulic Style 565.

C. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, forged steel, slip-on flanges. 2. Copper Piping: Class 150, slip-on bronze flanges with full face gaskets or

grooved fittings. D. Flange Adapters for Pipe 2 Inches and Larger: 1. Steel Piping: Ductile iron, flat face to accommodate ANSI Class 125/150

flanged components. Victualic Style 741/W741 or 743 (ANSI Class 300) or Anvil Gruvlok 7012.

2. Copper Piping: Ductile iron coated with copper-colored enamel, flat faced to accommodate ANSI Class 125/150 flanged components. Victaulic Style 641.

2.6 GLOBE OR ANGLE VALVES

A. Up To and Including 2 Inches:

1. Manufacturers: a) Crane - Model 1310. b) Hammond - Model IB440/415. c) Nibco - Model T/S 211. d) Milwaukee Valve 502/150 e) Kitz

2. Bronze body, bronze trim, union bonnet, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw with backseating stem, renewable composition disc and bronze seat, solder or threaded ends.

B. Over 2 Inches:

1. Manufacturers: a) Crane - 351 b) Hammond - IR-116 c) Milwaukee Valve F2981M d) Nibco - Model F-718B e) Kitz





2. Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, outside screw and yoke, rotating plug-type disc with renewable seat ring and disc, flanged ends.

2.7 BALL VALVES

A. Up To and Including 2 Inches: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Conbraco - Model #70-140 b) Jamesbury - Series A c) Worcester - Series 48

d) Victaulic - Model 722/58 e) Anvil Gruvlok 7500 f) Nibco - Model S or T-585-70-66/S-580 g) Watts - Model B-6000-S/B-6100-S h) Hammond - 8501/8511 i) Milwaukee Valve BA100S/15 j) Nexus-XB k) Kitz

2. Bronze two piece body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle with balancing stops, solder or threaded.

3. Forged Brass two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, TFE seats, standard port with threaded ends.

4. Forged Brass body, chrome plated carbon steel ball, TFE seats, Standard port with pressfit ends.

B. Over 2 Inches:

1. Manufacturers: a) Conbraco - Model #87/88 Series b) Jamesbury - Series 5150 c) Worcester - Series 82 d) Victaulic - Model 726 e) Anvil Gruvlok 7500

2.8 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Victaulic - Model 300, Master Seal (2"-12") AGS-Vic-300 (14"-24") 2. Keystone - Model 100/239 3. Mueller - Model 56AHH6 4. Anvil-Gruvlok - Series #7700 5. Nibco - Model LD3022 6. Dezurik - Model 632W/66W 7. Milwaukee CL series 8. Kitz 9. Conbraco – Model #87/88 Series 10. Jamesbury – Series 5150





B. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 67, Class 150 1. Body: Cast or ductile iron, wafer, lug or grooved ends, stainless steel stem,

extended neck. 2. Disc: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze or chrome plated ductile iron. 3. Disc Shaft and Pin: Stainless steel. 4. Seat: Resilient replaceable EPDM or Buna N. 5. Handle and Operator: Infinite position lever handle with memory stop.

2.9 CHECK VALVES

A. Horizontal Swing Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Crane Valve, North America Model 34-1/2. b. Hammond Valve Model IB942. c. Milwaukee Valve Company Model F90CSR-66. d. NIBCO, Inc. e. Grinnell f. Victaulic Valve Model 712 g. Kitz h. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements.

2. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 150, bronze body and cap, bronze seat, Buna-N disc, solder or threaded ends.

3. 2 inches through 4 inches: 300 CWP, ductile iron body, stainless steel clapper 2.10 SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Up To and Including 2 Inches: 1. Manufacturers:

a) Crane - Model 34-1/2 N/A - 37/137 b) Hammond - Model IB940/944/945 c) Apollo d) Miller e) Watts f) Nibco - Model 413Y

g) Milwaukee Valve 508/509T/1509T h) Victaulic Valve Model 716/779/W715 i) Kitz

2. Bronze body, bronze trim, bronze rotating swing disc, with composition disc, solder or threaded ends.

2.11 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Hangers - B-Line 2. Riser Clamps - B-Line 3. Expansion Anchors - Hilti 4. Power Driven Fasteners - Hilti 5. Anvil International (Clamps and Hangers) 2. Carpenter & Paterson Inc.





3. Creative Systems Inc. 4. Flex-Weld, Inc. 5. Michigan Hanger Co. 6. Superior Valve Co. 7. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements

B. Conform to ASME 31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69 and MSS SP 89.

C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.

D. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

E. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

F. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger.

G. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

H. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.

I. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hooks.

J. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

K. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.

L. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

M. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

N. Floor Support for Hot Pipe 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

O. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.

P. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel rings, adjustable, copper plated.

Q. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.

R. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.





S. Victaulic Style 107, 07 and W07 rigid couplings may be used on IPS steel piping systems, which meet the support and hanging requirements of ASME B31.1 and B31.9. An adequate number of Victaulic Style 177, 77 and W77 flexible couplings shall also be used to compensate for thermal expansion/contraction of the pipe.

2.12 PRO-PRESS FITTINGS

A. Press Fittings: Copper Pro-Press type fittings shall conform to the material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. O-Rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM.

B. Viega Pro-Press fittings shall be as manufactured by Ridgid Tool Co. Nibco, Apollo and Grinnell press systems shall be considered as approved equals.

C. Ball valves with Press Connections where Copper Press piping systems are allowed shall

be Brass Body in accordance with ASTM B283 Alloy C37700, fully annealed. Ball shall be Chrome-Plated Brass in Full Port design with a smooth cylindrical port in ball ( no hollow balls allowed ). Valve must mate with standard Copper Tubing (K or L) conforming to ASTM B88, assembled by tooling recommended by the Copper Press Fitting manufacturer. The Ball Valve must have factory installed O-rings furnished in EPDM material of type and size compliant with the Copper Press Fittings. The ball valve must be certified to NSF 61 and MSS SP110 in all applicable areas. Valves to be Apollo Press Series 77W.

D. Quality Standard: Milwaukee UltraPress Model BA-480B, BA-490B or approved equal.

Apollo Xpress 77W Series up to 2”.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs and bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.



E. After completion, fill, clean and treat systems. Refer to Section 232150.





F. All new hydronic heating/cooling system piping must be pressure-tested at 1-1/2 times the maximum system design pressure, but not less than 100 PSI (hydrostatically) for 15 minutes (minimum). New hydronic lines may not be placed into service until this testing is complete.

G. Hydronic pipes shall be installed so that the pipes can be drained and so that air can be completely removed from the system during filling.

3.3 INSTALLATION - INSERTS

A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.

B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.

C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and larger.

D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above, flush with top of recessed into and grouted flush with slab.

3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install in accordance with IMC 305.4, ASME B31.and MSS SP 69.

B. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

C. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

G. Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe hangers or trapeze hangers.

H. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

I. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Division 09. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.





J. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings in accordance with Section 230529.

3.5 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Install heating water piping in accordance with ASME B31.9.

B. Install non-conducting dielectric connections or install Victaulic wafer-type connections where jointing dissimilar metals.

C. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.

D. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 230529.

G. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 230529.

H. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 230553.

I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 230516.

J. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Mechanical Contractor shall provide access doors for installation in finished surface. Coordinate size and location of access doors with other trades.

K. Slope hydronic piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe aligned.

L. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.

M. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting in exposed, finished areas.

N. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

O. Provide condensate drain lines from all cooling coil drain pans (at indoor equipment) to the nearest floor drain. Minimum full size of drain connection with a deep seal trap and cleanout.

P. Provide galvanized steel condensate traps at all packaged rooftop equipment to avoid cracking possibilities at PVC, CPVC and ABS type fittings due to freezing conditions.





Q. Install drain pipe with 3/4" ball valve and capped hose connection at bases of vertical rises, low points of piping for each set of system area isolation valves and at all new and remodeled hydronic equipment including coils, boilers, chiller, convertors, tanks, cooling towers, etc. Provide teflon tape at threaded joint of cap.

R. Grooved joints piping systems shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's guidelines and recommendations. All couplings, fittings and valves shall be the product

of the same manufacturer. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Gaskets shall be of an elastomer grade suitable for the intended service, and shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer. The grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools and installation of grooved joint products. The representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review contractor is following best recommended practices in grooved product installation. (A distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visit(s).) S. Vic Press 304™ Joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers (Victaulic) guidelines and recommendations. Pipe shall be certified for use with the Vic Press 304™ system. Pipe shall be square cut, +/- 0.030", properly deburred and cleaned. Pipe ends

shall be marked at the required location, using a manufacturer-supplied gauge, to ensure full insertion into the coupling or fitting during assembly. Use a Victaulic "PFT" series tool with the proper sized jaw for pressing.

3.6 DI-ELECTRICL FITTINGS

A. Di-electrical fittings or Victaulic wafer-type connections shall be used when joining dissimilar materials.

3.7 PAINTING

A. None. 3.8 INSTALLATION, COPPER PRESS FIT FITTINGS

A. Press Connections: Copper Pro-Press type fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. The tubing shall be fully inserted into the fitting and the tubing marked at the shoulder of the fitting. The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark on the tubing to assure the tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting. The joints shall be pressed using the tool approved by the manufacturer.

B. Do not press uptight to a reheat coil, balancing valve, control valve or any piece of

equipment or special fitting that may need to be replaced in the future. Install an adequate amount of straight copper tubing between fittings and devices for tool access during future maintenance or replacement activities.

3.9 PIPE SIZING AT CONTROL POINTS

A. Pipe sizing around control valves, bypass flow valves, flow measuring devices and at all





coil connections shall be based on GPM flow and not on control valve or coil connection size. Size flow fitting to insure adequate P.D. at the device for accurate measurement.


A. Division 01 - Quality Requirements and Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Test heating water piping system in accordance with ASME B31.9 and/or ASME B31.1.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ZONE ISOLATION VALVES

A. The Contractor shall provide isolation valves throughout the system to isolate multiple zones of hydronic piping for ease of maintenance and draining of system areas.

B. Each valve shall have a drain for each zone isolated with hose connection for controlled drain or recapture of system solution.

3.12 SCHEDULES

A. Copper and Steel Pipe Hanger Spacing: 1. Refer to Section 230529. 2. Refer to manufacturer's recommendation for grooved end piping system support.

Use the more stringent of the two requirements. END OF SECTION 232113





BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 232114 - HePEXa HYDRONIC DISTRIBUTION PIPING Page 1

SECTION 232114 – HePEXa HYDRONIC DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. PEXa hydronic branch piping and shall include the following: 1. Cross-linked polyethylene (HePEXa) piping with oxygen barrier. (2” and

smaller) Pipe fasteners as approved by the manufacturer of the HePEXa piping. 2. Provisions for expansion compensation as recommended and provided by the

manufacturer as part of the Materials Package, along with drawing layout of expansion control devices as part of Shop Drawing submittal.

3. Supervision and field engineering required for the complete and proper function of the system.

4. Refer to Part 3.4 for location limitations.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 232113 – Hydronic Piping

B. Section 232116 – Hydronic Specialties

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM – American Society for testing and Materials 1. ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials. 2. ASTM F876, Standard Specification for Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEXA)

Tubing. 3. ASTM F877, Standard Specification for Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEXA)

Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems. 4. ASTM F2014, Standard Specification for Non-Reinforced Extruded Tee

Connections for Piping Applications. 5. ASTM F2080, Standard Specifiation for Cold-Expansion Fittings for Cross-

Linked Polyethylene (PEXA) Pipe.

B. ISO – International ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

C. PPI – Plastic Pipe Institute 1. PPI TR-3/2007, Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydrostatic Design

Basis (HDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), Strength Design Basis (SDB) and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe.




1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Cross-linked polyethylene, commonly abbreviated PEXa, is made from high density polyethylene (HDPE). Cross-linking is accomplished during manufacturing. Cross-linking enhances the physical and mechanical properties of the polymer. The high-temperature properties are improved. Chemical resistance is enhanced by resisting dissolution. Low temperature properties are also improved; its impact and tensile strength, scratch resistance and resistance to brittle fracture are enhanced. The required degree of cross-linking, according to ASTM Standard F876, is between 70-89%. This specification requires PEXa to be designated as HePEXa and be manufactured by the high-pressure peroxide method with an oxygen barrier.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Division 01, Submittal Procedures. Approval and/or acceptance of all submittals is required prior to fabrication.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s Technical Manual, submittal forms, specifications

and installation instructions. Submit data in sufficient detail to indicate compliance with the contract documents. 1. Submit manufacturer’s instructions for installation. 2. Submit data for equipment, fittings, fasteners and associated items necessary for

the installation of the piping and galvanized support channel.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate dimensions, descriptions of materials, general construction, component

connections, anchorage methods, expansion compensation methods and support channel installation procedures.

2. Indicate critical dimensions, piping details and expansion compensation details. D. Certification:

1. Submit independent certification results for the piping systems from an accredited independent testing laboratory.

2. The design shall be approved by a professional appropriately licensed in the jurisdiction where the installation will take place, as being complete and accurate.

3. Fittings shall be third-party certified to applicable referenced standards as part of the manufacturer’s HePEXa piping system, with independent listings from NSF.

E. Maintenance Instructions: Submit instructions for any maintenance required or

recommended by manufacturer.


A. Comply with Division 01 – Quality Assurance.

B. Manufacturer: Must be a company specializing in the work of this Section with a minimum of five years documented experience.




C. All components shall be supplied by one manufacturer.

D. Pipe shall be manufactured in a facility whose quality management system is ISO 9001 certified.

E. Cross-linked polyethylene (HePEXa) pipe shall conform and be certified to ASTM F876 and F877. Fittings shall conform and be certified to ASTM F877 or F2080 and CSA B137.5. Pipes shall have an oxygen diffusion barrier shall conform to the requirements for oxygen permeability DIN 5726 and shall also have the PPI TR-3 listing.


A. Comply with Division 01 – Product Requirements.

B. Deliver and store piping and equipment in shipping containers with labeling in place. 1. Pipe shall be kept in original shipping boxes until required installation.

C. Store piping and equipment in a safe place, dry, enclosed, under cover, in a well-ventilated area. 1. Do not expose pipe to ultraviolet light beyond exposure limits recommended by

manufacturer. 2. Protect piping from entry of contaminating materials. Install suitable plugs in

open pipe ends until installation. 3. Piping shall not be dragged across the ground or other surfaces, and shall be

stored on a flat surface with no sharp edges.

D. Protect materials from damage by other trades.

E. Pipe shall be protected from oil, grease, paint, direct sunlight and other elements as recommended by manufacturer.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard written warranty. 1. The warranty shall include a minimum, provisions to repair defects from faulty

materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period, or provide for replacement with new materials, at no expense to Owner.

2. The heating pipe manufacturer shall warrant the cross-linked polyethylene (HePEXa) piping to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of twenty-five (25) years.

3. Cold-expansion compression-sleeve fittings shall be warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years starting at completion of successful pressurized water tests immediately following system installation.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. REHAU

B. Uponor

C. Heat Link

2.2 PIPING

A. Heating (hot water) and cooling (chilled water) pipe 2” and smaller may be high-density cross-linked polyethylene manufactured using the high-pressure peroxide method of Cross-linking (HePEXa). Pipe shall conform to ASTM F876 and ASTM F877.

B. Pipe shall be rated for continuous operation of 100 psi gauge pressure at 180°F temperature and 80 psi gauge pressure at 200°F temperature.

C. HePEXa pipe shall have a co-extruded oxygen diffusion barrier capable of limiting oxygen diffusion through the pipe to less than 0.32 mg/(m2/d) @ 104°F water temperature, in accordance with DIN 4726.

D. Bend Radius: 1. The minimum bend radius for cold bending of the pipe shall be not less than

five (5) times the outside diameter.

E. Pipe to have a Flame Spread Index of less than 25 and a Smoke Developed Index of less than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 (in U.S.) or CAN/ULC S102.2 (in Canada). In any case where the pipe does not conform to these standards, appropriate piping insulation shall be installed in order to meet the standard.

2.3 FITTINGS

A. Fittings shall be third-party certified to applicable standards ASTM F1807 as part of the manufacturer’s HePEXA piping system, with independent listings from IAPMO, NSF, CSA and ICC as applicable.

B. All fittings shall be thermally annealed brass or stainless steel. Where required by the manufacturer, fittings shall be protected from external environmental conditions.

C. Fittings shall provide maximum internal dimeter area for less pressure loss. 2.4 SUPPORTS

A. Unless noted otherwise, a galvanized steel channel, provided by the piping supplier, shall be provided for the straight runs of pipe.




B. When this channel system is used, the pipe support spacing shall be the same as steel and copper piping of the same size. Refer to Specification Section 230529.

C. For changes of direction, expansion loops and short branch pipe take-offs where the use

of the channel isn’t practical or possible, maximum hanger spacing shall be 32” O.C. D. Pipe support clamp shall be a “Bismat 5000” with the spacer removed for anchoring the

pipe or the spacer left in place to allow pipe movement. 2.5 INSULATION

A. The insulation type(s), thickness and vapor barrier requirements for hot water and chilled Water, HePEXa piping shall be the same as for copper or steel piping. Refer to Specification Section 230700.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS

A. As a minimum, installation shall be performed by qualified laborers trained by the manufacturer in the procedures of HePEXa heating distribution systems and they shall be appropriately licensed for the jurisdiction where the installation will take place.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions and understanding of limitation in above ceiling spaces and mechanical room installation locations.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate with related trades and manufacturer’s recommendations with regard to installation in conjunction with materials in the same area.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install only in non-visible locations such as in walls, chases, soffits, tunnels and ceiling spaces. Do not install in Mechanical Rooms.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s published installation manual and/or published guidelines and final shop drawings.

C. Route piping in an orderly manner, according to layout and spacing shown in final shop drawings. All installation notes shown on the drawings shall be followed.




D. At connections and fittings, use a plastic pipe cutter to ensure square and clean cuts and join pipes immediately or cap ends of pipe to seal from contaminants.

E. Provide hangers, supports, anchors and expansion fittings as recommended by manufacturer and as shown on the Submittal Drawing.


A. Filling, Testing and Balancing: Tests of hydronic heating systems shall comply with authorities having jurisdiction and where required. Shall be witnessed by the building official.

B. Pressure gauges used in testing and balancing shall show pressure increments of 1 psig and shall be located at or near the lowest points in the distribution system.

C. Air Test 1. Charge the completed, yet unconcealed pipes with air at a minimum of 40 psig. 2. Do not exceed 150 psig. 3. Use liquid gas detector or soap solution to check for leakage at manifold

connections.

D. Water Test 1. Purge air from pipes. 2. Charge the completed, yet unconcealed pipes with water. 3. Take necessary precautions to prevent water from freezing. 4. Check the system for leakage, especially at all pipe joints.

E. Perform a preliminary pressure test pressurizing the system to the greater of 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure of 100 psig for 30 minutes.

1. As the piping expands, restore pressure, first at 10 minutes into the test and again at 20 minutes. 2. At the end of the 30-minute preliminary test, pressure shall not fall by more than 8 psig from the maximum and there shall be no leakage.

F. After successfully performing the preliminary pressure test, perform the main pressure test immediately.

1. The test pressure shall be restored and continued as the main test for two (2) hours. 2. The main test pressure shall not fall more than 3 psig after two (2) hours. 3. No leakage shall be detected.

G. Complete inspection and furnish test reports supplied by the manufacturer of the system.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces upon completion of installation using clean, damp cloth. No cleaning agents are allowed.




B. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installation throughout construction process until date of final completion.

B. Replace components that cannot be repaired.





BLANK PAGE




SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES Page 1

SECTION 232116 – HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Test plugs. (Pete’s Plug) 2. Air vents. 3. Strainers. 4. Flow controls.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping: Execution requirements for piping

connections to products specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element. 2. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers. 2. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of

Thermometers. 3. ASTM A536 - Standard Specifications for Ductile Iron Casting.

C. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C700 - Cold-Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case. 2. AWWA C701 - Cold-Water Meters - Turbine Type, for Customer Service. 3. AWWA C702 - Cold-Water Meters - Compound Type. 4. AWWA C706 - Direct-Reading, Remote-Registration Systems for Cold-Water

Meters. 5. AWWA M6 - Water Meters - Selection, Installation, Testing and Maintenance. 6. AWWA C606 - Standard for Grooved and Shouldering Joints.

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service. 2. UL 404 - Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit for manufactured products and assemblies used in this Project. 1. Manufacturer’s data and list indicating use, operating range, total range, accuracy

and location for manufactured components.





2. Submit product description, model, dimensions, component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

3. Submit schedule indicating manufacturer, model number, size, location, rated capacity, load served, and features for each piping specialty.

4. Submit electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining procedures, application, selection and hookup configuration. Include pipe and accessory elevations.

D. Grooved joint components shall be shown on drawings and product submittals and shall be specifically identified with applicable style or series designation.



B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of actual locations of components, instrumentation and flow controls flow meters.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for calibrating instruments, installation instructions, assembly views, servicing requirements, lubrication instruction, and replacement parts list.



B. Accept piping specialties on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

D. Protect systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, caps and closures, completing sections of the work and isolating parts of completed system until installation.



B. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except rough in, taps, supports and test plugs.






A. Verify field measurements before fabrication.

1.8 WARRANTY


B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for piping specialties.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST PLUGS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Pete’s Plug 2. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements.

B. 1/4 inch NPT or 1/2 inch NPT brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with: 1. Neoprene core for temperatures up to 200°F. 2. Nordel core for temperatures up to 350° F. 3. Viton core for temperatures up to 400°F.

C. Test Kit: 1. Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing:

a. Two 3-1/2 inch diameter pressure gauges. 1) Scale range: 0 to 50 psi.

b. Two gauge adapters with 1/8 inch probes. c. Two 1-1/2 inch dial thermometers.

1) Scale range: 0 to 250°F. 2.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS FOR COILS A. Standard of Design is PRO Hydronics stainless steel braided hose. B. Tube: 1. ½” – 1” sizes: CPE (Chlorinated Poly Ethylene) 2. 1-1/4” – 2“ sizes: EPDM (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer) C. Reinforcement – 304 L stainless steel braid cover D. Furruels – 304 stainless steel, fully crimped. E. End Fittings: 1. ½” – 1” sizes: Brass. 2. 1-1/4” – 2 sizes: Plated steel.





F. End Connections: 1. Standard NPT 2. ½” – 1” sizes: Fixed male, male swivel, female swivel, union swivel, fixed

tailpiece. 3. 1-1/4” – 2” sizes: Male swivel, fixed tailpiece. G. Temperature range of -40° to 257° F. H. Ratings: 1. ½” – 1” sizes: 500 PSI Working Pressure 2. 1-1/4” – 2” sizes: 200 PSI Working Pressure I. Units shall meet UL-94 requirements for fire retardant materials. J. Available in standard lengths of 12”, 18”, 24”, 30” and 36”. Mechanical Contractor shall

verify length requirements.

2.3 AIR VENTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. ITT - Bell & Gossett 2. Hoffman 3. Vent Rite 4. Dole

B. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with

1/8 inch brass needle valve at top of chamber.

2.4 STRAINERS A. Manufacturers 1. Hoffman 2. Titan 3. Victaulic Co. 4. Metraflex 5. Anvil 6. Armstrong 7. Illinois 8. Spirex Sarco 9. Watts 10. Dunham Bush 11. Hayward 12. Metraflex 13. Nexus 14. Kekley, Inc. B. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen.





2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - HYDRONIC AND PLUMBING SYSTEMS FLOW METERS

A. Flow Design, Inc. B. Gerand Eng. Co. (Victaulic) C. Tour & Andersson (Victaulic #733) D. Nexus E. Bell & Gossett (MV Series) F. TACO (Accu-Flo) G. Pro Hydronics 2.6 FLOW METERS FOR HYDRONIC AND PLUMBING SYSTEMS A. Lines Sizes: 1/2" through 2-1/2" 1. Furnish and install brass bronze flow measuring element with balancing and shut-

off(s). The flow element shall be of a low loss/high signal Venturi type with +_2 percent accuracy over a 10:1 rangeability. Each flow element shall be equipped with dual integral check (Shrader type) valve or pressure/temperature test plugs, complete with caps. Each element shall bear a permanent I.D. tag, with stamped or etched print, secured by a chain.

2. The balancing valve may serve in combination as the shut-off valve or be installed separately from the shut-off valve. If separately installed, the combination balancing/shut-off valves shall be integral with the flow element to provide a one-

piece assembly. This balancing valve shall be the ball type with large diameter plated ball, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem with teflon packing and packing nut, full size handle, grip and memory stop.

3. If installed separately, the balancing valve shall be located on the outlet side of the flow element in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. This valve shall be a specially ported 300# rated bronze body butterfly valve with SS disc and viton seats, full size handle and grip, external lockable memory stop and with (without) optional pressure/temperature test port, union inlet or drain.

C. Provide (to the Owner) a portable meter as manufactured by Preso Industries. It shall

have a round 6" dial with a 270 deg. arc, and accuracy of +_1.34 F.S. or better. All wetted parts shall be of metal construction for longer life and to ensure accuracy. The meter body shall be of brass construction, the pressure sensing element of beryllium copper and all valves of brass. The meter shall be supplied complete, mounted in a durable impact resistant carrying case, including high and low purge valves, 2 hoses with quick connections compatible with the flow elements supplied, charts and operating instructions. Turn meter over to the owner after use during balancing. The

meter shall have a dual capacity of 0 to 100 inches and 0 to 100 feet.





PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION – THERMOMETERS, GAUGES AND TEST PLUGS

A. Install Pete’s Plug adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmitter, or sensor sockets and where indicated on typical details. Where thermometers are provided on local panels, pipe mounted thermometers are not required.

B. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale.

3.2 INSTALLATION - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Where large air quantities accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes.

B. Install manual air vents at system high points.

C. Provide drain and hose connection with valve on strainer blow down connection.

D. Provide radiator-balancing valves on water outlet for the following terminal heating unit types: radiation, unit heaters, and fan coil units.

E. In no case may a flow fitting be installed with the taps pointing down. All fittings must be installed with the flow taps facing up to horizontal.

F. Provide flexible pipe connectors to isolate motor driven equipment. Rubber type connectors are acceptable in all locations where piping is rigidly anchored with minimal lateral deflection. Stainless steel type shall be used whenever lateral deflection in excess of 1/2" is possible.

G. Grooved joint piping specialties shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's (Victaulic) guidelines and recommendations. All grooved piping specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. A victualic factory-trained field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor's field personnel in the installation of grooved piping products. Factory-trained representative shall periodically review the product installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.

H. Locate strainers to allow easy access for maintenance. Do not locate strainers in close proximity to electric equipment (including light fixtures) where equipment damage could occur during strainer servicing.

I. Contractor Option: At the suction side of base mounted and close coupled pumps a Victaulic Series #381 piping package may be utilized. At the discharge side of base mounted and close coupled pumps a Victaulic Series #380 piping package may be utilized.





3.3 CLEANING


B. Clean and flush hydronic system with fresh water. Remove and clean ALL strainers before adding glycol solution.


A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting installed construction.

B. Do not install hydronic pressure gauges until after systems are pressure tested. 3.5 FLOW MEASURING SCHEDULE LOCATION Heating water system (Each device and coil) 1-1/4” vertical loops 3.6 TEST PLUGS LOCATION Control valves 1 inch & larger - inlets and outlets Major coils - inlets and outlets 3.7 STAINLESS STEEL FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR SCHEDULE Connector Type Size Minimum Length Stainless Steel 2-1/2” 12" Stainless Steel 3” 14" Stainless Steel 4” 16" 3.8 EXPANSION TANK SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS






BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 232126 – GLYCOL SYSTEM

Page 1

SECTION 232126 - GLYCOL SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Storage tank or barrels.

B. Ethylene glycol solution. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping. B. Section 232150 - Chemical (Water) Treatment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 01. B. Submit glycol test results at project completion. C. Submit glycol test results at 11 month occupancy. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Replace ethylene glycol solution lost from the systems from any cause other than neglect

by Owner during the first year of operation. B. Thoroughly check system and make necessary corrections if system continually loses

solution. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Dow Chemical B. Freemont Industries

C. Union Carbide D. Interstate Chemical E. Rhomar Water




Page 2

F. Jaytech Water Management 2.2 GLYCOL SYSTEM (Factory Pre-Mixed) A. Provide glycol solution for heating systems. 2.3 STORAGE TANKS A. Provide 30 gallon glycol barrel for extra material. 2.4 GLYCOL SOLUTION

A. Before connecting to or modifying the existing hot water system the Mechanical Contractor shall test the solution for glycol strength, type, inhibitors and degradation and shall then provide test results to the Owner and Engineer for their review. Those results will determine what adjustments may be needed by the Owner to bring it to 30% ethylene propylene glycol solution with appropriate inhibitors and water quality.

B. Provide factory pre-mixed 30% Ethylene glycol and water solution suitable to a freeze

protection temperature of 0°F and a burst protection of -50°F. C. The Mechanical Contractor shall utilize their piping take-off and equipment gallon

capacities from suppliers to establish total system capacity. D. The Mechanical Contractor shall fill the system using only a factory pre-mixed solution

and shall provide a hose fill connection unless noted otherwise on plan. E. The water used in the pre-mixed solution shall be either distilled or de-ionized. F. Provide for a vessel (boiler, buffer tank, etc.) in each system where pure glycol can be

added (if necessary) when initial strength testing indicates low percentage due to the amount of water left in the system after flushing and draining process.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GLYCOL DEGRADATION OF EXISTING SOLUTION A. Before connecting to or modifying the existing hot water system the Mechancial Contractor shall test the solution for glycol strength and provide test results to the Owner and Engineer for their review. These results will determine what adjustments may be needed by the Owner to bring it to 30% ethylene glycol solution with appropriate inhibitors.

B. If new piping is going to be connected to an existing glycol system, glycol degradation

testing must be conducted on the loop by the independent water treatment and glycol sub-contractor prior to new piping connection. Testing must include:




Page 3

1. Glycolate, Acetate, Formate, Oxalate organic acids (under 300ppm combined organic acid required)

2. Tolyltriazole (more than 10ppm required) 3. Dissolved Copper (Less than 1 Mg/L required) 4. Dissolved Oxygen (Less than 1 Mg/L required) 5. Nitrite as NO2 (more than 1000ppm required) 6. Dissolved Iron (Less than 0.5 Mg/L required) 7. Molybdenum (No molybdenum allowed due to discharge concerns) 8. Suspended Solids via a Babcock/Wilcox filter patch study (100 ppb or less)

C. If any of the above tests do not fall within required limits, the existing glycol system must be treated and retested until test results fall within range. All costs for adjusting the existing solution before new piping connection shall be additional maintenance costs to the Owner.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Mechanical Contractor shall thoroughly clean system and flush system before adding factory pre-mixed glycol solution. Refer to Specification Section 23 21 50 for testing requirements by an independent water treatment and glycol provider. Final flush shall be with softened water.

B. Mechanical Contractor shall provide necessary piping to complete installation. C. Mechanical Contractor shall pump the factory pre-mixed solution into the piping system through a hose connection into the system. D. Perform chemical test to determine quality of glycol solution before system is turned over

to Owner. Add pure glycol as required to pre-mixed solution to obtain final 30% ethylene solution. (Use attached analysis form for test.) Provide a second test at the eleventh (11th) month of operation. Replenish glycol and/or inhibitors as required.

E. As part of the Owner’s O & M manuals, the Mechanical Contractor shall provide system

capacity and quality test results on the solution as follows on attached sheet. System capacity shall be recorded during initial fill for the best possible quantity estimate.

F. When using factory pre-mixed glycol solutions, test final glycol concentration after

circulating it for a minimum of two weeks and add pure glycol as required to raise concentration to the specified level. This may be required due to the inability to get all of the flushing water out of the system prior to putting in the factory pre-mixed glycol solution.

G. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for correction of any system damage due

to freezing of the hydronic fluid for the first winter after the glycol solution is installed in the system.




Page 4



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 232150 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT

Page 1

SECTION 232150 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. System cleaner. 2. Closed system treatment (water).


A. Closed System – After initial fill with pre-mixed solution any additional water added to the system shall be either softened or RO.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit chemical treatment materials and chemicals.


A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and piping, including sampling points and location for chemical addition.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit step by step instructions on test procedures including target concentrations.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 150 miles of Project with water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel.




A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Maintenance service. 1. Hot Water/Glycol – Provide all testing and chemical adjustments at system turn-

over to owner and then one to two weeks prior to the 1-year warranty end.




Page 2

B. Furnish technical service visit, to perform field inspections and make water analysis on site. Detail findings in writing on proper practices, chemical treating requirements and corrective actions needed. Submit two copies of field service report after each visit.

C. Furnish laboratory and technical assistance services during this maintenance period.

D. Furnish on site inspections of equipment during scheduled or emergency shutdown and after any leaking problems to properly evaluate success of water treatment program, and make recommendations in writing based upon these inspections.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish chemicals for treatment and testing during warranty period.

B. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Maintenance products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM CLEANER

A. Manufacturers: 1. Jaytech’s – JT3450 or JT3415 2. Fremont Corp. – 8815 System Cleaner 3. Interstate Chemical 4. Nalco 5. D.L.C.S. 6. U.S. Water 7. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products; sodium tri-Poly phosphate and sodium molybdate if allowed by local municipality.

2.2 CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT (WATER)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Fremont Corp. 2. Jaytech 3. Interstate Chemical 4. Nalco 5. D.L.C.S. 6. U.S. Water 7. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements.

B. Chemical treatment to be comprised of polymeric scale retardants, sodium nitrate, pH control additives, triazole copper inhibitors and phosphonates.




Page 3

C. Sodium molybdate may be used if permitted by municipality.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Operate, fill, start and vent systems prior to cleaning. Use water meter or trace chemical calculation method to record capacity in each system. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning.

B. Provide a permanent tag with “updated total” system capacity information and attach it to the air eliminator.

3.2 TEMPORARY CIRCULATING PUMP FOR SYSTEM CLEANING

A. The scope of this project includes adding a new hydronic piping loop connected to the existing larger building hydronic loop. The mechanical contractor shall temporarily isolate the new piping loop as required so that it may be cleaned independent of the larger building loop. A temporary pump shall be connected to the loop and utilized to meet the cleaning requirements of this section. The pump shall be removed after the cleaning

process is complete. The new loop will then be connected to the existing larger building loop. 3.3 INITIAL TESTING

A. The water source for filling and flushing must be tested and approved by contracted chemical treatment company to verify compatibility with cleaners, glycols and inhibitor packages. B. If new piping is tying into an existing system, the existing system must be tested to verify the system “starting point”. It will be the mechanical contractor’s responsibility to coordinate with the Owner’s Representative all adjustments and improvements needed with the existing piping system to bring it to a good, clean and chemically balanced condition. Costs for these adjustments shall be the Owner’s responsibility. When the existing system’s quality is established to the Owner and Engineers satisfaction the Mechanical Contractor shall ensure that the final system is of the same or better quality than the existing system “starting point”.

3.4 INITIAL SYSTEM FLUSH

A. The addition to the system will initially be filled with approved water and thoroughly flushed to remove any dirt and debris from the materials of construction. The system must be filled and drained from points which maximize flow throughout the entire loop. A system pressure of at least 10 psig must be maintained during the flush. B. All valves in the loop must be in the open position during the flushing process.




Page 4

C. The initial flush must last for at least four continuous hours. The flush will be considered a success when the water exiting the loop contains less than 80 ppb of total suspended solids.

3.5 SYSTEM CLEANING

A. The system will be filled to 5% of total volume with Jaytech’s JT3450 or JT3415 (or equal) all in one multi-metal cleaning solution. B. The system must be circulated with the cleaner continuously for at least 48 hours and no more than 10 days. Old or fouled piping may require additional cleaner or circulation time. Raise loop temp to 180°F in boiler systems to improve cleaning. C. The addition to the system must be filled and drained with approved water from points which maximize flow throughout the entire loop. A system pressure of at least 10 psig must be maintained during the flush. D. The addition to the system must then be flushed for a period lasting at least 48 hours but no more than 7 days. E. The flush will be considered a success when the water exiting the loop contains less than 80 ppb of total suspended solids and less than 300 RLUs of biological content using an ATP test meter. F. Sufficient flush water is imperative to the timeline of the flushing process. 15- 30 times the systems volume per day must be maintained.

3.6 CLOSED LOOP TESTING

A. Babcock/Wilcox Millepore testing and biological testing must be conducted on each loop that is cleaned and flushed at the cost of the mechanical contractor. Millepore results must yield less than 80 ppb of total suspended solids and ATP biological testing must yield less than 300 RLUs in order to consider the clean and flush a success. B. The water treatment company testing both the existing piping system and the additional piping loop must provide a written report documenting all testing conducted on the loop. Copies of the report must be provided to the mechanical contractor and the building owner.

3.7 CLOSED SYSTEM TREAMENT A. Provide one bypass pot feeder on each system. Install isolating and drain valves and

interconnecting piping. Install around pump differential to insure adequate flow.




Page 5

B. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test.





Page 6

BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 233100 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Page 1

SECTION 233100 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Duct materials. 2. Flexible ducts. 3. Insulated flexible ducts. 4. Single wall spiral round ducts. 5. Single wall spiral flat oval ducts. 6. Double wall spiral insulated round ducts. 7. Transverse duct connection system. 8. Ductwork fabrication.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment:

Product requirements for hangers, supports and sleeves for placement by this section.

2. Section 230700 - Duct Insulation: Product requirements for duct lining and wrapping.

3. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories: Product requirements for duct accessories for placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A90/A90M - Standard Test Method for Weight Mass of Coating on Iron

and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings. 3. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting

Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. 4. ASTM A568/A568M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon and High-

Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements. 5. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 6. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled,

Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

7. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

8. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.





B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems.

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction standard - Metal and Flexible. 2. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.

E. AARST-ANSI (Association of Radon Scientist and Technologists)


A. Variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is not permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data for duct materials, duct liner and duct connectors.



B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.


A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and flexible.

B. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.



B. Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers.

C. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant.






1.9 DEFINITIONS A. Rectangular Duct Sizes: Metal duct dimensions are indicated on plans and the sizes on

the plans have been increased to take any duct liner into account, where the ducts are specified to be lined.

B. Low Pressure Classification: 2 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and

velocities less than 2,500 fpm. 1.10 PAYMENTS A. During the construction period ductwork shall not be considered billable on a payment

request until it has been fabricated and delivered to the job site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having G60 or G90 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90.

1. G90 galvanized used on duct exposed to weather or high moisture areas such as showers, exhaust, kitchen exhaust, etc.

B. Non-Insulated Flexible Ducts:

1. Manufacturers: a. Anco-Flex b. Norflex c. Wiremold

d. Thermaflex II

C. Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire.

D. Insulated Flexible Ducts: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Anco-Flex b. Norflex c. Wiremold d. Thermaflex II

2. Black polymer film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor barrier film.

a. Pressure Rating: 4 inches WG positive and 0.5 inches WG negative. b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. c. Temperature Range: -20°F to 175°F.




E. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic tested in accordance with ASTM E-84-80 and to not exceed 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed.

F. Joint Sealer: Acceptable Manufacturer - Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Duct

Sealer 900, Foster 30-02 Ductmate Industries 795 Duct Sealer or 5511M if applied at the time of forming.

G. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.

H. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.

2.2 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on

centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide air foil turning vanes. Acoustical lining is required for a minimum of the first 15 feet (or more as shown on plans) of all supply and/or return air ductwork. In that length of lined ductwork provide air foil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;

maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.

D. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct

gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. As an option, standard elbows may be used, but all seams must be sealed.

E. Provide standard rectangular to round efficiency takeoffs at branch duct takeoff. Conical

spin-in branch take-offs are acceptable when main duct is tall enough to accommodate the throat of the branch duct plus two inches for the cone.

2.3 DOUBLE-WALL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION (ROUND, OVAL AND

RECTANGULAR) A. Manufacturers: 1. Lindab, Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow Corporation 3. SEMCO, Inc. 4. Sheetmetal Connectors, Inc. 5. FabDuct 6. Midwest Spiro Pipe 7. Ducts and Cleats




B. Ducts: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) ducts for outdoor and indoor applications with an outer shell and an inner duct. Dimensions indicated as __”∅ I.D. are for the inner duct size. The outer shell dimension depends on thickness of insulation; 1” thick at inside

systems and 2” thick at outside systems. 1. Outer Shell: G90 steel on exterior ducts and G60 steel on interior ducts.. Base

metal thickness on outer-shell dimensions. Fabricate outer-shell lengths 2 inches longer than inner duct shell and insulation. Fabricate with metal thickness specified for single-wall duct.

2. Insulation : 2-inch thick at exterior ducts with, Type-E or 1-1/2 lb/SF fibrous glass with R-8 minimum value. Terminate insulation where double-wall duct connects to single-wall duct or un-insulated components and reduce outer shell diameter to inner duct diameter. 3. Solid inner wall: (after 40 feet from AHU supply connection) use G60 galvanized

with water-tight, gasketed joints at exterior ducts. Use the following sheet metal thicknesses and seam construction.

a. Ducts 3 to 8 Inches in Diameter: 0.019 inch ( 28 gauge ) with standard spiral-seam construction. b. Ducts 9 to 42 Inches in Diameter: 0.019 inch with single-rib spiral-seam construction.

4. Provide perforated inner wall (the first 40 feet from AHU supply duct) for sound attenuation. Fabricate with 0.028-inch-thick G60 sheet metal having 3/32inch-diameter perforations, with overall open area of 23 percent.

5. Maintain concentricity of inner wall to outer shell by mechanical means. Prevent dislocation of insulation by mechanical means. C. Fittings: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) fittings with an outer shell to match straight sections of duct and an inner wall as follows. 1. Solid Inner Wall: G60 galvanized steel. Use the following sheetmetal thicknesses. a. Ducts 3 to 34 Inches in Diameter: 0.028 inch ( 24 gauge ). b. Ducts 35 to 58 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch ( 22 gauge ) 2. Perforated Inner Wall: Fabricate with 0.028-inch thick G60 galvanized sheet metal

having 3/32-inch-diameter perforations, with overall open area of 23 percent. 3. Refer to Plans for ducts designated with a size followed by I.D. (inside diameter)

for double wall. The duct size shown is actual inside sheet metal dimension. 2.4 TRANSVERSE DUCT CONNECTION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate

2. Nexus 3. SMC (R-Angle) 4. Ward Industries 5. Transverse Duct Connections (TDC) 6. Fab Duct 7. Approved equal prior to bidding.




B. SMACNA "F" rated class rigidly connection, interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and corner clips.

C. All components including sealants and gaskets shall be provided to meet manufacturer’s requirements. No substitutions shall be allowed. 2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ABOVE GROUND ROUND AND OVAL

SPIRAL DUCTS A. Midwest Spiro Vinyl-Cote Pipe Co. B. Foremost Mfg. Co. C. Wesco, Inc. D. SMC Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. E. Tangent, Inc. F. Norlock G. United McGill H. Semco I. Fab Duct J. Approved equal manufacturer prior to bidding. 2.6 EXPOSED G.I. SPIRAL DUCT A. Above ground duct material shall be galvanized steel spiral duct. All fittings shall be

constructed of same material, with all welded seams. B. All exposed spiral and rectangular duct that is scheduled or noted on Mechanical or

Architectural plans, to be painted, shall be provided with paint grip coatings, ready for painting without further treatment by the painting Sub-Contractor.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - Administration Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabrication of transitions.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards

- Metal and Flexible. Duct supports shall be at duct joints and shall be installed at maximum of 8 feet or 10 feet dependent on SMACHA duct construction choices,

C. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and

controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where

openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

D. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and

maintenance activities. 1. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 2. Ductwork support from roof decking is not allowed unless specifically approved

by the Structural Engineer.

E. Pop rivet and tape joints of PVC coated metal ductwork with PVC tape. F. Joint Sealing - All low pressure ductwork to be sealed in accordance with SMACNA.

1. Seal Class 'C': Seal transverse joints only 2" WG and less. 2. Seal Class 'B': Seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams 3" WG and less. 3. Seal Class 'A': Seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall

penetrations. 4" WG and up. 4. In addition to the above, any variable air volume system duct of 1" and less WG

construction class that is downstream of the VAV boxes shall meet Seal Class 'C'.

G. Seal duct heating and cooling coil casing joints as required to eliminate air leakage. H. Cross Breaking - Cross break all sheet metal surfaces of rectangular ducts 18 inches

through 60 inches. Beaded ductwork may be used in lieu of cross breaking. Cross breaking may be omitted on internally lined ducts and on ducts 24 inches and larger where rigid insulation is applied to the exterior of the ducts.

I. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with four foot maximum length of

flexible duct. Flexible duct may be used to make minor offsets, but may not be used to make 20° or larger changes in direction. Provide a gradual in-line duct transition from rectangular to round duct as shown on plans.

J. Connect diffusers, return air grilles or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts either

directly or with 6 feet maximum length of flexible duct to the collar extension or elbow mounted on the diffuser. Hold in place with strap or clamp. Exhaust registers shall be directly connected without use of flex. Extend flexible duct to the base of the diffuser neck or register collar. Overlap flex duct at insulated rigid branch duct and seal vapor tight. Refer to Code requirements for direct ducting to all devices within a fire-rated area or downstream of a fire barrier penetration.




K. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape or draw bands and/or sheet metal screws.

L. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open

ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. M. All ductwork stored on site must be protected from construction dust and dirt with polyethylene sheeting prior to installation. If ductwork is not protected and gets contaminated, it shall be fully cleaned to the Engineer's satisfaction prior to installation. N. All in-line duct transitions shall be gradual (20°) taper to minimize pressure loss and

noise increase due to turbulent flow. O. All rectangular branch duct take-offs shall be installed with a high efficiency fitting as

shown on plan. If a round branch duct is shown directly connected to a rectangular duct, either a spin-in conical take-off or rectangular to round transition is acceptable. Round spin-in take-offs are not approved.

P. Seal all insulation terminations at diffusers, registers, branch ducts and main duct

connections with tape such that no insulation is left exposed to ambient air. Q. Provide gaskets and caulk sealants required for installation of a water-tight, double wall,

duct system when exposed to the weather. R. Use perforated inner liner on first 40 feet of double wall supply ducts and duct fittings connected to fan-powered equipment supply outlets. S. Install ductwork exposed above the roof on PHP or Miro Ind. uni-strut type assembly designed for the specific application. The Contractor shall use spacing recommendations from the support manufacturer and shall provide a drawing indicating the supports layout.

3.3 CLEANING (NEW DUCTWORK SURFACES ONLY)

A. Clean work under provisions of Division 01.

B. Clean duct system by forcing air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which

may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. Equipment fans shall be used for this duct cleaning. (Not by a duct cleaning company.)

C. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which may

be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes.

D. External Duct Cleaning: When external surfaces of exposed ducts are to be painted, the

mechanical contractor shall remove all stickers, labels and excess adhesive from metallic or non-metallic ducts prior to painting whether they were factory, shop or field applied. All sheet metal used for rectangular, round or oval painted ductwork shall be manufactured with "paint grip".




3.4 SCHEDULES

A. DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Low Pressure Supply/Return Steel (Heating and/or A.C. Systems) General Exhaust Steel, Aluminum Gravity or Powered Relief Steel

B. DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS SCHEDULE

AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS Variable Volume (Downstream of Boxes) 1 inch regardless of velocity Variable Volume (Upstream of Boxes) 2 inch regardless of velocity Return and Relief 1 inch General Exhaust 1/2 inch

3.5 MINIMUM DUCT SEAL LEVELS Supply Duct Static

A. Duct Location ≤ 2” w.c. >2”w.c. Exhaust Return Outdoor A A NA NA Conditioned Space B B B C

B. Duct Seal Levels 1. Type - A: All transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations.

Pressure-sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary sealant, unless it has been certified to comply with UL-181A or UL-181B by an independent testing laboratory and the tape is used in accordance with that certification.

2. Type - B: All transverse joints, longitudinal seams. Pressure-sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary sealant, unless it has been certified to comply with UL 181A or UL-181B by an independent testing laboratory and the tape is used in accordance with that certification.

3. Type - C: Transverse joints only. 4. All ducts with a class “K” sealant rating that are installed outdoors or will operate

at a static pressure of 3” or greater shall be leak tested by an independent Testing and Balancing Agency. Refer to Section 23 05 93 and coordinate testing with the involved agency.

3.6 DUCT CONSTRUCTION TABLE A. The following table does not constitute all requirements for the construction's

compliance. Complete details are provided in the manual entitled HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.

1. Use back-up member from Columns 11 or 12. Exception: The drive only requires back-up over 20" length.




2. Spacing in Column 3 refers to joint-to-joint, joint-to-intermediate or intermediate-to-intermediate.

3. The same sheet thickness must be used on all sides of duct. Each duct dimension, width or depth, controls the minimum reinforcement requirements for that particular side.

4. Duct sides 19" wide and larger which have more than ten square feet of unbraced panel shall be beaded or cross broken unless the ducts will have external insulation or internal liner. This applies to ducts of 20 gauge or less.

5. Duct with 4 feet joint spacing shall conform as if 4' and 2' were given in Column 3 where 5' and 2-1/2' are shown.

B. Table 1-4 E5, & 1-5 E5




ABOVE GROUND LONGITUDINAL SEAM ROUND DUCT

GAUGE SIZE 22 15" TO 26" 24 9" TO 14" 26 3" TO 8"

SPIRAL SEAM @ EXPOSED ROUND AND FLAT OVAL DUCT GAUGE DUCT DIAMETER FITTING DIAMETER 20 52" AND UP 38" TO 60" 22 38" TO 50" 30" TO 36" 24 28" TO 36" 20" TO 28" 26 16" TO 26" 14" TO 18" 28 4" TO 14" 4" TO 12"




BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Volume control dampers. 2. Duct access doors. 3. Dynamic fire dampers. 4. Flexible duct connections. 5. Duct test holes.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230923 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: Execution and

Product requirements for connection and control of Combination Smoke/fire dampers for placement by this section.

2. Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Requirements for duct construction and pressure classifications.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers.

C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems. 2. NFPA 92A - Recommended Practice for Smoke-Control Systems.

D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.

E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 555 - Standard for Safety for Fire Dampers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers, duct access doors and duct test holes.

C. Product Data: Submit data for shop fabricated assemblies and hardware used.




D. Product Data: Submit for the following. Include where applicable electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 1. Fire dampers including locations and ratings. 2. Backdraft dampers. 3. Flexible duct connections. 4. Volume control dampers. 5. Duct access doors. 6. Duct test holes.

E. Product Data: For fire dampers, smoke dampers, combination smoke/fire dampers submit the following: 1. Include UL ratings, dynamic ratings, leakage, pressure drop and maximum

pressure data. 2. Indicate materials, construction, dimensions, and installation details. 3. Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in

accordance with AMCA 500.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for fire dampers.



B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of access doors and test holes.


A. Dampers tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest UL requirements.

B. Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 500.



B. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

C. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material.

D. Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoor, protected from damage.

E. Handling: Handle and lift dampers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage.






1.8 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate Work where appropriate with building control Work.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS


B. Furnish two of each size and type of fusible link.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - VOLUME CONTROL PRODUCTS A. Duro Dyne B. Farr C. Dowco D. Cesco E. Parker F. Nailor G. Greenheck H. Ruskin I. Air Balance J. Pottorff K. Fab Duct 2.2 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as

indicated.




B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gauge as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gauges heavier for sizes over 24 inches.

C. Fabricate splitter dampers of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure

blade with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action flanged bushing with set screw.

D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes through 9-1/2 x 30 inches. E. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade from sizes 12

x 30 inch and larger. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.

F. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade

dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or

adapters. 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CONCEALED DAMPER REGULATORS A. Duro-Dyne B. Young Regulator C. Roto-Twist D. United Enertech 2.4 CONCEALED DAMPER REGULATORS A. In all inaccessible areas, i.e. plaster ceilings, use gear operated concealed damper

regulators, set with hex nuts, similar to Duro Dyne Item #8008 Model SRC-380 (3/8" rod), with cast alloy corrosion resistive plated cover.

B. At duct provide a 90° angle drive die cast miter-gear assembly similar to Duro Dyne Item

#8135/Model #AD-38 (3/8" rod).

C. If the concealed regulator cannot be mounted directly below the damper or if the 3/8" rod length exceeds 36" in length, a flexible cable drive may be utilized between the regulator and the damper. D. As an option: The regulator can be mounted on the internal surface of square diffusers with a 10’ or 15’ cable reaching the damper set-back 10’ or 15’ feet from the diffuser to minimize noise.




E. Another option is to utilize a “Balancing Station located in a remote room or above an accessible ceiling. Multiple gear driven damper operators can be mounted at each “Balancing Station”. 2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIRE DAMPERS A. Safe-Air, Inc. B. Air Balance C. Prefco, Inc. D. National Controlled Air E. Advanced Air Corp. F. Cesco G. Ruskin H. Creative Metals I. Greenheck Fan Corp. J. Nailor K. Arrow Industries L. Pottorff

M. Air technologies, Inc. N. Shoemaker

2.6 DYNAMIC FIRE DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555.

B. Fire Resistance: 1-1/2 hours.

C. Dynamic Closure Rating: Dampers classified for dynamic closure to 2000 fpm and 4 inches wg static pressure.

D. Construction: 1. Integral Sleeve Frame: Minimum 20 gauge roll formed galvanized steel. Length:

12 inches, 14 inches or 16 inches. 2. Blades:

a. Style: Curtain type.




b. Action: Spring or gravity closure upon fusible link release. c. Material: Minimum 24 gauge roll formed, galvanized steel.

3. Closure Springs: Type 301 stainless steel, constant force type, if required.

E. Fusible Link Release Temperature: 165°F.

F. Mounting: Vertical or horizontal as indicated on Drawings.

G. Duct Transition Connection, Damper Style: 1. A style - rectangular connection, frame and blades in air stream. 2. LR style - round connection, blades out of air stream, non-sealed.

H. Finish: Mill galvanized. 2.7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Louvers and Dampers B. Safe-Air C. Farr D. Cesco, Inc. E. Ruskin F. Arrow United G. Creative Metals H. American Warming Co. I. Air Balance J. Nailor K. Greenheck, Inc. L. Pottorff 2.8 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Gravity backdraft dampers, size 18x18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving

equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction. B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced backdraft dampers of 18 gauge

galvanized steel or aluminum with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin;




adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure similar to Model No. ABD-200 (Aluminum) or HDD-150 (Steel) manufactured by Louvers and Dampers.

2.9 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - AIR TURNING DEVICES A. J & J Register Co. B. Cesco, Inc. C. Hart & Cooley D. Duro-Dyne 2.10 AIR TURNING DEVICES A. Units shall be similar to Duro-Dyne Vane Rail 24 ga. galv. iron. 2.11 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Ventfabrics B. Ventglas C. Duro-Dyne 2.12 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as

indicated. B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum

density 20 oz per sq yd, approximately 6 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip. Insulate with one inch thick flexible fiberglass insulation and a flame safe jacket. Similar to Duro-Dyne's insulflex connections.

2.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Safe-Air, Inc. B. Cesco C. Ruskin D. Advanced Air E. National. F. Controlled Air




G. Creative Metals H. Nailor I. Kees J. Pottorff 2.14 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and as

indicated. B. Review locations prior to fabrication. C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick

fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover.

D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks. E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and

two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes.

F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

G. Provide all necessary regular and/or fire rated access doors in ceilings and walls for adjusting and/or fire damper re-setting. Refer to Division 1, Specification Section 08310.

2.15 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene

plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap.

Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify rated walls are ready for fire damper installation.

C. Verify ducts and equipment installations are ready for accessories.




D. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry and lighting arrangement.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressure class.

B. Access Doors: Install access doors at the following locations and as indicated on Drawings: 1. Upstream of each VAV and duct-mounted reheat coil. 2. Before or after each automatic control damper. 3. Before and after each fire damper.

C. Access Door Sizes: Install minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated on Drawings. Review locations prior to fabrication.

D. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply return and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts add additional dampers as required during air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.

E. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.

F. Provide backdraft dampers in all relief ducts and exhaust ducts nearest to outside wall/roof or where indicated. 1. Backdraft damper at small ceiling and in-line fans is acceptable.

G. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.

H. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment and supported by vibration isolators.

I. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.

J. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off.

K. Provide balancing dampers on all duct take-offs to diffusers, grilles and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.

L. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. Also provide plugs for holes.




M. Mechanical Contractor shall provide all necessary surface access doors on finished walls and non-accessible ceilings to adjust and/or reset the mechanical systems in finished spaces. Note: These locations are not shown on the Plans. However, the Mechanical Contractor shall provide and install these doors where necessary. Use fire-rated doors on fire-rated surfaces. Dampers may be controlled by concealed damper operators in lieu of access doors if feasible.

N. Install concealed regulators to operate manual volume dampers located above permanent, inaccessible ceiling. Utilize components of one manufacturer only and install per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training.

B. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.




DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 233327 - SOUND ATTENUATORS AND DUCT LAGGING

Page 1

SECTION 233327 – SOUND ATTENUATORS AND DUCT LAGGING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Duct Silencers. 2. Ductwork Lagging. B. Related Sections 1. Section 233100 - Joint Sealers. 2. Section 233100 - Ductwork: Connections to silencers. 3. Section 233300 - Ductwork Accessories: Flexible duct connections. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating. B. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. C. AMCA 302 - Application of Sound Loudness Ratings for Non-Ducted Air Moving

Devices. D. AMCA 303 - Application of Sound Power Level Ratings for Ducted Air Moving Devices

Recommended Typical dBa Calculation. E. ANSI S1.1 - Acoustical Terminology (Including Mechanical Shock and Vibration).

F. ANSI S1.13 - Methods for Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels.

G. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. H. ARI 575 - Measuring Machinery Sound within Equipment Rooms. I. ASA 16 (ANSI S1.36) - Survey Methods for Determination of Sound Power Levels of

Noise Sources. J. ANSI S1.8 - Preferred Reference Quantities for Acoustical Levels. K. ASA 47 (ANSI S1.4) - Specification for Sound Level Meters. L. ASA 49 (ANSI S12.1) - Preparation of Standard Procedures to Determine the Noise

Emission from Sources. M. ASHRAE 68 - Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement Procedure for

Fans.




Page 2

N. ASHRAE Handbook - Systems Volume, Chapter "Sound and Vibration Control".

O. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A90/A90M - Standard Test Method for Weight Mass of Coating on Iron

and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings. 3. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting

Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 4. ASTM A568/A568M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and

High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for.

5. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

6. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

7. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

8. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.


P. ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission of

Building Partitions. Q. ASTM E477 - Method of Testing Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers for

Acoustical and Airflow Performance. R. ASTM E596 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Noise Reduction of Sound

Isolating Enclosures. S. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. T. NEBB – Procedural Standards for Total System Balance. U. AABC – National Standards for Total System Balance. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, materials, thicknesses, dimensional data, pressure losses, acoustical performance, layout and connection details.

C. Product Data: Provide catalog information indicating, materials, dimensional data,

pressure losses and acoustical performance.




Page 3

D. Design Data: Provide engineering calculations, referenced to specifications and Fan

AMCA 301 Non-Ducted Equipment AMCA 302 Ducted Equipment AMCA 303 and Outdoor Equipment ARI 270 ASA 49 (ANSI S12.1) standards indicating that maximum

room sound levels are not exceeded. E. Test Reports: Indicate dynamic insertion loss and noise generation values of silencers,

acoustic housings meet or exceed specified sound transmission loss values.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements which maintain integrity of sound isolation.



B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.


A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and flexible.

B. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.



B. Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers.

C. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant.


A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Price Sound Control B. I.A.C. - Industrial Acoustics Company

C. Ruskin Sound Control/Rink




Page 4

D. Semco E. Vibro-Acoustics

F. "VAW" Systems 2.2 DUCT SILENCERS A. Description: Duct section with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fill material,

and inner casing of perforated sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similar construction. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

B. Configuration: Rectangular with lined splitters with radiused nose and contoured tails,

modular as noted on plans. C. Materials:

1. Outer Casing: Minimum 22 gauge thick galvanized steel stiffened as required, with mastic filled lock formed seams.

2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 24 gauge thick perforated galvanized steel. 3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 4 lb/cu ft density.

D. Rating: 1. ASTM E477 Insertion Loss and Maximum Generated Noise at 1000 fpm Face Velocity.

2. Air Tight Static Pressure: 10 inches wg. 3. Attenuators used in return or exhaust air applications must have certified data

obtained from tests run under reverse flow conditions. 2.3 MANUFACTURER DUCTWORK LAGGING A. Sound Seal - B-20 Lag/QFA-9 B. Approved equal manufacturer prior to bidding. 2.4 DUCTWORK LAGGING A. Acoustic Insulation: 2 inch thick, quilted, 2.0 lb/sq. ft density glass fiber or mineral wool

insulation. R factor 8.0. B. Covering: Heavy mylar faced re-enforced vinyl barrier sheet with surface weight

minimum 0.4 lb/sq ft. C. Product meeting ASTM E-90 and E-423 requirements. D. 28 HZ reduction @ 500 OB and 37 HZ @ 1000 OB.




Page 5

2.5 ROOF PENETRATIONS A. All openings for duct, piping and conduits shall be sealed with an acoustical tape sealant. 1. Design standard is C.R.L. Norseal #V730 with ¼” thickness by 1-1/2” width. B. In addition, beneath the units and inside the curb install a sound isolation barrier of 3/4”

waterproof plywood or cement board, sealed with acoustical tape to the curb structure, pipe and duct.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Support duct silencers rigidly to ductwork. Refer to Section 233100.

C. Install cross-talk silencers in wall. Caulk wall penetrations; refer to Division 07. D. Install ductwork lagging, where indicated, by wrapping with insulation blanket and

weighted mylar covering. Applied covering to be air-tight. Do not attach covering rigidly to ductwork.

3.2 SCHEDULES - SEE PLANS FOR SIZE AND QUANTITIES END OF SECTION 233327




Page 6

BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 233405 - HVAC FANS Page 1

SECTION 233405 - HVAC FANS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Ceiling Exhaust Fans.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230700 - HVAC Insulation: Product requirements for power ventilators

for placement by this section. 2. Section 230923 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: Controls remote

from unit. 3. Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Product requirements for hangers

for placement by this section. 4. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories: Product requirements for duct

accessories for placement by this section. 5. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution and product

requirements for connecting fan equipment and damper actuator specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association: 1. ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

B. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. 2. AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. 3. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance

Rating. 4. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. 5. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test

Data.

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. 2. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 3. NEMA 3R – Outdoor Disconnect.

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 705 - Power Ventilators.

1.3 SUBMITTALS





B. Shop Drawings: Indicate size and configuration of fan assembly, mountings, weights, ductwork and accessory connections.

C. Product Data: Submit data on each type of fan and include accessories, fan curves with specified operating point plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit fan manufacturer's instructions.



B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.


A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal.

B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300 and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal.

C. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705.

D. Balance Quality: Conform to AMCA 204.



B. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.


A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Greenheck Fan Co.

B. Carnes, Inc. C. Acme Fan Co.




D. American Coolair, Inc. E. Creative Metals F. Loren Cook G. Twin City Fan Co. H. Penn/Barry Fan I. S. & P. Fan J. Captive Aire 2.2 IN-LINE AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS A. Centrifugal Fan Unit: Direct driven, with galvanized steel housing lined with 1/2 inch

acoustic insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge. If the Fan Schedule indicates the use of an ECM type motor, no exceptions shall be allowed. ECM speed controller shall be motor mounted unless specifically noted elsewhere as control signal by BAS or by a remote mounted speed controller

B. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected

motor and housing mounted solid state speed controller. C. Grille: Molded high-impact polystyrene or aluminum with white finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for support methods, sound control and vibration control. B. Provide for speed controllers as scheduled or if an ECM type motor is scheduled, provide and coordinate speed control method with Division 26 or the ATC Sub- Contractor. 3.2 SCHEDULE

A. See schedule on Drawings. END OF SECTION 233405




BLANK PAGE




SECTION 233600 - VAV - AIR TERMINAL UNITS Page 1

SECTION 233600 - VAV - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Variable volume terminal units. 2. Variable volume regulators.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230923 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: Controls remote

from unit. 2. Section 230993 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls: Sequences of

operation applying to units in this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 880 - Air Terminals. 2. ARI 885 -Procedure for Estimating Occupied Space Sound Levels in the

Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets.

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems.

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication. Include catalog performance ratings indicating airflow, static pressure, heating coil capacity and NC designation. Include schedules listing discharge and radiated sound power level for each of second through sixth octave bands at inlet static pressures of 1 inch to 4 inches wg.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit support and hanging details, and service clearances required.







B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of units and controls components.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts lists. Include directions for resetting constant volume regulators.


A. Test and rate air terminal units performance for air pressure drop, flow performance, and acoustical performance in accordance with ARI 880 and ARI 885. Attach ARI seal to each terminal unit.



1.7 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate work with 230923 - Direct Digital Control System.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR TERMINAL UNIT MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers:

1. Titus, Inc. 2. E.H. Price 3. Nailor Ind. 4. Trane Co. 5. Kruger, Inc. 6. Metal-Aire 7. Tuttle & Bailey 8. Enviro-Tec 9. Approved equal manufacturer prior to bidding. Refer to Division 01. 2.2 SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE VOLUME AIR TERMINAL UNITS

A. Product Description: Pressure-independent, variable-air-volume terminal units for connection to central air systems, with electronic controls and hot water heating coils.





B. Identification: Furnish each air terminal unit with identification label and airflow indicator. Include unit nominal airflow, maximum factory-set airflow and minimum factory-set airflow and coil type.

C. Basic Assembly: 1. Casings: Minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel. 2. Lining: Minimum 0.5 inch thick neoprene insulation, meeting NFPA 90A

requirements and UL 181 erosion requirements. 3. Plenum Air Inlets: Round stub connections for duct attachment. 4. Plenum Air Outlets: S slip-and-drive connections.

D. Basic Unit: 1. Configuration: Air volume damper assembly inside unit casing. Locate control

components inside protective metal shroud. 2. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-

lubricating bearings; maximum damper leakage: 2 percent of design air flow at 1 inches rated inlet static pressure.

3. Mount damper operator to position damper normally open.

E. Hot Water Heating Coil: 1. Construction: 1/2 inch copper tube mechanically expanded into aluminum plate fins, leak tested under water to 200 psig pressure, factory installed. 2. Capacity: Based on 160°F entering water, 130°F leaving water and 50 percent total air volume.

F. Velocity probe provided by box manufacturer.

G. Sound Ratings: Not to exceed 25 NC at 1" inlet static pressure.

H. Sensor: Refer to Sections 230923.

I. Sequence of Operation: Refer to Section 230993 and plan sheet descriptions.

J. Provide an access door upstream of the heating coil for cleaning and adjusting within the unit.

2.3 DAMPER CONTROLS PROVIDED BY TEMPERATURE CONTROL CONTRACTOR

AND INSTALLED BY TEMPERATURE CONTROL CONTRACTOR A. Electric Actuator: 24 volt with remote temperature read and reset capability.

B. Maximum Volume Controller: Electric with calibration pressure taps for high flow limited proportional variable air volume control. Velocity probe provided by box

manufacturer.





C. Velocity Reset Controller: Electric with calibration pressure taps for pressure independent proportional variable air volume control with means for pressure independent compensating for varying inlet static pressure, with minimum and maximum limits set at reset device, mounted in control box. Velocity probe provided

by box manufacturer.

D. Sensor: Wall-mounted electronic type with appropriate mounting hardware provided and installed by ATC Contractor.

2.4 TESTS A. Provide testing of units under provisions of Section 230593. B. Test run volume dampers and controls. Check sequence of operation and air flow limits

at factory prior to shipment. C. Base performance on tests conducted in accordance with ADC 1062. D. Automatic flow controller shall be capable of maintaining air flow to within 5 percent of

set point with inlet static pressure variations up to 4 inches. E. Maximum Casing Leakage: 2 percent of design air flow at rated inlet static pressure.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify ductwork is ready for air terminal installation.

3.2 LOCATION OF AIR TERMINAL UNITS

A. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate exact location of VAV reheat boxes and/or reheat coils with ATC Contractor and all other trades in order to provide reasonable access for maintenance of controls, damper actuator, flow fitting and control valve. 1. Boxes shall be kept within 24" vertically from ceiling for reasonable ladder

access through grid. Provide vertical offsets at 30 degrees or less as required. 2. Service area above a light fixture shall be avoided. If the room size dictates such

a box or coil location, the service panel and valve shall be near the edge of the light to eliminate reaching.

3. Fire protection, hydronic piping and domestic water piping shall not impede access space to control valve, control panel or damper actuator.

4. Electrical conduit and apparatus shall not impede access space to control valve, control panel or damper actuator.





5. If the plan location is not adequate due to any of the afore mentioned items, the Mechanical Contractor shall inform the Engineer so that the location can be adjusted. Relocation of boxes deemed to have inadequate access by the Engineer shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Connect to ductwork in accordance with Section 233100.

B. Install ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling components.

C. Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork and do not support from roof decking unless specifically approved by the Structural Engineer.

D. Support air terminal units connected by flexible duct independently of flexible duct.

E. Install transition piece to match flexible duct size to inlet or outlet of variable air volume terminal. Provide a maximum of four (4) foot long flexible duct connection unless Code required direct duct connecting due to fire barrier or fire-rated area penetrations.

F. Install 1 inch thick lined ductwork downstream of units for a minimum of five feet or more as shown on plan. Refer to Section 230700 for insulation type.

G. Coordinate installation of control components with the ATC Contractor before hanging boxes.

H. Install insulation and jacket over VAV reheat or duct mounted reheat coils. Refer to section 230700.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting and adjusting.

B. Re-set air volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing airflow range modulation from 100 percent of design airflow to 0 percent full airflow. Set units with heating coils for minimum 50 percent of full airflow in heating mode and 15 percent of full airflow in cooling mode.

3.5 SCHEDULES

A. Refer to schedule on Plan Sheet.






BLANK PAGE




SECTION 233700 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Page 1

SECTION 233700 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Diffusers. 2. Registers. 3. Grilles. 4. Goosenecks. 5. Roof curbs.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230923 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: Operators for

adjustable louvers. 2. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories: Volume dampers for inlets and outlets.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and

Inlets.

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit sizes, finish, and type of mounting. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application and noise level.



B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.


A. Test and rate diffuser, register, and grille performance in accordance with ASHRAE 70.

B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500.





PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CEILING DIFFUSERS/GRILLES AND REGISTERS A. Hart & Cooley B. Titus Manufacturing Co. C. E. H. Price Company D. Metal-Aire E. Tuttle & Bailey F. Nailor G. Krueger 2.2 SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Square, fully adjustable discharge pattern, multi-tier type diffuser to discharge air in 360

degree pattern with air pattern control blades. Noise criteria levels shall not exceed NC-25 in vertical discharge position.

B. Adjustable air flow shall not be allowed by use of adjustable core position. Individual

adjustable vanes shall be provided on all four sides and shall be accessible from the unit face.

C. Fabricate of steel with baked enamel off-white finish. D. Provide with damper adjustable from diffuser face. E. Lay-In Inverted T-bar type. F. Design standard - E.H. Price #SCDA. 2.3 CEILING GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch egg crate bars. B. Fabricate 7/8 inch margin frame with countersunk screw for surface mounting or no

screw holes in lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings. C. Fabricate of aluminum with factory white finish.





D. At constant volume locations, when a branch duct damper isn’t installed, provide an integral, gang-operated opposed blade damper with removable key operator. The Mechanical contractor shall verify these locations and order the dampers as required for balancing.

E. On VAV systems dampers are not required at the return air grilles. F. Design Standard - E.H. Price #Series 80. 2.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – THERMALLY POWERED VAV DIFFUSER A. Acutherm B. Rickard C. Therminal Logic Control, Inc. D. Krueger, Inc.

E. Thermal Products Corp. F. Performance Air Products G. E. H. Price (Low Voltage) 2.5 THERMALLY POWERED, HEATING AND COOLING, VAV DIFFUSER A. Thermally powered variable air volume diffusers shall be as scheduled. B. Square thermo-fuser diffusers shall have self-contained variable air volume control,

adjustable from 70° to 80°, they shall be made of steel with glass white enamel finish and 2'-2' lay-in panel.

C. A changeover thermal element shall be factory installed and adjusted to engage the

heating mode at 81°F and engage the cooling mode at 70°F. The changeover element shall not extend above the neck of the unit.

D. The units shall have 66 lineal inches of variable discharge area at the perimeter of the

diffuser for linear control, maximum Coanda effect and to avoid dumping. Each diffuser shall be factory tested and shall be a totally self-contained and thermally powered variable air volume unit.

E. Where the letter R follows the model designation (TF-HC-R) the unit shall be equipped

with static pressure relief for bypassing into a return air plenum. F. Design Standard - Accutherm #TF-HC.





2.6 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, depth of which exceeds 3/4" maximum

spacing with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face, double deflection. B. Fabricate 1-1/4" margin frame with countersunk concealed screw mounting and gasket. C. Fabricate of steel with 20 gauge minimum frames and 22 gauge minimum blades, with

factory prime coat finish. D. Provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with removable key operator,

operable from face. E. Design Standard - E.H. Price #520D. F. When referred to as heavy-duty type, blades shall be front pivoted, with device to

securely lock blades after adjustment. Frame shall be 18 gauge and blades shall be 14 gauge.

2.7 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Streamlined 40° blades, 3/4" depth minimum. 1/2” maximum blade spacing with spot

weld, “U” channel or other device to permanently set blades, horizontal face. B. Fabricate 1-1/4" margin frame with countersunk screw mounting. C. Fabricate of steel with 20 gauge frames and 22 gauge blades, with factory primed coated

finish. D. Damper: Integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with removable key operator,

operable from face. E. Design Standard - E.H. Price #535. F. When referred to as heavy-duty type, blades shall be welded in place to be immobile.

Frame shall be 18 gauge and blades shall be 14 gauge. Vertical mullions shall be installed with a maximum spacing of 8 inches O.C. Blades shall be set at 0° and shall be spaced at 3/8” O.C.

G. Design Standard - E.H. Price #90. 2.8 GOOSENECKS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards of

minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel. Prime and paint in field. B. For round ducts over 6” diameter and all rectangular ducts, mount on minimum 12 inch

high curb base.





C. Discharge shall be a minimum of 20" above the roof. D. For round duct 6" diameter and smaller a high cone rubber boot with storm collar above

may be used. E. Provide a 12” high curb with nailer strip for sheet metal flashing cone connection at duct

penetration of roof. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Where the grille relates visually to another component of the building construction, the

grille must be properly centered or spaced to conform with that element of the building. Where grilles occur in the ceiling which is modular such as tile, etc., the grille must be installed to line up with the normal ceiling lines.

C. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to

conform with architectural features, symmetry and lighting arrangement. Control joints in walls and ceilings shall not be intersected by grille, register or diffuser.

D. The sheet metal installer shall hold off on his final length of duct where such adjustments

must be made in the placement of the grille so that the final location will line up with the rest of the building elements.

E. All fixed grilles and registers shall be installed with the blades in the position which will

be most effective in obscuring the duct beyond from view, and where the duct surface remains visible from any normal viewing angle, the internal surfaces of the duct shall be painted dull black with suitable material.

F. Install ductwork to ceiling diffusers with air tight connection. Provide either a rigid elbow at the diffuser throat or a minimum 2” sheet metal collar for flexible duct connection. G. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. H. Verify that ceiling, roof and wall systems are ready for installation I. Install balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, whether or

not dampers are furnished as part of diffuser, grille and register assembly. Refer to Section 233300.

J. Paint visible portion of ductwork behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to

Division 09.





3.2 AIR OUTLET AND INLET SCHEDULE

A. See Schedule on Plans.

3.3 ROOF CURBS

A. Provide wood blocking under curb perimeter as required to level the curb. Refer to plan details for minimum clearance from finished roof surface to curb cap. Adjust blocking height as required to meet those minimums.

B. Provide curbs for goosenecks to the Roofing Contractor for installation.




DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 234000 - HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES Page 1

SECTION 234000 - HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Disposable panel filters. 2. Extended surface high efficiency media filters.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 850 - Commercial and Industrial Air Filter Equipment.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning

Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter.

C. Military Standardization Documents: 1. MIL MIL-STD-282 - Filter Units, Protective Clothing, Gas-Mask Components,

and Related Products: Performance-Test Methods.

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 586 - High-Efficiency. Particulate, Air Filter Units. 2. UL 867 - Electrostatic Air Cleaners. 3. UL 900 - Air Filter Units.


A. Conform to ARI 850 Section 7.4.

B. Dust Spot Efficiency: Plus or minus 5 percent.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate filter assembly and filter frames and dimensions.

C. Product Data: Submit data on filter media, filter performance data and dimensions.






1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS


B. At substantial completion all equipment shall have one set of clean, pre-filters and final filters installed and an additional set stored nearby for the owners first filter change.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Camfil Farr Filters B. Tri-Dem Filters C. Cambridge Filters D. American Air Filters E. Purolator F. Flanders Filters G. Scan Filters 2.2 DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS A. Media: UL 900 Class 2. One (1) inch thick pleated woven cotton, factory sprayed with

flameproof, non-drip, non-volatile adhesive, supported and bonded to cardboard grid and enclosed in a cardboard frame.

B. Rating: 350 FPM face velocity, 0.16 inch WG initial resistance, 0.40 inches WG

recommended final resistance. 20 percent efficiency and MERV-6 rating based on ASHRAE 52.2.

C. Model: 20/20 manufactured by Camfil Farr. D. These units to be used in cabinet unit heaters or similar equipment. 2.3 DISPOSABLE, MEDIUM-EFFICIENCY EXTENDED AREA PANEL FILTERS A. Media: UL 900 Class 2 Pleated, lofted, non-woven, reinforced cotton fabric; supported

and bonded to cardboard grid; enclosed in cardboard frame; 2 inches thick. B. Rating: ASHRAE 52; 25-30 percent dust spot efficiency, 90-92 percent weight

arrestance; maximum 500 FPM face velocity, 0.30 inch WG initial resistance, 0.80 inch




WG recommended final resistance. 30 percent efficiency and MERV-7 based on ASHRAE 52.2.

C. Model: 30-30 manufactured by Camfil Farr with 90 percent efficiency on 4.0 micron and

larger. D. These units to be used in RTU’s as pre-filters. 2.4 DISPOSABLE, HIGH-EFFICIENCY EXTENDED AREA FINAL FILTERS A. Media: UL 900 Class 2, polypropylene media in mini-pleat configuration for higher

strength, supported by and bonded to a 2" deep cardboard frame. B. Rating: ASHRAE 52.2; 60-65percent dust spot efficiency, 90-92 percent weight

arrestance, maximum 250 FPM velocity, 0.15 inch WG initial resistance, 0.75 inch WG recommended final resistance. 65 percent efficiency and MERV-11 based on ASHRAE 52.2.

C. Model: Ultrasolve 60-65manufactured by Camfil Farr. D. These units to be used in RTU’s as final filters.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets to prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters.

B. Do not operate fan system until temporary filters are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with clean set and store the extra sets in location designated by owner.





BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 238103 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

Page 1

SECTION 238103 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Packaged rooftop air conditioning unit. 2. Roof curb.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230923 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: Controls remote

from unit. 2. Section 230993 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls: Sequences of

operation applying to units in this section. 3. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping: Water and Drain piping connections. 4. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories: Flexible connections. 5. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Electrical connection to units.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. 2. ARI 340/360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat

Pump Equipment.

B. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.

C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning

Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. 2. ASHRAE 62 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. 3. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential

Buildings.

D. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

E. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems.




Page 2

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) - Ratio of net cooling capacity (in BTUH) to total rate of electric input (in W/HR) under designated operating conditions with equipment capacity of 65,000 BTUH or greater and three phase electrical power.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data indicating: 1. Cooling and heating capacities. 2. Dimensions. 3. Weights. 4. Optional accessories. 5. Rough-in connections and connection requirements. 6. Duct connections. 7. Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and connection

requirements. 8. Controls and coordination with the Controls Contractor. 9. Accessories and relays.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions.



B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controls installed remotely from units.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data.


A. Cooling Capacity: Rate in accordance with ARI 340/360.

B. Sound Rating: Measure in accordance with ARI 270.

C. Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A.

D. Performance Requirements: Conform to minimum efficiency rating prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when tested in accordance with ARI 340/360 for EER rated equipment.

E. Outside Air Damper Leakage: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.




Page 3



B. Accept units on site. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect units from damage by storing off roof until roof mounting curbs are in place.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs with roof structure, roof deck and roof membrane installation.


A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Maintenance service.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS


B. Furnish one set of pre-filters, fan belts and final filters for each unit.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.

B. Furnish five year manufacturer's warranty for compressors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

A. Manufacturers 1. Daikin 2. Johnson Controls 3. Greenheck 4. Carrier 5. Approved equal manufacturer prior to bidding. 2.2 SUMMARY A. The contractor shall furnish and install package rooftop unit(s) capable of heating,

cooling, filtration, economizer and providing room neutral dehumidified air as shown




Page 4

and scheduled on the contract documents. The unit(s) shall be installed in accordance with this specification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled. The units shall be configured for VAV operation. Refer to equipment schedule for detailed information.

2.3 GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION A. Packaged rooftop(s) furnished and installed shall have: 1. Dehumidification and cooling with hot water heat. 2. Variable Volume (VVU) airflow. Refer to plan schedule for additional details. B. Cooling capacity ratings shall be based on ARI Standards. C. Unit(s) shall consist of insulated weather-tight casing with compressor(s), air-cooled

condenser coil, condenser fans, evaporator coil and: 1. Sub-cooling condenser circuit. 2. Mixed air filters. 3. Supply fan and motor with VFD. 4. Exhaust fan and motor with VFD. 5. Inverter rated compressor for variable capacity control. 6. Intertwined coil if multiple circuits are provided. D. Unit shall be 100 percent factory run tested and fully charged with R-410A refrigerant. E. Unit(s) shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicate caution areas.

F. Units shall be manufactured as dedicated down-flow or horizontal supply as scheduled and detailed on plan. Return air shall be bottom vertical connection.

G. Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and numbered for identification. 2.4 UNIT CASING A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coating with

hinged access panels. Structural members shall be 16 gauge with access doors and panels of minimum 20 gauge.

B. Units cabinet surface shall be tested 500 hours in salt spray test in compliance with

ASTM B117. C. Cabinet construction shall allow for all service/maintenance from one side of the unit. D. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seams exist, it shall be double

hemmed and gasket sealed. E. The base of the unit shall have provisions for forklift and crane lifting.




Page 5

F. The bottom of the unit shall be double wall construction. G. On units 7.5 tons and larger, the entire cabinet shall be double wall constructed. 2.5 AIR FILTERS A. Air Filters: Factory installed filters shall mount integral within the unit and shall be

accessible through access panels. Refer to Specification Section 234000. 2.6 FANS AND MOTORS A. Provide evaporator fan and exhaust fan section with airfoil, single width, single inlet,

centrifugal type fan. B. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanent

lubrication fittings. C. Provide units with direct drive, dynamically balanced supply fans and exhaust fans. A VFD for each fan shall be installed at the factory within the package. 1. Belt Driven fans are also acceptable. D. Outdoor and indoor fan motors shall be permanently lubricated and have internal thermal

overload protection. E. Outdoor fans shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through in

the vertical discharge position. F. Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way,

and protectively coated with lubricating oil. 2.7 HOT WATER HEATING COIL A. Constructed at seamless copper tube mechanically expanded into aluminum fins. B. See Schedule for rows, fins and capacities. C. Furnish coil with vents and drains factory installed. D. Factory leak tested under water. E. Control Valve: Field installed. Refer to Sequence of Operations and Coil Details on Plan for type. F. Freezestat: Field-mounted on discharge side of coil.




Page 6

2.8 EVAPORATOR COIL A. Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper tubing coil. B. Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit. Factory pressure

test at 450 psig and leak tested at 200 psig. C. Provide drain pan for base of evaporator coil constructed of PVC or stainless steel with

external connections. D. The quantity of rows shall be three (3) or greater and as required to meet discharge criteria. The use of less rows must be pre-approved by the Engineer before shop drawing submittal. E. Evaporator coils for multi-compressor, multi-circuit units shall have multi-circuited split-

face arrangement with the bottom coil being the first stage coil for cooling and dehumidification.

F. Drain pan shall be constructed of either PVC or stainless steel and shall be pitched and

shall have a break to direct condensate to drain outlet. 2.9 CONDENSER SECTION A. Provide internally finned 3/8" seamless copper tube mechanically bonded to aluminum

fins. Factory pressure tested to 450 psig. B. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with aluminum blades. Fans shall be

statically balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with integral thermal overload protection in a weather-tight casing.

C. Provide unit with hail guards to protect the coils. 2.10 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM A. Compressor(s): Provide scroll compressor with direct drive operating at 3600 rpm. The

lead compressor on each refrigeration circuit shall be a modulating inverter rated scroll type.

B. Units shall provide scheduled cooling capabilities down to 50°F ambient as standard C. Provide with thermostatic temperature control in the compressor windings, to protect

against excessive conditions. D. Refer to plan schedule for quantity of compressors, staging and modulation requirements.

E. Units shall be configured with modulating and fixed-speed scroll compressors (or Rawal valve controls) as scheduled. Compressors shall be variable-speed design. Digital scroll compressors are not acceptable. Unit shall have one or two refrigeration circuits, factory-




Page 7

supplied and completely piped with liquid line filter drier, suction and liquid Schraeder valves. The lead circuit shall have the variable-capacity compressor (Or Rawal valve controls) with all other compressors being constant-speed. Refer to equipment schedule for more detailed information.

F. Refer to plan schedule for notes relating to number of compressors, number of stages, number of circuits and inverter rated compressors.

2.11 OUTDOOR AIR SECTION A. Dampers and actuators for outside air and return air shall be provided and wired to a

terminal strip for BAS connection and control. B. Gaskets: Provide tight fitting dampers with edge gaskets, maximum leakage 5 percent at

2 inches pressure differential. C. Damper Operator: 24 volt with gear train sealed in oil with spring return. D. BAS Contractor shall modulate dampers as required to maintain minimum outside air positioning or economizer operation per Sequence of Operations. 2.12 ROOF CURBS A. Roof curbs shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Curbs are to be fully gasketed

between the curb top and unit bottom with the curb providing full perimeter support, cross structure support and air seal for the unit.

B. Extra height roof curb shall be provided where noted on plans. C. Unit shall be mounted on a factory furnished acoustical style solid bottom roof curb, fully

lined with 1" of neoprene coated, fiberglass insulation on all four exterior surfaces and the floor . Provide a wood nailer strip for unit fastening.

2.13 AUTOMATION CONTROL INTERFACE

A. The electronic control systems for the rooftop units shall be configured as “DDC Ready” to allow for building automation system (BAS) control of the units. The unit shall be provided pre-wired to allow for BAS control of the following unit functions: a. Return air damper control. b. Outside air damper control. c. DX cooling staging control. d. DX cooling modulating control. e. Supply and exhaust start/stop and speed control. BAS shall control fan speed as

required via factory-supplied variable frequency drives (VFD’s). B. Damper actuators shall be provided within the packaged unit and shall be wired back to

the terminal strip for use by the BAS contractor.




Page 8

C. Supply fans shall be varied by a VFD provided within the unit and a duct-mounted S.P.

sensor that shall be provided and installed by the BAS contractor. D. Exhaust fan(s) shall be varied by a VFD provided within the unit. Control provided by

BAS Contractor. E. Control via the BAS shall be through hard-wired points, not BACnet communication. F. Coordinate unit requirements with BAS contractor. 2.14 ELECTRICAL A. Each unit shall have a 115 volt control circuit transformer 115 volt receptacle, supply air

firestat, control circuit fuse and a single point power connection with circuit breaker. B. The supply and exhaust air fan, compressor and condenser fan motor branch circuits shall

be individually fused. Contactors and inherent thermal overload protection shall be furnished for each compressor and condenser fan motor. The supply and exhaust fan motors shall have contactors and external overload protection. Main control panel shall be of weatherproof construction with a dead-front cover over the main power circuit controls.

C. The electrical panel circuit breaker shall be acceptable as over-current protection. If the

unit being provided is not rated for “Circuit Breaker” protection and requires a fused disconnect, then the manufacturer shall provide the fused disconnect and fuses at no additional cost.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as shown on shop drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Furnish roof curbs to the roofing sub-contractor for installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Roof Curb: 1. Assemble roof curb. 2. Install roof curb on blocking such that the bottom edge of the curb is a maximum

of 3" below the roof surface. The curb shall not be mounted directly on the roof decking.




Page 9

3. Coordinate curb installation and flashing with the Roofing Contractor. 4. Install units on roof curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and

utility services. 5. Install gasket material between unit base and roof curb. 6. All openings for duct, piping and conduits shall be sealed with an acoustical type

sealant. a. Design standard is C.R.L. Norseal #V730 with ¼” thickness by 1-1/2” width.

7. In addition, beneath the units and inside the curb, install a sound isolation barrier of ¾” waterproof plywood or cement board, sealed with acoustical tape to the curb structure, pipe and duct.

8. For units set on new structural steel platform, coordinate spacing of beams such that unit rests directly on beams while spacing for piping, conduits and ductwork is accounted for.

B. Connect units to supply and return ductwork with flexible connections. Refer to Section 233300.

C. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to splash block on roof. Refer to Section 232113.

D. Install components furnished loose for field mounting.

E. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.

F. Install control wiring between unit and field installed accessories.

G. Properly dispose of shipping panels removed from unit during installation of economizer and dampers.

3.4 INSTALLATION - HOT WATER HEATING COIL

A. Make connections to coils with unions or flanges. Verify that unit has adequate chase and piping space for all fittings, insulation and maintenance access.

B. Connect water supply to leaving airside of coil (counter flow arrangement).

C. Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top.

D. Install water coils to allow draining and install drain connection at low points.

E. Install the following piping accessories on hot water piping connections. Refer to Section 232113. 1. On supply:

a. Thermometer well and thermometer. b. Well for control system temperature sensor. c. Shutoff valve. d. Strainer.




Page 10

e. Control valve. f. Pressure gauge.

2. On return: a. Thermometer well and thermometer. b. Well for control system temperature sensor. c. Pressure gauge. d. Shutoff valve. e. Flow control valve.

F. Install valves and piping specialties in accordance with details as indicated on Drawings.

G. Install manual air vents at high points complete with shutoff valve. Refer to Section 232113.

H. Install hot water piping accessories within unit casing or below roof as shown on Plans.

3.5 CLEANING AND FILTERS


B. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet.

C. If use is allowed during construction period, install temporary filters during construction period. Replace with permanent filters at Substantial Completion.

D. After substantial completion inspection and just before turning this equipment over to the Owner, a new set of filters shall be installed and an extra set, for the first filter change by the Owner, shall be stored in the Mechanical Room or closest Custodian space. The filters shall be labeled with the equipment served number for which they are intended.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training.

B. Demonstrate unit operation and maintenance.

3.7 SCHEDULES

A. Refer to Plan Sheet Schedule.




DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 238105 - EQUIPMENT SCREENS Page 1

SECTION 238105 - EQUIPMENT SCREENS (Equipment Supported) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pre-formed thermoplastic panel for enclosing roof top mechanical equipment. 2. Aluminum assembly framing for direct attachment of screening panels to mechanical

equipment; no base or curb required unless shown otherwise on drawings. 3. Aluminum extrusions to permit easy access to mechanical equipment for servicing. B. Products Not Installed or Furnished in This Section: 1. Touch-up painting required for scratches and screw heads. 2. Field painting of prime painted screens. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 236313 - Air Cooled Condensing Units B. Section 238103 - Packaged Roof Top Units 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials: Standard Specifications for 1. ASTM B 221-96 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire

Profiles, and Tubes. B. The Aluminum Association, Inc. 1. AA ADM-1516166 (1994) - Aluminum Design Manual C. American Society of Civil Engineers. 1. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Criteria: 1. Manufacturer is responsible for the structural design of all materials, assembly and

attachments to resist snow, wind, suction and uplift loading at any point without damage or permanent set.

2. Framing shall be designed in accordance with the Aluminum Design Manual to resist the following loading:

a. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers.




1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, specification and other data

sufficient to indicate compliance with these specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layouts heights, component connection details, and details of

interface with adjacent construction. Mark data to indicate: 1. Roof top mechanical equipment to be enclosed. C. Samples: 1. Samples of Materials: Thermoplastic panels. 2. Color Selection: Submit paint chips with full range of colors (minimum of eight)

available for Architect's selection. D. Certification: Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance certifying that thermoplastic panels

supplied meet or exceed requirements specified. E. Closeout Submittals: Warranty documents, issued and executed by manufacturer,

countersigned by Contractor. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of building authorities having

jurisdiction in Project location. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years documented experience producing

systems specified in this section. C. Pre-Installation Meeting: 1. Convene at job site seven (7) calendar days prior to scheduled beginning of

construction activities of this section to review requirements of this section. 2. Require attendance by representatives of the installing subcontractor, (who will

represent the system manufacturer) and other entities directly affecting, or affected by, construction activities of this section.

3. Notify Architect/Engineer four (4) calendar days in advance of scheduled meeting date.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and

packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material. B. Storage and Handling: Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to

prevent damage.




1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take measurements of actual rooftop units and installed curb or rail

heights above roof surface for fit without gaps. Maintain clearances required by equipment manufacturer for proper maintenance access. Indicate measurements on shop drawings fully documenting any field condition that may interfere with the screen system installation.

1.9 COORDINATION A. Installer for work under this Section shall be responsible for coordination of panel and framing

sizes and required options with the Contractor's requirements. 1. Request information on sizes and options required from the Contractor. 2. Coordinate adequate space for enclosed equipment's full access panel door swing. B. Submit shop drawings to the Contractor and obtain written approval of shop drawing from the

Contractor prior to fabrication. 1.10 WARRANTY A. If any part of the rooftop equipment screen fails because of a manufacturing defect within one

year from the date of substantial completion, the manufacturer will furnish without charge the required replacement part(s).

B. This warranty does not cover failure of your rooftop equipment screen if it is damaged by the

Owner, or if the failure is caused by improper installation. PART 2 EXECUTION 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Products: "Envisor Screening System" by CityScapes Inc., 4200 Lymann Ct., Hilliard, OH 43026. 1/877-727-3367. www.cityscapesinc.com

B. Architectural Louvers Co.

C. North American –Spinnaker Enclosures

D. “Nuvue Screen Systems” by Curbs Plus, Inc. www.curbs-plus.com/screens

E. Substitutions: Approved equal manufacturer prior to bidding. 2.2 MATERIALS

A. Thermoformed Plastic Panels: Fabricated from rigid medium impact thermo-formed ABS (Acrylic Butylene Styrene) sheets.

1. Minimum thickness 3/16".

http://www.cityscapesinc.com/

http://www.curbs-plus.com/screens




B. Framing: Aluminum Plate, Shapes and Bar: ASTM B221, alloy 6061-T5 or 6063-T5.

C. Threaded Fasteners: All screws, bolts, nut and washers shall be stainless steel. 1. Corner assembly fasteners shall be #10-16 x stainless steel TEK screws. Length as

required to develop full holding capacity of screw when fastened to Mechanical equipment.

2. Provide lock washer or other locking device at all bolted connections.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Provide factory-formed panel systems with continuous interlocking panel connections and indicated or necessary components: Form all components true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from distortion or defects. Cut panels to precise lengths indicated on approved shop drawings.

1. Panel Style and Height: Vertical with frame and panel height determined by the RTU equipment and curb height. Panels shall be slightly taller than the equipment being screened.

2. Panel Design: Wide Rib.

B. Trim and Closures: Fabricated from 24 gage metal, and finished with the manufacturer's standard coating system, unless shown otherwise on drawings. 1. Provide top trim as indicated: Cove.

C. Framing: Fabricate and assemble components in largest practical sizes, for delivery to the site. 1. Construct corner assemblies to required shape with joints tightly fitted. 2. Supply components required for anchorage of framing. Fabricate anchors and related

components of material and finish as required, or as specifically noted. 3. Adjust framing location to accommodate all equipment access panel swing

requirements and service maintenance requirements, i.e. 36" at electrical panel etc. 2.4 FINISHES A. Aluminum Framing: Mill. B. Panel Coating: Manufacturer's standard coating system, factory-applied.

1. Color: Selected from full range of manufacturer's standard colors by the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Installer's Examination: Examine conditions under which construction activities of this section

are to be performed. 1. Submit written notification to Architect/Engineer and Screen manufacturer if such

conditions are unacceptable. 2. Beginning erection constitutes installer's acceptance of conditions.




3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.

Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide brackets, anchors, and accessories necessary for a complete installation.

B. Fasten structural supports to HVAC curb or units without damaging operation of the unit.

Refer to manufacturer’s installation manual for method being used. 1. Provide corner and mid-span assemblies as required by approved shop drawings so

that the panels are supported uniformly. 2. Fastening bottom rail using bolts to permit ease of access to HVAC units. C. Insert thermoplastic panels into structural supports, except where fixed attachment points are

indicated. Butt thermoplastic panels to adjacent panels for uniform fit. Fasten fixed panels in accordance with the shop drawings.

D. Metal Separation: Where aluminum materials would contact dissimilar materials, insert

rubber grommets at attachment points, thus eliminating where dissimilar metals would otherwise be in contact.

E. Do not cut or abrade finishes which cannot be restored. Return items with such finishes to

shop for required alterations. 3.3 ERECTION HEIGHT AND TOLERANCES A. Panels shall be installed with bottom edge at 24 inches above roof surface and top edge

at same height of the equipment top edge or higher. B. Maximum misalignment from true position: 1/4". C. Where piping, ductwork and conduit penetrates the panel façade, there shall be no gaps visible

in the continuous panel appearance. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove all protective masking from material immediately after installation. B. Protection: 1. Ensure that finishes and structure of installed systems are not damaged by subsequent

construction activities. 2. If minor damage to finishes occurs, repair damage in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations; provide replacement components if repaired finishes are unacceptable to Architect.

C. Prior to Substantial Completion: Remove dust or other foreign matter from component

surfaces; clean finishes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Clean units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. 238200- TERMINAL HEATING UNITS

Page 1

SECTION 238200 - TERMINAL HEATING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Finned Tube Radiation. 2. Cabinet Unit Heaters. 3. Lay-In Hydronic Radiant Heaters.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230700 - HVAC Insulation: Execution requirements for insulation

specified by this section. 2. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping: Execution requirements for connection of

chilled water, hot water, and drain piping to units specified by this section. 3. Section 232116 - Hydronic Piping Specialties: Product requirements for

hydronic piping specialties for placement by this section. 4. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for

electric connection to units specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.

B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.

C. Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers: 1. IBR - Ratings for Heat Output at Terminal Devices.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cross sections of cabinets, grilles, bracing and reinforcing, and typical elevations. Indicate schedules of equipment and enclosures typically indicating length and number of pieces of element and enclosure, corner pieces, end caps, cap strips, access doors, pilaster covers.

C. Product Data: Submit coil and frame configurations, dimensions, materials, rows, connections, and rough-in dimensions. Submit mechanical and electrical service locations, capacities and accessories or optional items.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, and connection requirements.




Page 2



B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and locations of access doors in radiation cabinets required for access to valves.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data and parts listings.



B. Accept units on site in factory packing. Inspect for damage. Store under roof.

C. Protect coil fins from crushing and bending by leaving in shipping cases until installation, and by storing indoors. Protect coils from entry of dirt and debris with pipe caps or plugs.



1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


B. Furnish one extra sets of filters.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FINNED TUBE RADIATION

A. Manufacturers: 1. Sterling 2. Vulcan Radiator 3. Rittling, Inc. 4. Airedale 5. Sigma 6. Approved equal manufacturer prior to bidding. Refer to Division 01.

B. Heating Elements: Seamless copper tubing, mechanically expanded into evenly spaced aluminum fins sized suitable for soldered fittings. Refer to Plan Sheet Schedule for tube and fin sizes. Fin size, fin quantity and tubing size that is scheduled will be the only type accepted in Shop Drawings. No variations allowed without prior approval of the Engineer.




Page 3

C. Element Hangers: Quiet operating, ball bearing cradle type providing unrestricted longitudinal movement, on enclosure brackets.

D. Enclosures: Easily jointed components for wall to wall installation. Support rigidly, on wall or floor mounted brackets. Refer to Plan Sheet Schedule for sheet metal gauge.

E. Access Doors: For otherwise inaccessible valves, furnish factory-made permanently hinged access doors, 6 x 7 inch minimum size, integral with cabinet.

F. Capacity: IBR rating as scheduled, based on 65°F entering air temperature, 160°F average water temperature.

G. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel of color as selected by Architect/Owner. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS - CABINET UNIT HEATERS A. Sterling B. Vulcan Radiator Corp. C. Airtherm D. McQuay E. Dunham Bush F. Modine Manufacturing Co. G. Rittling H. Airedale I. Sigma

J. Approved equal manufacturer prior to bidding. Refer to Division 01. 2.3 CABINET UNIT HEATERS A. Coils: Evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes, rated at 150

pounds of pressure. B. Cabinet: 16 gauge steel with exposed corners and edges rounded, easily removed panels.

Insulation on interior panel with end pockets on both sides of coil. Recessing of units shall be provided by use of an adjustable trim flange. Use of projection panel must have written approval before bid due to lack of flexibility in adjusting depth.

C. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel in a color as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's standard color chart.




Page 4

D. Fans: Centrifugal forward-curved double-width wheels, statically and dynamically balanced, direct driven.

E. Motor: Motors shall be permanent split capacitor. F. Control: Multiple speed and off selector switch, factory mounted and wired, located in

cabinet. G. Provide access doors on both ends as required for coil connection and electrical. Access

doors shall have key-lock or tamper-proof screws. H. Filter: Easily removed throw-away type, located to filter air before coil or motor.

I. Capacity: Based on 60°F entering air temperature, 160°F entering water temperature and a 20° drop.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. For recessed units, verify recess dimensions are correct size.

C. Verify wall construction is ready for installation.

D. Verify concealed blocking and supports are in place and connections are correctly located.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Make connections to units with unions and flanges.

B. On water coils, install shut-off valve on supply piping and lockshield balancing valve on return piping. Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top. Install air vents at high points complete with stop valve. Install water coils to be drainable and install drain connection at low points. Refer to Section 232113.

C. On water/glycol heating coils, connect water supply piping to leaving airside of coil (counter flow arrangement). Refer to Section 232113.

D. Install equipment exposed to finished areas after walls and ceilings are finished and painted. Avoid damage.

E. Protection: Install finished cabinet units with protective covers during remainder of construction.




Page 5

F. Finned Tube Radiation: Locate on outside walls and run cover wall-to-wall unless otherwise indicated. Center elements under windows. Install wall angles where units butt against walls.

G. Cabinet Unit Heaters: Install at locations as indicated on Drawings. Coordinate to assure correct recess size for recessed units.

H. Hydronic Units: Install with shut-off valve on supply piping and lockshield balancing valve on return piping. Where not accessible, extend vent to exterior surface of cabinet for servicing. For cabinet unit heaters and unit heaters, install manual air vents with stop valve. Refer to Section 232113.

3.3 CLEANING AND FILTERS


B. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum clean coils and inside of cabinets.

C. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer.

D. After substantial completion inspection and just before turning this equipment over to the owner, a new set of filters shall be installed and an extra set, for the filter change by the owner, shall be stored in the Mechanical Rom or closest custodial space. The filters shall be labeled with the equipment served number they are intended for.

3.4 SCHEDULES

A. Refer to Plan Sheet Schedules.





Page 6

BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260000 - ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX Page 1

SECTION 260000 - ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX 260500 Basic Electrical Requirements 260501 Temporary Light and Power 260502 Cutting and Patching 260503 Equipment Wiring Systems 260504 Firestopping 260505 Minor Electrical Demolition for Remodeling 260519 Building Wire and Cable 260526 Grounding and Bonding 260529 Supporting Devices 260532 Conduit 260533 Surface Raceways 260534 Boxes 260535 Mounting Heights 260553 Electrical Identification 260923 Digital Lighting Controls 262416 Panelboards 262716 Cabinets and Enclosures 262726 Wiring Devices 262813 Fuses 262819 Enclosed Disconnect Switches 262913 Enclosed Motor Controllers 262916 Enclosed Contactors and Relays 265100 Interior Luminaires – L.E.D.



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260000 - ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX Page 2

265800 Occupancy Sensors END OF SECTION 260000



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Page 1

SECTION 260500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Divisions 26, 27 and 28

Sections, in addition to Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work to be done under this section of the contract includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for the proper completion of all electrical work as shown on the drawings and herein specified. In general, this consists of wiring for power, conduit for public telephone, lighting fixtures, and other special equipment as hereinafter specified, complete with all wiring, conduit, fittings, equipment and connections as specified or required.

B. The omission of express reference to any parts necessary or reasonably incidental to the complete installation shall not be construed as releasing the contractor from furnishing such parts or doing such work.

C. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the electrical installation as shown on the drawings and/or herein specified.

D. The General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions and the General Requirements (Division 01) shall be and are hereby made a part of this section. Also refer to these specifications for temporary service and wiring requirements.

E. The outline of "Scope" items above have been listed solely for the convenience of the Contractor who shall be responsible for all items reasonably required under this classification.

1.3 WORK INCLUDED A. General - All electrical work shown on the drawings and as hereinafter specified in the electrical specifications shall be furnished and installed by this contractor. 1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Scope - This installation shall in every respect conform to the Code of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and all state and local regulations. This, however, shall not be construed as relieving this contractor from complying with any requirements of the drawings and specifications that may be in excess of the rules and not contrary to the same.




B. Permits - This contractor shall obtain and pay for any and all permits, inspection fees, licenses, etc., necessary for the performance of the work included in this contract.

1.5 ALTERNATIVES A. Alternatives quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted Alternatives will be identified in Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required. C. Schedule of Alternatives: See Division 01. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 and/or where noted in specific sections of the Specification. B. Proposed Products List: Include information on products specified in the following

Sections for Engineer’s review, approval and for inclusion in the Owner’s Manuals: 1. 260533 Surface Raceways 2. 260923 Low Voltage Switching 3. 260923 Digital Lighting Controls 4. 262416 Panelboards 5. 262716 Cabinets and Enclosures 6. 262726 Wiring Devices 7. 262813 Fuses 8. 262819 Enclosed Switches 9. 262913 Enclosed Motor Controllers 10. 262916 Enclosed Contactors 11. 265100 Interior Luminaries 12. 265800 Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors 13. 275000 Voice and Data Cabling 14. 275123 Intercom Systems 15. 275313 Clock Systems 16. 281300 Security Access System 17. 281310 Video Entry Access Intercom System 18. 283100 Fire Alarm Systems

C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related

systems, products, and accessories in a single submittals, as well as layout drawings for Divisions 27 and 28. D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.




E. Electronic Submittals: 1. If shop drawings are being submitted electronically they shall be submitted in the same format as described above and shall bear the contractors dated review stamp. 2. All shop drawings shall include a transmittal cover sheet from the contractor that shall be attached to the same shop drawing file so the Engineer or Construction Manager do not have to electronically merge files. If there are multiple

transmittals involved due to construction management or sub-contracting, all of the transmittals shall be attached within the same shop drawing file.

3. Multiple shop drawings in a book format with one transmittal shall not be acceptable as each specification section requires its own transmittal and review

stamp. F. NOTICE: Before release of the shop drawing is acceptable, the Contractor’s stamp, initialed or signed, must be provided certifying their review of the submittal, verification of products, verification of field measurements and field construction criteria, and

coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. If shop drawings are not stamped by the Contractor and marked as "Reviewed", “Approved” or “Approved as Noted”, they may not be

processed by the Engineer. If the Engineer does review them in this instance, the contractor is still responsible for reviewing them and stamping them before release to their supplier. G. It is the contractor’s responsibility to provide submittals that are fully-compliant with the requirements of the construction documents. The engineer will review the equipment submittals for compliance with the requirements of the plans and specifications. After the submittals have been reviewed, they will be marked “Approved”, “Approved as Noted” or “Rejected – Re-Submit”. The engineer will make every effort to identify non- compliant equipment in the submittal process, but the engineer will not be responsible for any costs that may be required to correct non-compliant conditions (up to and including replacement of installed non-compliant equipment with the correct equipment), regardless of the fact that the submittal may be marked “Approved” or “Approved as Noted”. 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Architect/Engineer before proceeding. 1.8 PRE-CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION AND VERIFICATION A. This Contractor shall coordinate his work with other Contractors on this job. Any conflict which cannot be resolved shall be settled by the Architect/Engineer.




B. Field verification of scale dimensions on plans is directed since actual locations, distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. C. The Contractors shall check architectural, structural, plumbing, heating, ventilating and electrical conditions plans to avert possible installation conflicts. Should drastic changes from original plans be necessary to resolve such conflicts this Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer and secure written approval and agreement on necessary adjustments before the installation is started. No extra credits will be allowed due to the Contractor's failure to review and coordinate with all other disciplines. D. Discrepancies shown on different plans or between plans and actual field conditions or between plans and specifications shall promptly be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for a decision. Contractor shall not scale drawings for final locations. All dimensions shall be taken from Architectural Drawings. E. The Contractor shall consider and review the complete set of documents, etc., Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, etc., (Drawings and Specifications) and the existing site conditions as his complete set. He will be responsible for any and all electrical work shown or stated (to be by him), to include this work in his bid and install such items even though they are not specifically shown or stated on the Electrical Sections of the plans and specifications. 1.9 INTERPRETATIONS OF DOCUMENTS A. Contractors shall promptly notify the Engineer of inconsistencies, errors and omissions found in the plans and specifications prior to bid date. B. Questions regarding the bidding and requests for interpretation of the plans and specifications shall be submitted to the Engineer in writing in duplicate in sufficient time to be received prior to the date for receipt of bids. C. Interpretation and correction of the plans and specifications will be made by addendum. Interpretations and corrections made by any other method shall not be binding on the owner or the Engineer. D. The drawings and specifications are complementary to one another. This defines a relationship such that any item which is called for in one document is to be considered called for in both sets of documents. Where conflicts exist between the specifications and/or drawings, the more stringent requirement shall apply. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 01.




1.11 CUTTING AND FIRESTOPPING A. This Electrical Contractor shall set all sleeves in construction for his work. Where

cutting is required, it shall be done by this Contractor. All patching shall be done by the Electrical Contractor. Electrical Contractor shall provide and install firestopping

materials as specified in Division 260504 for electrical penetrations. 1.12 ASBESTOS INSULATION AND/OR LEAD CONTAMINATION A. Where insulation on existing piping or equipment being removed under this contract

contains asbestos products or has lead contamination, the Contractor shall stop all work and notify the Owner/Architect/Engineer and not proceed with any further work until the asbestos has been removed and/or encapsulated by others under a separate contract

between the owner and the asbestos removal company. If lead is encountered, the owner shall have the quantities and hazard identified and will inform the contractor of the necessary steps required to eliminate the hazard.

1.13 OWNER'S MANUALS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Under this contractor the Electrical Contractor shall furnish the owner with two, 3-ring binders of all pertinent systems information and related documents. Submit these

manuals to the Engineer for this review. The Engineer will then return the books to the contractor for distribution to the owner. The books shall contain the following items:

1. Shop drawings on all major equipment. 2. Operating Instructions for all major equipment 3. Maintenance Instructions for all major equipment. 4. Wiring diagrams for all equipment. B. Using the owner's manuals, the electrical contractor shall instruct the owner/owner's representative on the proper operation of all equipment installation as part of this

contract. These instructions shall include, but not be limited to preventive maintenance, safety instructions and normal operating procedures.

C. After the owner has been instructed, the contractor shall submit a letter to the Electrical

Engineer documenting that the information was given to the owner and that he has signed off on this part of the contract.





BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260501 - TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER

Page 1

SECTION 260501 - TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Temporary electrical service. B. Lighting. C. Receptacles. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 01 - Temporary Facilities. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Installation shall conform to OSHA standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING A. Provide minimum one 2600 lumen LED lamp for each 200 square foot of floor area for

general illumination. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Provide 120 volt grounded outlets as required to provide power to all points within reach

of a 50 foot extension cord. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Make arrangements with owner to obtain temporary electric service to the project. B. Temporary service to be installed in accordance with the plans and specifications. 3.2 REMOVAL A. The temporary electrical service shall be removed when the new permanent service has

been installed and energized.



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260501 - TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER

Page 2





SECTION 260502 - CUTTING AND PATCHING Page 1

SECTION 260502 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Individual Product Specification Sections: 1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section. 2. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those

Sections. 3. Limitations on cutting structural members. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. B. Include in request: 1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed work and products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 8. Date and time work will be executed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation.





PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to

damage or movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering existing work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices

and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work. C. Maintain excavations free of water. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill to complete work. B. Fit products together, to integrate with other work. C. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. D. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work. E. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. F. Provide openings in the work for penetration of electrical work. 3.4 PERFORMANCE A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide

appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. B. Employ skilled people to perform cutting and patching for weather exposed and moisture

resistant elements and sight-exposed surfaces. C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without

prior approval. D. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract

Documents.





E. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. F. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely

seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 260504, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

G. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

H. Prepare surfaces ready for paint. END OF SECTION 260502





BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCAITES, INC. SECTION 260503 - EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS Page 1

SECTION 260503 - EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other Sections furnished by

Owner. 1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Division 01 - Administrative Provisions, Summary of Work, Summary of Project, Owner-furnished equipment.

B. Division 22 - Plumbing Equipment - Pumps and Hot Water Heaters.

C. Division 23 - HVAC Equipment.

D. Section 230513 - Motors.

E. Section 260519 - Wire and Cable.

F. Section 260532 - Conduit.

G. Section 260534 - Boxes.

H. Section 281300 - Security Access System.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices.

B. NEMA WD 5 - Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CORDS AND CAPS

A. Leviton.

B. Hubbell.

C. Arrow Hart.




2.2 CORDS AND CAPS A. Straight-blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 1. B. Locking-blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 5.

C. Attachment Plug Configuration: Match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.

D. Cord Construction: Oil-resistant thermoset insulated Type SO multi-conductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for extra hard usage in damp locations.

E. Cord Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment and rating of branch circuit

overcurrent protection.

2.3 SWITCHED FUSESTAT

A. Littlefuse Cat. No. LSSY, Edison-Base fuse holder with single pole 15A, 125V AC switch or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Review equipment submittals prior to installation and electrical rough-in. Verify location, size, and type of connections. Coordinate details of equipment connections with supplier and installer.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Use wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat- producing equipment.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid-tight flexible conduit in damp or wet locations.

C. Install pre-finished cord set where connection with attachment plug is indicated or specified, or use attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps.

D. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord connections to outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.




E. Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of pre-wired equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide interconnecting wiring where indicated.

F. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices such as limit switches and temperature switches as indicated. Connect with conduit and wiring as indicated.





BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260504 - FIRESTOPPING Page 1

SECTION 260504 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Electrical: Divisions 26, 27, 28, 33 (Penetrations). 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM E-814: Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. B. UL 1479: Fire Test of Through-Penetration Firestops. C. UL Building Materials Directory: Through-Penetration Firestops Systems (XHEZ), Fill,

Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW) and Through-Penetration Firestop Devices (XHCR). D. Basic/National Building Code (BOCA). E. Uniform Building Code (ICBO). F. Standard Building Code (SSBCCI). G. NFPS 101 Life Safety Code. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE FIRESTOPPING A. Performance: 1. Materials shall have been tested to provide fire rating equal to that of the

construction. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Firestopping materials and installation shall be subject to the interpretation and

approval of the authority having jurisdiction. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE FOR PLUMBING CAULKING AND SEALING A. S.T.I.

B. Metacaulk C. 3-M

D. Nelson




1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings indicating each condition requiring penetration seals in

dictating proposed UL systems materials, anchorage, methods of installation and actual adjacent construction.

2. Submit a copy of UL illustration of each proposed system indicating manufacturer approved modifications.

3. Submit shop drawing for plumbing caulking and sealing. B. Manufacturer's Data: 1. Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications, storage data, recommendations,

installation instructions and maintenance data for each type of material required. Include letter indicating that each material complies with the requirements of regulatory agencies listed in Article 1.02 of this section of the specification.

2. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets with product delivered to job site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in original unopened containers or bags bearing the name of

the manufacturer, product name, type, grade and U.L. Classification Mark (or other acceptable approval or listing mark) where applicable.

B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum

storage time at job site. C. Storage of products shall comply with manufacturer's requirements for each product. D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in Material

Safety Data sheets as applicable. E. Do not use damaged materials. 1.7 DEFINITIONS A. Fire Rated: Having the ability to withstand the effects of fire for a specified time period

as determined by qualified testing. B. Fire Rated Assembly: A floor, wall or other partition able to withstand a design fire and

hose stream test without failure. C. Fire Resistance Rating: The time, in hours, for which the rated assembly can withstand

the effects of fire without burn-through or structural failure. D. Firestop: A means of sealing openings in fire rated assemblies to preserve or restore the

fire resistance rating.




E. Firestop System: The combination of materials and/or devices, including the penetrating items, required to make up a complete firestop.

F. Penetrating Item: Pipe penetrations duct, penetrations or other mechanical elements

passing through an opening in a fire rated assembly. 1.8 GUARANTEE A. Submit copies of written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers which fail in

joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance or general durability or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer's data as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated. The guarantee period shall be one (1) year from date of substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Firestopping material shall be asbestos free, having code approvals as listed in Article

1.02 of this specification. B. Firestopping material shall have a flame spread of 25 or less. C. Fire Resistance and Hose Stream Tests: 1. Firestopping materials shall be rated "F" and "T" in accordance with ASTM

E814 or UL 1479. 2. Firestopping materials shall be classified by UL to provide fire barrier equal to

time rating of construction to be penetrated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Firestopping requirements will be created by other subcontractors under related sections

of the project specification. Contractor shall: 1. Identify all locations requiring firestopping. 2. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of duct, piping, electrical

runs, but prior to covering or concealing of openings or eliminating access thereto.

3.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct

unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.




2. Proceed with installation only after penetrations of the substrate and supporting brackets have been installed.

B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Furnish adequate ventilation if using solvent. 2. Furnish forced air ventilation during installation if required by manufacturer. 3. Keep flammable materials away from sparks or flame. 4. Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces

for firestopping materials. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to be in contact with penetration seal materials, of dirt, grease, oil, loose

materials, rust or other substances that may affect proper fitting, adhesion or the required fire resistance.

3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install firestopping materials in all openings in fire rated construction to comply with the

fire rating of the construction. B. Install firestopping materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL building

Materials Directory and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Seal holes or voids may be penetrations to ensure an effective barrier. D. Where floor openings without penetrating items are more than four (4") in width and

subject to traffic or loading, install firestopping materials capable of supporting same loading as floor.

E. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subject to traffic. F. Follow manufacturer's written instructions to obtain a smooth, professional finish to

surrounding surfaces. G. Remove any temporary materials used during installation of firestopping materials. 3.5 REPAIRS AND MODIFICATIONS A. Identify damages or re-entered seals requiring repair or modification. B. Remove loose or damaged materials. C. If penetrating elements are to be added, remove enough material to insert being careful

not to cause damage to the balance of the seal. D. Insure that surfaces to be sealed are clean and dry.




E. Provide firestopping materials and installation identical to original manufacturer for repair of original seal.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examine penetration seals for proper installation, adhesion and curing as appropriate for

the respective seal materials. B. Keep areas of work accessible and notify code authorities or designated work released for

inspection. C. Document completion and inspection. D. Perform under with section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or

penetration by other trades. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean up spills of liquid components.

B. Neatly cut and trim materials as required.

C. Remove equipment, materials and debris leaving area in undamaged, clean condition. END OF SECTION 260504




BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260505 - MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

Page 1

SECTION 260505 - MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Electrical demolition.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 01 - Alteration Project Procedures. B. Division 02 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual

Sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record

documents. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation.

D. Prior to cutting any structural members, verify with the Architect. See general section of

the specification. E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company.




Page 2

C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations.

D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner and local fire service at least 24 hours

before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

F. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to

make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner and Telephone Utility Company at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

G. Existing Security System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify the Owner and at least 24 hours before

partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Divisions 01 and 02

and this Section. B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed. F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.




Page 3

H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories.

I. This contractor shall dispose of all lamps, ballasts, fixtures and miscellaneous electrical equipment removed as part of this project.

J. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

K. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify

installation or provide access panel as appropriate. L. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing

electrical installations, or as specified. M. The Electrical Contractor is to reconnect any existing circuits interrupted by demolition

as required to maintain power, control and/or communications. 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections.

Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

C. Luminaires: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all

exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace burnt out lamps, bad ballasts and broken electrical parts.

3.5 INSTALLATION A. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Division 01. END OF SECTION 260505




Page 4

BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260519 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE Page 1

SECTION 260519 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building wire and cable. B. Metal clad cable. C. Fire alarm cable. D. Wiring connectors and connections. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 260532 - Conduit. B. Section 260534 - Boxes. C. Section 260553 - Identification. 1. 3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type. C. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section

with minimum three years experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to authority having

jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.




1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Conductor sizes are based on copper unless indicated as aluminum or "AL". C. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. D. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Division 1. B. Determine required separation between cable and other work. C. Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 or 300 volts. D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THW, TW, or THHN/THWN. 2.2 METAL CLAD CABLE

A. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type MC. B. Conductor: Copper.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C. E. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic. F. Armor Material: Steel or Aluminum. G. Armor Design: Corrugated tube or Smooth tube.




H. Jacket: In locations specified in Article 3.03 WIRING METHODS. I. For light fixture whips above accessible ceilings only. 2.3 FIRE ALARM CABLE A. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type FPLP. Power Limited Fire Protective Signaling

Circuit Cable Plenum Rated. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation: Premium grade color coded PVC. D. Jacket: Red Jacket. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3.3 WIRING METHODS A. All building wire to be THHN/THWN unless noted otherwise. B. MC cable may only be used for fixture whips above accessible suspended ceilings. C. Use wiring methods indicated on Drawings. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. C. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. D. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. E. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits.




F. Use 12 AWG conductors for 20A, 120V branch circuits less than 45 feet. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20A, 120V branch circuits less than 70 feet. For 20A, 120V branch circuits greater than 70 feet, conductors shall be sized as required by N.E.C. for voltage drop compensation.

G. Use 12 AWG conductors for 20A, 277V branch circuits less than 105 feet. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20A, 277V branch circuits less than 165 feet. For 20A, 277V branch circuits greater than 165 feet, conductors shall be sized as required by N.E.C. for voltage drop compensation. H. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. I. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. J. Protect exposed cable from damage. K. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. L. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. M. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. N. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.

O. Use suitable reducing connectors or mechanical connector adaptors for connecting

aluminum conductors to copper conductors. P. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape un-insulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. Q. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. R. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. 3.5 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE (LOW VOLTAGE)

A. Concealed Interior Locations: In raceways.

B. Exposed Interior Locations: In raceways.

C. Above Accessible Ceilings: In cable tray or supports per code.

D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: In raceway.




E. Exterior Locations: In raceways.

F. Underground Locations: In raceways. 3.6 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 260553. B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on

Drawings. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing as specified. B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. C. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with

manufacturer's recommended values. D. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor. END OF SECTION 260519




BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING Page 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Division 26 Section 260500 - Basic Electrical Requirements shall apply to work

specified in this section.

C. Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding and bonding work specified elsewhere in these specifications.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes: 1. Grounding of electrical systems and equipment and basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits and systems. 2. Building Ground Rings (counterpoise systems). B. Provide grounding of the entire electrical installation as shown on the Drawings and

specified herein, and in accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC).

C. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other Sections

of these Specifications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for grounding rods, connectors and connection materials and grounding

fittings.

C. Field tests and observation reports certified by the testing organization and indicating and interpreting the test reports for compliance with performance requirements.

D. Manufacturer's instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation

and installation of exothermic connectors.




1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7

or a member company of national Electrical Testing Association (NETA) and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with UL 467. C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. D. Comply with NECA's "Standard of Installation." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Governing Requirements: Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in

excess of National Electrical Code (NEC) requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern.

B. Wire and Cable Grounding Conductors: 1. Conform to NEC Table 8, except as otherwise indicated, for conductor properties,

including stranding. 2. Use only copper wire for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct

contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone and similar materials. 3. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green color insulation. 4. Grounding-Electrode Conductors: Bare stranded copper. 5. Underground Conductors: Bare, Tinned, Stranded, except as otherwise indicated. 6. Bare Copper Conductors: Conform to the following: a. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3. b. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8. c. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B33. 7. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows: a. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor,

1/4" in diameter. b. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG stranded copper conductor. c. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors,

terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8" wide and 1/16" thick. d. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braded copper conductors,

terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8" wide and 1/16" thick. 8. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed-copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators. 9. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided No. 30 AWG bare copper wire,

terminated with copper ferrules.




10. Bonding Straps: Soft copper, 0.05 inch thick and 2 inches wide, except as indicated.

C. Connector Products

1. Products shall be listed and labeled as grounding connectors for the materials used. No aluminum materials shall be utilized within 18" of the earth where used for the purpose of grounding.

2. Compression connectors shall be type CRA. 3. Mechanical connectors shall be type SLUH. 4. Provide exothermic welding system for use in making electrical grounding

connections of copper-to-copper or copper-to-steel. Exothermically welded connections are required on all grounding electrode conductors, all connections to building steel, (connections to structural member), all grounding conductors run under the earth, connection to ground rods and in any case where grounding conductors are subject to a hostile environment. a. The exothermic welding system furnished under these specifications shall

meet the applicable requirements of IEEE-80, Chapter 9, Section of conductors and joints.

b. Molds shall be made from graphite or other material that is so designed to provide an average life of not less than 50 exothermic welds under normal conditions. Molds shall bear permanent marking, indicating the name of the manufacturer, the mold model, the type and size of welding mixture compatible with the welding process, and the size of the conductor. Instructions detailing general safety information, and welding procedures shall be provided with each mold.

c. Starting material, if used, shall consist of aluminum and copper/copper oxide and iron oxides. It shall not contain phosphorous or any caustic, toxic or explosive substance. Weld metal used for grounding connections shall contain copper oxide, aluminum. Where welding is done in enclosed structures, the Erico Exolon smokeless system shall be used.

D. Grounding Electrodes and Test Wells

1. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel, Size: 3/4" by 10'. 2. Test wells shall be T416C as manufactured by Erico. Where multiple connections

are made, an Erico bus bar system, compression connectors and ground inspection well Type T416A shall be used.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examination areas and conditions under which electrical grounding and bonding connections are to be made and notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.




3.2 APPLICATION

A. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.

B. Exothermic-Welded Connections only: Shall be used for connections to structural steel, ground rods, signal reference grid, counterpoise conductors and for all underground connections, except those at test wells.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use Ilsco Type CRA compression

connectors.

D. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Bury at least 30" below grade or bury 12" above duct bank when installed as part of the duct bank.

E. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NEC Article 250 for types, sizes and

quantities of equipment grounding conductors, except where specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NEC are indicated. 1. Install equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the items below

in addition to those required by Code: a. Feeders and branch circuits. b. Lighting circuits. c. Receptacle circuits. d. Single-phase motor or appliance branch circuits. e. Three-phase motor or appliance branch circuits. f. Flexible raceway runs. g. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 2. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-

mounted electrical devices operating at 120V and above, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.

3. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing and Anti-Frost Heater Circuits: Install a separate equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater, heat tracing assembly, and anti-frost heating cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

4. Separately Derived Systems: Where NEC requires grounding, ground according to NEC Paragraph 250-30.

F. Connections to Lightning Protection System: Bond grounding conductors, including

grounding-conductor conduits to lightning protection down conductors or lightning protection grounding conductors in compliance with NFPA 780.

G. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Bond electric power

system, grounding electrode system directly to lightning protection system earth connection at closest point to electric service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding conductor and install in conduit.




3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Ground electrical systems and equipment according to NEC requirements, except where Drawings or Specifications exceed NEC requirements.

B. Ground Rods for Service Entrance Earth Connection: Install at least three rods spaced at

least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes. 1. Drive ground rods until tops are 6" below finished floor or final grade, unless

otherwise indicated. 2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding-electrode conductors. Use exothermic

welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating.

3. Where soil conditions make driving ground rods impossible, a 6" hole shall be augured into the earth and filled with Erico Gem after the ground rod connection is made, or a trench no less than 24" deep shall be utilized for horizontal placement of the rod and backfilled with Erico Gem.

C. Grounding Conductors: Route along the shortest and straightest paths possible, unless

otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration

isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.

E. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, sized as

indicated, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding-clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Do not install a grounding jumper across dielectric fittings. Bond grounding-conductor conduit to conductor at each end.

F. Water Meter Piping: Use braded-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with grounding-clamp connectors.

G. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding straps.

H. Bond each above ground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff

valve.




3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and

mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers

and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent

future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. B. Exothermic-Welded (CADWELD) Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells. Comply with manufacturers written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. C. Equipment Grounding-Wire Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs, SLUH type, No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.

D. Non-contact Metal Raceway Terminations: Where metallic raceways terminate at metal

housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bon electrically non-continuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, except as otherwise indicated.

E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according

to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where these requirements are not available, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

F. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct

circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by manufacturer of connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.

G. Moisture Protection: Where insulated grounding conductors are connected to grounding

rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.





A. Tests: Subject the completed grounding system to a megger test at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests by the 2-point method according to IEEE81.

B. Excessive Ground Resistance: Where resistance to ground exceeds specified values,

notify owner promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance and to accomplish recommended work.





BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCAITES, INC. SECTION 260529 - SUPPORTING DEVICES Page 1

SECTION 260529 - SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA - National Contractors Association. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and

starting of Product. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for

purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide materials, sizes and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use pre-cast insert system, expansion anchors,

powder actuated anchors and preset inserts.



DOLEJS ASSOCAITES, INC. SECTION 260529 - SUPPORTING DEVICES Page 2

2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, spring steel clips, steel ramset fasteners and welded fasteners.

3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and

hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of

Installation". C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. E. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors. F. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use

hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. I. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one

inch off wall. J. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards

recessed in hollow partitions. END OF SECTION 260529



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260532 - CONDUIT Page1

SECTION 260532 - CONDUIT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Metal conduit. B. Flexible metal conduit. C. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. D. Electrical metallic tubing. E. Nonmetal conduit. F. Electrical nonmetallic tubing. G. Flexible nonmetallic conduit. H. Fittings and conduit bodies.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 01 - Fire Stopping. B. Division 01 - Roofing Penetrations. C. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding.

D. Section 260529 - Supporting Devices. E. Section 260534 - Boxes.

F. Section 260553 - Electrical Identification.

G. Section 283100 - Fire Alarm System.

1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. C. ANSI C80.5 - Rigid Aluminum Conduit. D. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and

Cable Assemblies.



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260532 - CONDUIT Page 2

E. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. NECA "Standard of Installation." G. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel

Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. H. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80). I. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of Division 01. B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide

appropriate covering. D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

Route as required to complete wiring system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Size: 1. Minimum - 1/2 inch unless otherwise specified. 2. Homerun - 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified. 3. As per N.E.C.




B. Underground Installations: 1. Use Thickwall Non-metallic conduit 2. From underground to above grade in exposed locations use rigid steel conduit. 3. In or under slab use non-metallic conduit. 4. Minimum size - 3/4 inch. 5. Any conduit which rises up through a slab to be rigid steel conduit. 6. For floor boxes minimum of 1-1/4”. C. Outdoor Locations: 1. Not exposed to damage: Use thickwall non-metallic tubing. 2. Exposed to damage: Use rigid steel conduit. D. Motor, Appliance and Equipment Connections: 1. Dry locations: Use flexible metal conduit. 2. Wet and damp locations: Use liquid-tight flexible metal conduit or flexible non-

metallic conduit. E. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel and thickwall non-metallic conduit. F. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing. G. Connectors and Fittings 1. Where EMT conduit is exposed to moisture, couplings and connectors shall be the

rain-tight steel compression type equal to Thomas and Betts Series 5120 couplings, Series 5121 connectors in sizes 1 inch and smaller and Series 5123 insulated throat connectors in sizes larger than 1 inch. Couplings and connectors for EMT conduit in concrete or in dry locations shall be the concrete tight steel set-screw type equal to Thomas and Betts Series 5030 couplings. Series 5051 connectors in sizes 1 inch and smaller and Series 5031 insulated throat connectors in sizes larger than 1 inch.

2. No "indenters" type fittings or white metal "die cast" fittings shall be used. 3. Couplings for rigid conduit shall be the rigid threaded type. Where rigid conduit is

exposed to moisture, connections and enclosures shall be made with liquid tight steel or iron hub fittings with insulated throats equal to Thomas and Betts Series 370. Rigid conduit connectors at outlet boxes in concrete or in dry locations shall be the concrete tight setscrew type with insulated throats equal to Thomas and Betts Series 8125. Rigid conduit connections at cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes or auxiliary gutters in dry locations shall be made with locknuts equal to Thomas and Betts. Series 222 shall be provided on the ends of the conduit inside enclosures for conductor protection.

4. Connectors for liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be equal to Thomas and Betts Series 5332, or 5352 or 5362 with insulated throats. Do not couple liquid-tight flexible steel conduit to liquid-tight flexible steel conduit.

5. Connectors for flexible steel conduit shall be the angled wedge "Tight-Bite" equal to Thomas and Betts Series 302 and 323 sizes 1 inch and smaller and Series 3112 and 3132 in sizes larger than 1 inch.




PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers,

clevis hangers, and split hangers. E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel;

provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits. F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of

Section 260529. G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for

temporary supports. H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.

I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. M. Do not cross conduits in slab. N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. O. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104°F. P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends. Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe non-metallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.




S. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes. T. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. V. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses control and expansion joints. W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 260526 Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 260553.

3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using

materials and methods under the provisions of Division 01 B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof

jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation. END OF SECTION 260532




BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260533 - SURFACE RACEWAYS

Page 1

SECTION 260533 - SURFACE RACEWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Surface non-metal raceways B. Multi-outlet assemblies. C. Wireways.

1.2 REFERENCES A. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles. B. Section 265100 - Interior Luminaires. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, knockout sizes and locations, materials, fabrication

details, finishes, and accessories. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. B. Maintain one copy of document on site. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section

with minimum three years experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for

purpose specified and shown.




Page 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SURFACE NON-METAL RACEWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Wiremold 2. Walker 3. Hubbell 4. Panduit 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. B. Description: Plastic channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface raceway. C. Size: As required. D. Finish: Match device colors. E. Fittings, Boxes and Extension Rings: Furnish manufacturer’s standard accessories. 2.2 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLY A. Manufacturers 1. Panduit 2. Walker 3. Hubbell 4. Wiremold 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. B. Multi-Outlet Assembly: Non-metallic channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as multi-

outlet, multi-channel assembly. C. Size: Panduit T-70 Raceway. As indicated on drawings. D. Receptacles: Provide covers and accessories to accept (convenience) receptacles

specified in Section 262726. E. Receptacle Spacing: As indicated. F. Receptacle Color: As specified in Section 262726. G. Channel Finish: Match device color. H. Fittings: Furnish manufacturer’s standard couplings, elbows and connectors.




Page 3

2.3 WIREWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman 2. Keystone/Rees 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. B. Description: General purpose type wireway. C. Knockouts: Manufacturer’s standard. D. Size: As indicated on drawings. E. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray enamel finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces. Mount

plumb and level. Adhesive backing is not acceptable for anchoring. C. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. D. Wireway Supports: Provide steel channel as specified in Section 260529. E. Close ends of wireway and unused conduit openings. F. Ground and bond raceway and wireway under provisions of Section 260526. G. This system to be used in all finished areas where wiring cannot be concealed. END OF SECTION 260533




Page 4

BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260534 - BOXES Page 1

SECTION 260534 - BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.

B. Floor boxes.

C. Pull and junction boxes. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260504 - Firestopping.

B. Division 08 - Access Doors. C. Section 262716 - Cabinets and Enclosures.

D. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates in finished areas, floor box service

fittings. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA - Standard of Installation.

B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.

C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.

D. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.

E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Division 01 - Contract Closeout, Operation and Maintenance Data, Submittals for Project closeout.

B. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull and junction boxes on

project record documents.




1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment

supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.

B. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

C. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box

manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.

D. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 262726. 2.2 FLOOR BOXES

A. Multi-Service type steel recessed floor box. Fully adjustable with tunnel. 1. Capacity: 4 devices 2. Configuration: (2) duplex receptacles and (2) blank receptacle plates for tele/data

jacks. Tele/Data jacks are by owner’s data/voice contractor. 3. Material: Formed steel. 4. Cover:

a. Carpet installations: Flush die-cast aluminum flanged trim ring with brushed aluminum finish with carpet insert.

b. Tile, terrazzo or wood floor installations: Flush die-cast aluminum flangeless trim with brushed aluminum finish without cutouts.

5. Walkerbox Cat. No. RFB4 or Shallow RFB4-SS or equal. 2.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

B. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 26 27 16.




C. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Cast aluminum. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover

screws.

D. In-grade enclosures shall be COMPOSOLITE as manufactured by Quazite or approved equal.

1. Boxes and covers shall be concrete gray and sustain a minimum vertical test load of 12,000# over a 10" square.

2. All covers will have a minimum coefficient friction of .50. 3. Plastic and fiberglass boxes will not be accepted. 4. Boxes shall be stackable for extra depth. 5. Boxes shall have no bottoms. 6. Size as required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets prior to rough-in. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."

B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.

C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on

drawings and specified in Section 260535.

D. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location if required to accommodate intended purpose.

E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 262726.

F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.

G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas

only.

H. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.




I. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 260504.

J. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches,

and backsplashes.

K. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. L. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.

M. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.

N. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner

only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

O. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.

P. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to

allow for surface finish thickness.

Q. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.

R. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.

S. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

T. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.

U. Support boxes independently of conduit.

V. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.

W. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.

X. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.

Y. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable

for other installations.

Z. Set floor boxes level.

AA. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box in other locations.





A. Coordinate installation of outlet box for equipment connected under Section 260503.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Division 01 - Contract Closeout; Division 01- Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Adjusting installed work.

B. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material.

C. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. D. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Division 01 - Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work.

B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris and other material.

C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. END OF SECTION 260534




BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260535 - MOUNTING HEIGHTS Page 1

SECTION 260535 - MOUNTING HEIGHTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mounting heights of electrical equipment. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260534 - Boxes B. Section 262416 - Panelboards C. Section 262716 - Cabinets and Enclosures D. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices E. Section 262819 - Disconnect Switches F. Section 270533 - Television, Data and Telephone Distribution System G. Section 275123 - Central Sound Intercom and Bell System H. Section 283100 - Fire Alarm Devices

1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify location of floor boxes and outlets prior to rough-in. B. Electrical boxes are shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

Install at location required for box to serve intended purpose. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. All dimensions indicated hereafter and on plan are from above finished floor (AFF) to

centerline of outlet unless noted otherwise. B. Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for wall switches, fire alarm pull stations and

other similar devises with each other. C. Align outlets for receptacles, data/video, telephone and fire alarm devices vertically to

provide neat appearance.



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260535 - MOUNTING HEIGHTS Page 2

D. Mounting heights indicated herein after are for typical mounting height. Specific mounting height may be required. These heights are to be as indicated on plan.

E. Refer to Architectural plans for additional information in regards to outlet alignment. F. Mounting heights for miscellaneous devices outlets to be as follows: 1. Receptacles - 18" AFF. 2. Desk Telephone/Intercom - 18" AFF. 3. Data/Video - 18" AFF. 4. Misc. devices at counters, benches or hydronic radiation - 4" above backsplash,

unless noted otherwise. 5. Wall switches - 46" AFF. 6. Wall telephone/intercom and thermostats - 52" AFF. 7. Exit signs (back mounted) - Bottom of exit sign to be 4" above top of door frame.

If ceiling height does not allow this, sign to be centered between door frame and finished ceiling.

8. Floor Proximity Exit Signs - Bottom of the sign shall be at least 6" but not more than 8" above the floor, with the nearest edge of the sign within 4" of the door frame.

9. Clocks to be mounted at heights as indicated on plan. 10. Emergency Battery Units - Approximately 96" AFF. Verify exact mounting

heights with Architect, unless otherwise noted on plan. G. Mounting heights to outlet center of fire alarm devices to be as follows: 1. Manual Pull Stations - 46" AFF 2. Horn/Strobe Units - unless noted otherwise, 80" AFF or 6” below the ceiling,

whichever is lower, this is to the strobe light and not the center of the box. 3. Strobe Only Units - unless noted otherwise, 80" AFF or 6” below the ceiling,

whichever is lower, this is to the strobe light and not the center of the box. 4. Door Hold Open Units - 78" AFF or as required H. Mounting Height of Receptacles and Communication devices to be coordinated with mechanical equipment and built-in furniture on Architectural Plans. I. Panelboards and Disconnect Switches - 6 feet to top of back box. J. Cabinets and Enclosure - As indicated on plan. K. Fire Alarm Panel - Five (5) feet to top of back box. END OF SECTION 260535



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260553 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

Page 1

SECTION 260553 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Nameplates. B. Wire and cable markers. C. Conduit color coding.

1.2 RELATED WORK A. Division 09 - Painting. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division 01. B. Include schedule for nameplates. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on a black background. B. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, split sleeve or tubing type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. De-grease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and tape labels. B. Install nameplates and tape labels parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, rivets, or adhesive. Secure

nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. D. Provide custom engraved wall plates for wall switches and outlets as indicated on plan.



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 260553 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

Page 2

3.2 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each control conductor with control wire number as indicated on

equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring. 3.3 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment, and loads

served. Letter Height: 1/8 inch for individual switches and loads served, 1/4 inch for distribution and control equipment identification.

B. Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled below. C. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers: 1/4 inch; identify equipment

designation. 1/8 inch; identify voltage rating and source. D. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters in Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: 1/8 inch; identify circuit and load served, including location. E. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 1/8 inch; identify load served. F. Transformers: 1/4 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify primary and secondary voltages, primary source, and secondary load and location.

G. Variable Frequency Controllers: 1/4 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch;

identify source and load served. 3.4 HIGH VOLTAGE SIGNAGE A. Provide high voltage signs and labels on electrical system components and building doors

and access as required by N.E.C. END OF SECTION 260553




SECTION 260923 - DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 1

SECTION 260923 - DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. NA

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The lighting control system specified in this section shall provide time-based, sensor-based (both occupancy and daylight), and manual lighting control.

B. The system shall be capable of turning lighting loads on/off as well as dimming lights (if

lighting load is capable of being dimmed).

C. The system architecture shall be capable of enabling stand-alone groups (rooms) of devices to function.

D. For networked systems, the system architecture shall facilitate remote operation via a computer connection.

E. Refer to Sequence of Operation notes and fixture schedule on the plans. Some rooms are only “zoned” controlled, some are “networked” controlled and others are a combination of both zoned and networked controlled.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NA

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Datasheets (general device descriptions, dimensions, wiring details, nomenclature).

B. Riser Diagrams – typical per room type (detailed drawings showing device

interconnectivity of devices).

C. Other Diagrams – as needed for special operation or interaction with other system(s).

D. Example Contractor Startup/Commissioning Worksheet – must be completed prior to factory start-up.

E. Hardware and Software Operation Manuals.

F. Other operational descriptions as needed.






A. All steps in sensor manufacturing process shall occur in the USA; including population of all electronic components on circuit boards, soldering, programming, wiring and housing.

B. All components and the manufacturing facility where product was manufactured must be ROHS compliant.

C. In high humidity or cold environments, the sensors shall be conformably coated and rated for condensing humidity and -40 degree Fahrenheit (and Celsius) operation.

D. All applicable products must be UL/CUL Listed or other acceptable national testing organization.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate lighting control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible components. B. Coordinate lighting controls with BAS (if necessary) either through IP based intercommunication of system or hardwired auxiliary relay outputs. C. The installing contractor shall be responsible for a complete and functional system in accordance with all applicable local and national codes.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. All devices in lighting control system shall have a 5 year warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. This specification is based on the nLight® Platform Control System from Sensor Switch.

2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. System shall have an architecture that is based upon three main concepts; 1) intelligent lighting control devices 2) standalone lighting control zones 3) network backbone for remote or time based operation.

B. Intelligent lighting control devices shall consist of one or more basic lighting control components; occupancy sensors, photocell sensors, relays, dimming outputs, manual switch stations, and manual dimming stations. Combining one or more of these components into a single device enclosure should be permissible so as to minimize overall device count of system.

C. Where noted nLight enabled light fixtures, the system must interface directly with intelligent LED luminaires such that only CAT-5 cabling is required to interconnect





luminaires with control components such as sensors and switches (see Networked LED Luminaire section)

D. Intelligent lighting control devices shall communicate digitally, require <4 mA of current to function (Graphic wall stations excluded), and posses RJ-45 style connectors.

E. Lighting control zones shall consist of one or more intelligent lighting control components, be capable of stand-alone operation, and be capable of being connected to a higher level network backbone.

F. nLight enabled light fixtures or devices within a lighting control zone shall be connected with CAT-5e low voltage cabling in any order.

G. Lighting control zone shall be capable of automatically configuring itself for default operation without any start-up labor required.

H. Individual lighting zones must continue to provide a user defined default level of lighting control in the event of a system communication failure with the backbone network or the management software becoming unavailable.

I. Power for devices within a lighting control zone shall come from either resident devices already present for switching (relay device) or dimming purposes, or from the network backbone. Standalone “bus power supplies” shall not be required in all cases.

J. All switching and dimming for a specific lighting zone shall take place within the devices located in the zone itself (i.e. not in a remotely located devices such as panels) to facilitate system robustness and minimize wiring requirements. Specific applications that require centralized or remote switching shall be capable of being accommodated.

K. When noted as “networked” control, the system shall have one or more primary wall mounted network control “gateway” devices that are capable of accessing and controlling connected system devices and linking into an Ethernet LAN.

L. When noted as “networked” control, the system shall use “bridge” devices that route communication and distribute power for up to 8 directly connected lighting zones together for purposes of decreasing system wiring requirements.

M. When noted as “networked” control, the system shall have a web-based software management program that enables remote system control, status monitoring, and creation of lighting control profiles.

N. Devices located in different lighting zones shall be able to communicate occupancy, photocell, and switch information via the wired backbone.

O. When noted as “networked” control, the system shall be capable of operating a lighting control zone according to several sequences of operation. System shall be able to change a spaces sequence of operation according to a time schedule so as to enable customized time-of-day, day-of-week utilization of a space. Note operating modes should be utilized only in manners consistent with local energy codes. See Sequence of Operation notes on plans. Examples of controls:

1. Auto-On / Auto-Off (via occupancy sensors) • Zones with occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on when occupant is

detected.





• Zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights off when vacancy or sufficient daylight is detected.

• Pressing a switch will turn lights off. The lights will remain off regardless of occupancy until switch is pressed again, restoring the sensor to Automatic On functionality.

2. Manual-On / Auto-Off (also called Semi-Automatic) • Pushing a switch will turn lights on. • Zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights off when vacancy or

sufficient daylight is detected. 3. Manual-On to Auto-On/Auto-Off

• Pushing a switch will turn lights on. • After initial lights on, zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights

on/off according to occupancy/vacancy and/or daylight conditions. • Sequence can be reset via scheduled (ex. daily each morning) events

4. Auto-to-Override On • Zones with occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on when occupant is

detected. • Zone lighting then goes into an override on state for a set amount of time or until

the next time event returns the lighting to an auto-off style of control. • Sequence can be reset via scheduled (ex. daily each morning) events

5. Manual-to-Override On • Pushing a switch will turn lights on. • Zone lighting then goes into an override on state for a set amount of time or until

the next time event returns the lighting to an auto-off style of control. • Sequence can be reset via scheduled (ex. daily each morning) events

6. Auto On / Predictive Off • Zones with occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on when occupant is

detected. • Zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights off when vacancy or

sufficient daylight is detected. • If switch is pressed, lights turn off and a short “exit timer” begins. After timer

expires, sensor scans the room to detect whether occupant is still present. If no occupancy is detected, zone returns to auto-on. If occupancy is detected, lights must be turned on via the switch.

P. When noted as “networked” control, a taskbar style desktop application shall be available for personal lighting control.

Q. When noted as “networked” control, an application that runs on “smart” handheld devices (such as an Apple® IPhone®) shall be available for personal lighting control.

R. When noted as “networked” control, the control software shall enable logging of system performance data and presenting useful information in a web-based graphical format and downloadable to .CSV files.

S. When noted as “networked” control, the control software shall enable integration with a BMS via BACnet IP.

T. System shall provide the option of having pre-terminated plenum rated CAT-5 cabling supplied with hardware.





2.3 INDIVIDUAL DEVICE SPECIFICATIONS

A. Control Module (Gateway) – Networked Systems Only

1. Control module shall be a device that facilitates communication and time-based control of downstream network devices and linking into an Ethernet. 2. Devices shall have a user interface that is capable of wall mounting, powered by low voltage and have a touch screen. 3. Control device shall have three RJ-45 ports for connection to other backbone devices (bridges) or directly to lighting control devices. 4. Device shall automatically detect all devices downstream of it. 5. Device shall have a standard and astronomical internal time clock. 6. Device shall have one RJ-45 10/100 BaseT Ethernet connection. 7. Device shall have a USB port 8. Each control gateway device shall be capable of linking 1500 devices to the

management software. 9. Device shall be capable of using a dedicated or DHCP assigned IP address.

B. System Occupancy Sensors – Both Zone Control and Networked Control

1. Occupancy sensors system shall sense the presence of human activity within the desired space and fully control the on/off function of the lights.

2. Sensors shall utilize passive infrared (PIR) technology, which detects occupant motion, to initially turn lights on from an off state; thus preventing false on conditions. Ultrasonic or Microwave based sensing technologies shall not be accepted.

3. For applications where a second method of sensing is necessary to adequately detect maintained occupancy (such as in rooms with obstructions), a sensor with an additional “dual” technology shall be used.

4. Dual technology sensors shall have one of its two technologies not require motion to detect occupancy. Acceptable dual technology includes PIR/Microphonics (also known as Passive Dual Technology or PDT) which both looks for occupant motion and listens for sounds indicating occupants. Sensors where both technologies detect motion (PIR/Ultrasonic) shall not be acceptable.

5. All sensing technologies shall be acoustically passive meaning they do not transmit sounds waves of any frequency (for example in the Ultrasonic range), as these technologies have the potential for interference with other electronic devices within the space (such as electronic white board readers). Acceptable detection technologies include Passive Infrared (PIR), and/or Microphonics technology. Ultrasonic or Microwave based sensing technologies shall not be accepted.

6. Sensors shall be available with zero, one, or two integrated Class 1 switching relays, and up to one 0-10 VDC dimming output. Sensors shall be capable of switching 120 / 277 / 347 VAC. Load ratings shall be 800 W @ 120 VAC, 1200 W @ 277 VAC, 1500 W @ 347 VAC, and ¼ HP motor. Relays shall be dry contacts.

7. Sensors shall be available with one or two occupancy “poles”, each of which provides a programmable time delay.





8. Sensors shall be available in multiple lens options which are customized for specific applications.

9. Communication and Class 2 low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors.

10. All sensors shall have two RJ-45 ports or capable of utilizing a splitter. 11. All sensors shall have the ability to detect when it is not receiving valid

communication (via CAT-5 connections) and blink its LED in a pattern to visually indicate of a potential wiring issue.

12. Every sensor parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from the software and locally via the device push-button.

13. Sensors shall be able to function together with other sensors in order to provide expanded coverage areas by simply daisy-chain wiring together the units with CAT-5 cabling.

14. Sensors shall be equipped with an automatic override for 100 hour burn-in of lamps. This feature must be available at any time for lamp replacements.

15. Wall switch sensors shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening. Prior approval of this device is required.

16. Wall switch sensors must meet NEC grounding requirements by providing a dedicated ground connection and grounding to mounting strap. Line and load wire connections shall be interchangeable. Sensor shall not allow current to pass to the load when sensor is in the unoccupied (Off) condition. Prior approval of this device is required.

17. Wall switch sensors shall have optional features for photocell/daylight override, vandal resistant lens, and low temperature/high humidity operation. Prior approval of this device is required.

18. Wall switch sensors shall be available in four standard colors (Ivory, White, Light Almond, Gray). Prior approval of this device is required.

19. Wall switch sensors shall be available with optional raise/lower dimming adjustment controls. Prior approval of this device is required.

20. System shall have sensors that can be embedded into luminaire such that only the lens shows on luminaire face.

21. Embedded sensors shall be capable of both PIR and Dual Technology occupancy detection.

22. Embedded sensors shall have an optional photocell. 23. System shall also have ceiling, fixture, recessed, & corner mounted sensors

available. 24. Fixture mount sensors shall be capable of powering themselves via a line power

feed. 25. Sensors shall have optional features for photocell/daylight override, dimming

control and low temperature/high humidity operation. 26. Sensors with dimming can control 0 to 10 VDC dimmable ballasts by sinking up

to 20 mA of Class 2 current (typically 40 or more ballasts). 27. Embedded sensors shall have an optional photocell and 0-10 VDC dimming

output.





C. System Daylight (Photocell and or Dimming) Sensors –Both Zoned Control and Networked Control

1. Photocell shall provide for an on/off set-point, and a deadband to prevent the artificial light from cycling. Delay shall be incorporated into the photocell to prevent rapid response to passing clouds.

2. Photocell and dimming sensor’s set-point and deadband shall be automatically calibrated through the sensor’s microprocessor by initiating an “Automatic Set-point Programming” procedure. Min and max dim settings as well as set-point may be manually entered.

3. Deadband setting shall be verified and modified by the sensor automatically every time the lights cycle to accommodate physical changes in the space (i.e., furniture layouts, lamp depreciation, or lamp outages).

4. Dimming sensors shall control 0 to 10 VDC dimmable ballasts by sinking up to 20 mA of class 2 current (typically 40 or more ballasts).

5. Photocell and dimming sensors shall be equipped with an automatic override for 100 hour burn-in of lamps. This feature must be available at any time for lamp

replacements. (Note: This function should be performed prior to any dimming of the lamps including the “auto set-point” setting.)

6. Combination units that have all features of on/off photocell and dimming sensors shall also be available.

7. A dual zone option shall be available for On/Off Photocell, Automatic Dimming Control Photocell, or Combination units. The second zone shall be capable of being controlled as an “offset” from the primary zone.

8. Line voltage versions of the above described photocell and combination photocell/dimming sensors shall be capable of switching both 120 VAC,

277 VAC and 347 VAC. Load ratings shall be 800 W @ 120 VAC, 1200 W @ 277 VAC, 1500 W @ 347 VAC, and ¼ HP motor load. Relays shall be dry contacts.

9. System shall have dimming photocells that can be embedded into luminaire such that only the lens shows on luminaire face.

D. System Power (Relay) Packs – Both Zoned Control and Networked Control

1. Power Pack shall incorporate one or more Class 1 relays and contribute low voltage power to the rest of the system. Secondary Packs shall incorporate the relay(s), shall have an optional 2nd relay, 0-10 VDC dimming output, or line voltage dimming output, but shall not be required to contribute system power. Power Supplies shall provide system power only, but are not required to switch line voltage circuit. Auxiliary Relay Packs shall switch low voltage circuits only.

2. Power Packs shall accept 120 or 277 VAC (or optionally 347 VAC), be plenum rated, and provide Class 2 power to the system.

3. All devices shall have two RJ-45 ports. 4. Every Power Pack parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from

the software and locally via the device push-button. 5. Power Pack shall securely mount to junction location through a threaded 1/2 inch

chase nipple or be capable of being secured within a luminaire ballast channel. Plastic clips into junction box shall not be accepted. All Class 1 wiring shall pass through chase nipple into adjacent junction box without any exposure of wire leads. Note: UL Listing under Energy Management or Industrial Control





Equipment automatically meets this requirement, whereas Appliance Control Listing does not meet this safety requirement.

6. When required by local code, Power Pack must install inside standard electrical enclosure and provide UL recognized support to junction box. All Class 1 wiring is to pass through chase nipple into adjacent junction box without any exposure of wire leads.

8. Power (Secondary) Packs shall be available that provide up to 16 Amp switching of all lighting load types.

9. Power (Secondary) Packs shall be available that provide up to 5 Amps switching of all lighting load types as well as 0-10 VDC dimming or fluorescent ballasts/LED drivers.

10. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that provide up to 5 Amps of switching as well as 0-10 VDC dimming of fluorescent ballasts/LED drivers.

11. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that provide up to 5 Amps of switching and can dim 120 VAC incandescent lighting loads or 120/277 VAC line voltage dimmable fluorescent ballasts (2-wire and 3-wire versions).

12. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that provide up to 5 Amps of switching and can dim 120/277 VAC magnetic low voltage transformers.

13. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that provide up to 4 Amps of switching and can dim 120 VAC electronic low voltage transformers.

14. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that provide up to 5 Amps of switching of dual phase (208/240/480 VAC) lighting loads.

15. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that require a manual switch signal (via a networked Wall Station) in order to close its relay.

16. Specific Power/Secondary Packs shall be available that are UL924 listed for switching of Emergency Power circuits.

17. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that control louver/damper motors for skylights.

18. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that provide a pulse on/pulse off signal for purposes of controlling shade systems via relay inputs.

E. System Relay & Dimming Panels – Networked System

1. Panel shall incorporate up to 4 normally closed latching relays capable of switching 120/277 VAC or up to 2 Dual Phase relays capable of switching 208/240/480 VAC loads. 2. Relays shall be rated to switch up to a 30A ballast load at 277 VAC. 3. Panel shall provide one 0-10VDC dimming output paired with each relay. 4. Panel shall power itself from an integrated 120/277 VAC supply. 5. Panel shall be capable of operating as either two networked devices or as one. 6. Panel shall supply current limited low voltage power to other networked devices connected via CAT-5. 7. Panel shall provide auxiliary low voltage device power connected wired directly

to a dedicated terminal connection

F. Auxiliary Input / Output (I/O) Devices – Networked System

1. Devices shall be plenum rated and be inline wired, screw mountable, or have an extended chase nipple for mounting to a 1/2" knockout.





2. Devices shall have two RJ-45 ports. 3. Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via

standard CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors. 4. Specific I/O devices shall have a dimming control output that can control 0-10

VDC dimmable ballasts or LED drivers by sinking up to 20 mA of current (typically 40 or more ballasts).

5. Specific I/O devices shall have an input that read a 0-10 VDC signal from an external device.

6. Specific I/O devices shall have a switch input that can interface with either a maintained or momentary switch and run a switch event, run a local/remote control profile, or raise/lower a dimming output.

7. Specific I/O devices shall sense state of low voltage outdoor photocells. 8. Specific I/O devices shall enable RS-232 communication between lighting

control system and Touch Screen based A/V control systems. 9. Specific I/O devices shall sense.

G. Networked LED Luminaires

1. Networked LED luminaire shall have a mechanically integrated control device. 2. Networked LED luminaire shall have two RJ-45 ports. 3. Networked LED luminaire shall be able to digitally network directly to other

network control devices (sensors, photocells, switches, dimmers). 4. Networked LED luminaire shall provide low voltage power to other networked

control devices. 5. System shall be able to turn on/off LED luminaire without using a relay. 6. System shall be able to maintain constant lumen output over the specified life of

the LED luminaire (also called lumen compensation) by varying the input control power (and thus saving up to 20% power usage).

7. System shall indicate (via a blink warning) when the LED luminaire has reached its expected life (in hrs).

8. See Sequence of Operation noted and fixture schedule on the plans.

H. System Wall Switches & Dimmers – Both Zoned Control and Networked Control

1. Devices shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening. 2. Devices shall be available with zero or one integrated Class 1 switching relay. 3. Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via

standard CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors. 4. All sensors shall have two RJ-45 ports. 5. All devices shall provide toggle switch control. Dimming control and low

temperature/high humidity operation are available options. 6. Devices shall be available in four colors (Ivory, White, Light Almond, Gray). 7. Devices with dimming control outputs can control 0-10 VDC dimmable ballasts

by sinking up to 20 mA of current (typically 40 or more ballasts) 8. Devices with capacitive touch buttons shall provide audible user feedback with

different sounds for on/off, raise/lower, start-up, and communication offline. 9. Devices with mechanical push-buttons shall provide tactile and LED user

feedback.





10. Devices with mechanical push-buttons shall be made available with custom button labeling.

11. Devices with a single on button shall be capable of selecting all possible lighting combinations for a bi-level lighting zone such that the user confusion as to which of two buttons (as is present in multi-button scenarios) controls which load is eliminated.

I. System Graphic Wall Station - Both Zoned Control and Networked Control

1. Device shall have a 3.5” full color touch screen for selecting up to 8 programmable lighting control presets or acting as up to 16 on/off/dim control switches.

2. Device shall enable configuration of lighting presets, switched and dimmers via password protected setup screens.

3. Device shall enable user supplied .jpg screen saver image to be uploaded. 4. Device shall surface mount to single-gang switch box. 5. Device shall have a micro-USB style connector for local computer connectivity.

6. Device shall have two RJ-45 ports for communication. J. System Scene Controllers - Both Zoned Control and Networked Control

1. Device shall have two to four buttons for selecting programmable lighting control profiles or acting as on/off switches. 2. Device shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening 3. Devices shall provide LED user feedback. 4. Communication and Class 2 low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors. 5. All sensors shall have two RJ-45 ports. 6. Device shall be capable of reprogramming other devices in its zone so as to implement user selected lighting scene. 7. Device shall be capable of selecting a lighting profile be run by the system’s upstream Gateway so as to implement selected lighting profile across multiple zones (and not just its local zone). 8. Device shall have LEDs indicating current selection.

K. Communication Bridges – Networked Systems Only

1. Device shall surface mount to a standard 4” x 4” square junction box. 2. Device shall have 8 RJ-45 ports. 3. Device shall be capable of aggregating communication from multiple lighting

control zones for purposes of minimizing backbone wiring requirements back to Control Gateway.

4. Device shall be powered with Class 2 low voltage supplied locally via a directly wired power supply or delivered via a CAT-5 cabled connection.

5. Device shall be careful of redistributing power from its local supply and connect lighting control zones with excess power to lighting control zones with insufficient local power. This architecture also enables loss of power to a particular area to be less impactful on network lighting control system.





2.4 LIGHTING CONTROL PROFILES – NETWORKED SYSTEMS ONLY

A. Changes to the operation of the system shall be capable of being made in real-time or scheduled via lighting control profiles. These profiles are outlines of settings that direct how a collection of devices function for a defined time period.

B. Lighting control profiles shall be capable of being created and applied to a single device,

zone of devices, or customized group of zones. C. All relays and dimming outputs shall be capable of being scheduled to track or ignore

information regarding occupancy, daylight, and local user switches via lighting control profiles.

D. Every device parameter (e.g. sensor time delay and photocell set-point) shall be configurable via a lighting control profile.

E. All lighting control profiles shall be stored on the network control gateway device and on

the software’s host server.

F. Lighting control profiles shall be capable of being scheduled to run according to the following calendar options: start date/hour/minute, end date/hour/minute, and sunrise/sunset +/- timed offsets.

G. Sunrise/sunset times shall be automatically derived from location information using an

astronomical clock.

H. Daylight savings time adjustments shall be capable of being performed automatically, if desired.

I. Lighting control profile schedules shall be capable of being given the following recurrence

settings: daily, weekday, weekend, weekly, monthly and yearly.

J. Software shall provide a graphical tool for easily viewing scheduled lighting control profiles.

2.5 MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE– NETWORKED SYSTEMS ONLY

A. Every device parameter (e.g. sensor time delay and photocell set-point) shall be available and configurable remotely from the software.

B. The following status monitoring information shall be made available from the software for

all devices for which it is applicable: current occupancy status, current PIR Status, current Microphonics Status, remaining occupancy time delay(s), current photocell reading, current photocell inhibiting state, photocell transitions time remaining, current dim level, device temperature, and device relay state(s).





C. The following device identification information shall be made available from the software: model number, model description, serial number, manufacturing date code, custom label(s), and parent network device.

D. A printable network inventory report shall be available via the software.

E. A printable report detailing all system profiles shall be available via the software.

F. Software shall require all users to login with a User Name and Password.

G. Software shall provide at least three permission levels for users.

H. All sensitive stored information and privileged communication by the software shall be

encrypted.

I. All device firmware and system software updates must be available for automatic download and installation via the internet.

J. Software shall be capable of managing systems interconnected via a WAN (wide area

network).

2.6 BMS COMPATIBILITY– NETWORKED SYSTEMS ONLY

A. System shall provide a BACnet IP gateway as a down-loadable software plug-in to its management software. No additional hardware shall be required.

B. BACnet IP gateway software shall communicate information gathered by networked system to other building management systems.

C. BACnet IP gateway software shall translate and forward lighting relay and other select

control commands from BMS system to networked control devices. 2.7 SYSTEM ENERGY ANALYSIS & REPORTING SOFTWARE– NETWORKED

SYSTEMS ONLY

A. System shall be capable of reporting lighting system events and performance data back to the management software for display and analysis.

B Intuitive graphical screens shall be displayed in order to facilitate simple viewing of system energy performance. C. An “Energy Scorecard” shall be display that shows calculated energy savings in dollars, KWHr, or CO2. D. Software shall calculate the allocation of energy savings to different control measures (occupancy sensors, photocells, manual switching, etc). E. Energy savings data shall be calculated for the system as a whole or for individual zones.





F. A time scaled graph showing all relay transitions shall be presented. G. A time scaled graph showing a zones occupancy time delay shall be presented. H. A time scaled graph showing the total light level shall be presented. I. User shall be able to customize the baseline run-time hours for a space. J. User shall be able to customize up to four time-of-day billing rates and schedules. K. Data shall be made available via a .CSV file

2.8 START-UP & SUPPORT FEATURES

A. To facilitate start-up, all devices daisy-chained together (using CAT-5) shall automatically be grouped together into a functional lighting control zone.

B. All lighting control zones shall be able to function according to default settings once

adequate power is applied and before any system software is installed. C. For networked systems, once software is installed, system shall be able to auto-discover all system devices without requiring any commissioning.

D. For networked systems, all system devices shall be capable of being given user defined names.

E. All devices within the network shall be able to have their firmware reprogrammed

remotely and without being physically uninstalled for purposes of upgrading functionality at a later date.

F. All sensor devices shall have the ability to detect improper communication wiring and blink its LED in a specific cadence as to alert installation/startup personnel.

G. Manufacturer’s field services shall prepare and start-up system.

H. Manufacturer’s field services shall provide field inspection. I. Manufacturer’s field services shall provide eight (8) hours of training.






BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

Page 1

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Branch circuit panelboards. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding.

B. Section 260553 - Electrical Identification.

C. Section 262813 - Fuses. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association).

B. NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.

B. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).

C. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.

D. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.

E. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment (published by the International Electrical Testing Association).

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Division 01 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.




Page 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Division 01 - Submittals: Submittals for information.

B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of Product.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Division 01 - Contract Closeout; Operation and Maintenance Data; Submittals for Project Closeout.

B. Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements in

project record documents.

C. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.



B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Division 01 - Contract Closeout. B. Furnish two of each panelboard key.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Division 01 - Material and Equipment: Product Options.




Page 3

B. Manufacturers: 1. Square 'D'

2. ITE 3. Cutler Hammer

C. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard.

D. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each

panelboard.

E. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating or as indicated.

F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

G. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating 100,000 symmetrical amperes, let-through current and energy level less than permitted for same size Class RK-5 fuse.

H. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.

I. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards.

J. Cabinet Front: Surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA "Standard of Installation."

B. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.

C. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor.

D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.




Page 4

E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.

F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 260553.

G. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling or below floor. Minimum spare conduits: five (5) 1" empty. Identify each as SPARE.

H. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 05 26.


A. Division 01 - Quality Control; Starting of Systems: Field inspection, testing, adjusting.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.4 for switches, Section 7.5 for circuit breakers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Division 01 - Contract Closeout; - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Adjusting installed work.

B. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain

proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. As indicated on plan. END OF SECTION 262416



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 262716 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES Page 1

SECTION 262716 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Cabinets. C. Terminal blocks and accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). B. ANSI/NEMA ICS 1 - Industrial Control and Systems. C. ANSI/NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. D. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 01. B. Shop Drawings for Equipment Panels: Include wiring schematic diagram, wiring

diagram, outline drawing and construction diagram as described in ANSI/NEMA ICS 1. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: NEMA 250; Type 1, steel. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. C. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key. D. Panel for Mounting Terminal Blocks or Electrical Components: 14 gauge steel, white

enamel finish.



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 262716 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES Page 2

2.2 CABINETS A. Cabinet Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable endwalls, 24 inches wide, 36 inches

high. Provide 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard painted matte white, for mounting terminal blocks.

B. Cabinet Fronts: Steel, flush or surface type with screw cover front, concealed hinge and

flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard; finish in gray baked enamel. 2.3 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES A. Terminal Blocks: ANSI/NEMA ICS 4; UL listed. B. Power Terminals: Unit construction type, closed-back type, with tubular pressure screw

connectors, rated 600 volts. C. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, channel mounted; tubular

pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or electrical components

in accordance with ANSI/NEMA ICS 6. B. Provide knockouts on enclosures. C. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection

diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets and enclosures plumb; anchor securely to wall and structural supports at

each corner, minimum. B. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment enclosures. C. Install trim plumb. END OF SECTION 262716



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES Page 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall switches. B. Wall dimmers. C. Receptacles. D. Device plates and decorative box covers.

E. Floor box service fittings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260923 - Digital Lighting Controls.

B. Section 260534 - Boxes. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA - Standard of Installation.

B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.

C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.



B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.




1.6 QUALIFICATIONS




B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton - 1221-2 2. Pass & Seymour - 20ACI 3. Hubbell - 1221 4. Cooper - 1991 B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Commercial Specification Grade, AC only general-use snap switch. C. Body and Handle: Light Almond plastic with toggle handle. D. Indicator Light: Lighted handle type switch; red color lens. E. Locator Light: Lighted handle type switch; red color handle. F. Ratings:

1. Voltage: 120-277 volts, AC. 2. Current: 20 amperes.

2.2 SWITCH WITH TIMER A. Digital time switch to automatically turn lighting load or motor load off after a preset time. B. LCD display. C. For installation into standard wall box. D. Watt Stopper Inteliswitch Cat. No. TS-400 or equal. 0-800 watt rating. E. Finish: Almond.




2.3 WALL DIMMERS

A. See Section 260923 – Digital Lighting Controls 2.4 RECEPTACLES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton - 5352 - 20 AMP 2. Pass & Seymour - 5352 - 20 AMP 3. Hubbell - 5352 - 20 AMP

4. Cooper - 5352 - 20 AMP

B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Commercial Specification Grade, general use receptacle. C. Device Body: Light Almond plastic.

D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.

E. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20.

F. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements.

G. Tamper Resistant Duplex Receptacles - For installation in areas as per NEC 2011, section 406.11. Receptacle to have mechanical shutter to prevent improper access to energized contacts and to be capable of accepting (2) prong plugs.

H. Weather Resistant Duplex Receptacles – For installation in damp and wet locations per NEC 2011, section 406.8.

2.5 WALL PLATES

A. Decorative Cover Plate: Smooth stainless steel.

B. Jumbo Cover Plate: Smooth stainless steel.

C. Weatherproof While in Use Cover Plate: 1. Mounting Base - Gray Die Cast With Cord Outlets 2. Inserts - Black UV Stabilized Polycarbonate 3. Gasket - Neoprene 1/8" thick with slits for mounting screws. 4. Cover – Grey die cast metal.

a. Intermatic WP1010MC b. Red Dot Cat. No. CKSGV. c. Taymac Cat. No. MX3200 d.

D. Damp location receptacles are to have weatherproof covers when the receptacles are not in use.




2.6 FLOOR MOUNTED SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers 1. Walkerbox 2. Steel City 3. Raco B. Floor box to be flush mount, flanged with carpet cutout for carpet installations or flangeless with no cutout for tile, terrazzo, or wood floor installations, 4 gang, fully adjustable, steel with 2-duplex brackets, 2-triple jack brackets, plates and flush access hatch with wire management blocks. Walkerbox #RFB4-S38CCTCAL. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly.

E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

F. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."

B. Install devices plumb and level.

C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after de-rating for

ganging as instructed by manufacturer.




E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.

F. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. G. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper, branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. H. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. I. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.

J. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.

K. Install smooth stainless steel plates in Kitchen and Food Prep areas.


A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260534 to obtain mounting heights specified in Section 260535 and indicated on drawings.

B. Coordinate the installation of wiring devices with underfloor duct service fittings

provided under Section 260539. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Division 01 - Quality Control; Starting of Systems; field inspection, testing, adjusting and balancing.

B. Inspect each wiring device for defects.

C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.

D. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.

E. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.

F. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.





BLANK PAGE




SECTION 262813 - FUSES Page 1

SECTION 262813 - FUSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fuses.

B. Spare fuse cabinet. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.

B. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.



B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.


A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of Division 01.

B. Provide one fuse puller. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish under provisions of Division 01.

B. Provide three of each size and type fuse. Provided by this contractor.





PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Littel Fuse B. Buss C. Ferraz/Shawmut

D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 FUSE REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated.

B. Voltage: Provide fuses with voltage rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage.

C. Main Service Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L time delay.

D. Power Load Feeder Switches: Class time delay. RK5.

E. Motor Load Feeder Switches: Class time delay. RK5.

F. Lighting Load Feeder Switches: Class time delay.

G. Other Feeder Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L time delay.

H. Other Feeder Switches: Class time delay RK5.

I. Power Branch Circuits: Class time delay RK5.

J. Motor Branch Circuits: Class time delay RK5.

K. Variable Frequency Controller Circuits: Class J.

2.3 SPARE FUSE CABINET A. Description: Wall-mounted sheet metal cabinet, suitably sized to store spare fuses and Fuse pullers specified. B. Doors: Hinged, with hasp for Owner's padlock. C. Finish: Factory gray.






A. Install fuses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install fuse with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.

C. Install spare fuse cabinet where indicated.






BLANK PAGE




SECTION 262819 - ENCLOSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES Page 1

SECTION 262819 - ENCLOSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fusible switches.

B. Non-fusible switches. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 262813 - Fuses. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA - Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association).

B. NEMA FU1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.

C. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).

D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (published by the International Electrical Testing Association).

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.



B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Division 01: Contract Closeout; Operation and Maintenance Data; Submittals for project closeout.

B. Record actual locations of enclosed switches in project record documents.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS








B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Division 01 - Material and Equipment: Product options and substitutions.

B. Square 'D' C. ITE D. Cutler-Hammer

E. Substitutions: Permitted. 2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type GD with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position, enclosed load interrupter knife

switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.

B. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses. 2.3 NON-FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type GD with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position enclosed load interrupter knife

switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. 2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Fabrication: NEMA KS 1. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.


A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."





B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.

C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Division 01 - Quality Control; Starting of Systems; Field inspection, testing, adjusting.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5. END OF SECTION 262819





BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS

Page 1

SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Manual motor starters.

B. Magnetic motor starters.

C. Combination magnetic motor starters. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260529 - Supporting Devices.

B. Section 260553 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

B. UL 198C - High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type.

C. UL 198E - Class R Fuses.

D. NECA "Standard of Installation," published by National Electrical Contractors Association.

E. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

F. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.

G. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.

H. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01.

B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details.

C. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.




Page 2

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.


A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.

B. Maintain one copy of document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS




B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish under provisions of Division 01.

B. Provide three of each size and type fuse and overload device installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Square D B. ITE C. Allen Bradley D. Cutler-Hammer

E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.




Page 3

2.2 MANUAL CONTROLLERS

A. Manual Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage controller with overload element, red pilot light and toggle operator.

B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, red pilot light and toggle operator.

C. Motor Starting Switch: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, without thermal overload unit, with red pilot light and toggle operator.

D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1.

2.3 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS

A. Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower.

B. Two Speed Controllers: Include integral time delay transition between FAST and SLOW speeds.

C. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.

D. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS; solid state with features as follows:

1. Self-Powered 2. 3.2:1 Adjustment Range 3. Visible Trip Indicator 4. Phase Loss Protection

E. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1. 2.4 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES TO BE PROVIDED

A. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 each field convertible contacts in addition to seal-in contact.

B. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, standard 30.5mm duty type.

C. Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form Z.

D. Pushbuttons: Unguarded, 30.5mm type.

E. Indicating Lights: 30.5mm red run LED type.

F. Selector Switches: 3 position rotary type with Hand-Off-Auto legend plate 30.5mm.




Page 4

G. Relays: NEMA ICS 2.

H. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, 75 va minimum, in each motor starter. Provide fused primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.

I. Remote Mounted Pilot Devices Where Shown on Plans: 1. Type PD-1 Wall Switch: NEMA WD1, heavy-duty, AC only general use snap switch. Finish and cover plates as indicated in Section 26 27 26. 2. Type PD-2 Wall Switch W/Pilot (Indicator Light): Lighted handle type switch; red

color lens finish and coverplate as indicated in Section 26 27 26. 3. Type PD-3 Mechanically Interlocked Maintained Pushbutton Units: 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. contacts, green top flush. Button and red lower extended button. a. Provide 'Run' and 'Stop' legend plates. b. Provide red run pilot light. c. Provide surface enclosure and cover plate; NEMA 1. 4. Note: Label pilot devices as indicated in Section 26 05 53. 2.5 DISCONNECTS

A. Combination Controllers: Combine motor controllers with fusible switch disconnect in common enclosure.

B. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable

handle. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses. 2.6 FUSES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Gould Shawmut 2. Buss 3. Littel

B. Description: Dual element, current limiting, time delay, one-time fuse, 600 volt, UL 198E, Class RK 5.

C. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.


A. Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install enclosed controllers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 260529.




Page 5

C. Height: 5 ft to operating handle.

D. Install fuses in fusible switches.

E. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics.

F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 260553.

G. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating.


A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 01.

B. Inspect and test each enclosed controller to NEMA ICS 2. 3.3 SCHEDULES - REFER TO DRAWINGS END OF SECTION 262913




Page 6

BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 262916 - ENCLOSED CONTACTORS AND RELAYS Page 1

SECTION 262916 - ENCLOSED CONTACTORS AND RELAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. General purpose contactors.

B. Lighting contactors.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.

B. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.



B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, size, voltage ratings and current ratings.



B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.



B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Asco 2. Square D 3. I.T.E.

4. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01.




B. Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor.

C. Coil Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz as scheduled.

D. Poles: As scheduled. 1. Size: As scheduled.

E. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, as required to meet conditions of installation.

F. Accessories: As scheduled.

G. Shop Panel Controls - ASCO #173A20 mushroom type stop station and ASCO #173B`17

key operated start station. See plans for locations. 2.2 LIGHTING CONTACTORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Asco 2. Square D 3. I.T.E. B. Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor.

1. Configuration: Mechanically held, 3 wire control. 2. Coil Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.

3. Poles: As scheduled. 4. Contact Rating: Match branch circuit overcurrent protection, considering de-rating

for continuous loads. 5. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type as required to meet conditions of installation.

6. Accessories: As scheduled. 2.3 LIGHTING RELAYS (EMERGENCY AND NORMAL) A. Manufacturers 1. Square D 2. Westinghouse 3. I.T.E. 4. Allen Bradley B. Description: Screw terminals, 10 amp. C. Coil Voltage: As shown on plans. D. Contacts: 1 normally open and 1 normally closed. E. Enclosure: NEMA 1 with relay socket.




PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE - SEE PLANS END OF SECTION 262916




BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 265100 – INTERIOR LUMINAIRES - L.E.D.

Page 1

SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LUMINAIRES - L.E.D. (Interior Solid State Luminaires) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Specification Section 260943 – Digital Lighting Control.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This specification is for the purchase of solid state lighting (SSL) luminaires (herein referred to as Luminaires) applied to the illumination of interior spaces. Luminaires shall be listed in accordance with national recognized testing laboratories (NRTLs) approved by the United States Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) under the requirements of 29CFR1910.7.

B. The system shall be capable of turning lighting loads on/off as well as dimming lights (if lighting load is required to be dimmed).

C. System devices shall be capable of being networked together enabling digital communication and shall be individually addressable. When noted as nLight enabled on the fixture schedule.

D. The system architecture shall be capable of enabling stand-alone groups (rooms) of devices to function in some default capacity shall the network connectivity to the greater system be lost.

E. For networked system, the system architecture shall be capable of facilitating a remote 3 operation via a computer connection.

F. The system shall not require any centrally hard-wired switching equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CALiPER Commercially Available LED Product Evaluation and Reporting ‘A’ US DOE program for the testing and monitoring of commercially available LED Luminaires and lights.

B. CCT Correlated Color Temperature: Visible light characteristic of comparing a light source to a theoretical, heated black body radiator; measured in Kelvin. C. Cd Candela: Unit of measurement of light intensity. D. CIE International Commission on Illumination.

E. Chromaticity The property of color of light.




Page 2

F. Fc Foot-candle. Unit of illuminance.

G. IES-LM-79-08 Illuminating Engineering Society – Approved Methods: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products.

H. IES-LM-80-08 Iluminating Engineering Society – Approved Methods: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources.

I. L80 The extrapolated life in hours of the luminaire when the luminous output depreciates 20 percent from initial values.

J. LED Light Emitting Diode K. METS Material Engineering and Testing Services of the Translab

L. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

M. NVLAP National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. A program under the US DOE to accredit independent testing laboratories to qualify.

N. Power Factor The ratio of the real power component to the total (complex) power component.

O. Rated Power Power consumption that the luminaire was designed and tested for an ambient temperature (70°F or 21°C).

P. SPD Surge Protection Device: A subsystem or component(s) that can protect the unit against short duration voltage and current surges.

Q. SSL Solid-State Lighting. R. THD Total Harmonic Distortion. The amount of higher frequency power on the power line.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Datasheets (general device descriptions, dimensions, wiring details, nomenclature). B. Other Diagrams – as needed for special operation or interaction with other system(s).

C. Other operational descriptions as needed.




Page 3

1.5 WARRANTY

A. The manufacturer shall provide a warranty against loss of performance and defects in materials and workmanship for the luminaires for a period of 60 months after acceptance of the luminaires. Replacement luminaires shall be provided promptly after receipt of luminaires that have failed at no cost to the customer. All warranty documentation shall be provided to customer prior to random sample testing.

PART 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Provide products of firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of recessed lighting fixtures of types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. The manufacturer of the lighting fixtures shall comply with the provisions of the appropriate code and standards. All fixtures shall be pre-tested before shipping.

B. Conformance: Fixtures shall be manufactured in strict accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications.

C. Codes: Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the National Electrical Code and any applicable Federal, State and local codes and regulations. D. UL or CSA US Listing: All fixtures shall be manufactured in strict accordance with the

appropriate and current requirements of the “Standards for Safety” to UL 8750 or others as they may be applicable. A listing shall be provided for each fixture type and the appropriate label or labels shall be affixed to each fixture in a position concealing it from normal view.

E. Specifications and scale drawings are intended to convey the salient features, function and character of the fixtures only, and do not undertake to illustrate or set forth every item or detail necessary for the work. F. Base Bid Manufacturers: Are listed on fixture schedule and specification. Manufacturers listed without accompanying catalog numbers are responsible for meeting the quality standards and photometric distribution set by the specified product.

G. Alternate Manufacturers: Identification by means of manufacturers names and catalog numbers is to establish basic features, quality and performance standards. Any substitutions must meet or exceed these standards.




Page 4

2.2 LUMINAIRES TYPE

A. Each luminaire shall consist of an assembly that utilizes LEDs as the light source. In addition, a complete luminaire shall consist of a housing, LED array and electronic driver (power supply) and integral controls as per this specification.

B. Each luminaire shall be designed to operate at an average operating temperature of 25°C.

C. The operating temperature range shall be 0°C to +25°C.

D. Each luminaire shall meet all parameters of this specification throughout the minimum

operational life when operated at the average operating temperature.

E. Luminaire Construction: 1. Luminaire housing to have no visible welding, screws, springs, hooks, rivets, bare LED’s or plastic supports. 2. The luminaire shall be a single, self-contained device, not requiring on-site assembly for installation. The power supply and circuit board for the luminaire shall be integral to the unit. 3. Luminaires shall be fabricated from post painted cold rolled steel and shall be a rigid structure with integral T-bar clips.

4. Finish: Polyester powder coat painted with 92% high-reflective paint after fabrication. 5. Reflector: Rugged, one-piece cold rolled steel with embossed multi-facets, echoing the frequency of the refractor prisms to distribute soft light at multiple angles, without flashing, thus reducing high luminance contrast. 6. End caps shall be sloped at 70 degrees to create depth. 7. Luminaire to have smooth transition between t-bar and reflector arch. No door frame or exposed hardware. 8. Polymeric materials (if used) of enclosures containing either the power supply or electronic components of the luminaire shall be made of UL94VO flame retardant materials. Luminaire lenses are excluded from this requirement. 9. Integral Grid Clips required on recessed mounted luminaires, along with integral tie wire mounting points. 10. Luminaire to have air removal capability as specified. 11. The assembly and manufacturing process for the SSL luminaire shall be designed to assure all internal components are adequately supported to withstand mechanical shock and vibration.

F. LED Sources 1. LED’s shall be manufactured by Nichia, Samsung or Osram. 2. Lumen Output – minimum initial lumen output of the luminaire shall be as follows for the lumens exiting the luminaire in the 0-90 degree zone – as measured by IESNA Standard LM-79-08 in an accredited lab. Exact tested lumen output shall be clearly noted on the Shop Drawings.

3. Lumen output shall not decrease by more than 20 percent over the minimum operational life of 50,000 hours.




Page 5

4. Individual LEDs shall be connected such that a catastrophic loss or the failure of one LED will not result in the loss of the entire luminaire. 5. LED Boards shall be suitable for field maintenance or service from below the ceiling with plug-in connectors. LED boards shall be upgradable. 6. Light Color/Quality: a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) range as per specification, between 3500K, 4100K and 5000K shall be correlated to chromaticity as defined by the absolute (X,Y) coordinates on the 2-D CIE chromaticity chart. b. The color rendition index (CRI) shall be 80 or greater. c. Color shift over 6,000 hours shall be <0.007 change in u’, v’ as demonstrated in IES LM80 report.

G. Power Supply and Drive 1. Driver: eldoLED, 120 – 277 volt, UL Listed, CSA Certified, Sound Rated A+. Driver shall be > 80% efficient at full load across all input voltages. Input wires shall be 18AWG solid copper minimum. 2. Driver shall be suitable for full-range dimming. The luminaire shall be capable of continuous diming without perceivable flicker over a range of 100% to 1% of rated

lumen output with a smooth shut off function. Dimming shall be controlled by a 0-10V signal. 3. Driver shall be UL listed. 4. Maximum stand-by power shall be 1 Watt. 5. Driver disconnect shall be provided where required to comply with codes. 6. The electronics/power supply enclosure shall be internal to the SSL luminaire and be accessible per UL requirements. 7. The surge protection which resides within the driver shall protect the luminaire from damage and failure for transient voltages and currents as defined in

ANSI/IEEE C64.41 2002 for Location Category A, where failure does not mean a momentary loss of light during the transient event. H. Electrical 1. Power Consumption: Maximum power consumption, +/- 5% when operating

between 120 – 277V (or 346V). 2. Operation Voltage: The luminaire shall operate from a 50 or 60 HZ ±3 HZ AC line over a voltage ranging from 120 VAC to 277 VAC. The fluctuations of line voltage shall have no visible effect on the luminous output. The standard operating

voltages are 120 VAC, 277 VAC, 347 VAC. 3. Power Factor: The luminaire shall have a power factor of 90% or greater at all standard operating voltages and full luminaire output. 4. THD: Total harmonic distortion (current and voltage) induced into an AC power line by a luminaire shall not exceed 20 percent at any standard input voltage. 5. Surge Suppression: The luminaire shall include surge protection to withstand high

repetition noise and other interference. 6. RF Interference: The luminaire and associated on-board circuitry must meet Class A emission limits referred in Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15 Non-Consumer requirements for EMI/RFI emissions. 7. Electrical connections between normal power and driver must be modular utilizing




Page 6

a snap fit connector. All electrical components must be easily accessible after installation and be replaceable without removing the fixture from the ceiling. 8. All electrical components shall be RoHS compliant. I. Emergency Battery Pack 1. Shall be factory installed and provide 1400 1m of light output for 90 minutes. J. Photometric Requirements 1. Luminaire performance shall be tested as described herein. a. Luminaire performance shall be tested as described herein. b. Luminaire lighting performance shall be adjusted (depreciated) for the minimum life expectancy (Section 2.2.5). c. The performance shall be adjusted (depreciated) by using the LED manufacturer’s data or the data from the IESBNA Standard TM-21 test report, which ever one results in a higher level of lumen depreciation. 2. The luminaire may be determined to be compliant photo-metrically, if: a. The initial minimum illuminance level is achieved in 100% of the area of the specified lighting pattern. 3. The measurements shall be calibrated to standard photo-pic calibrations. 4. Add specific project requirements. K. Thermal Management 1. The thermal management (of the heat generated by the LEDs) shall be of sufficient

capacity to assure proper operation of the luminaire over the expected useful life (Section 1.2.9 c). 2. The LED manufacturer’s maximum junction temperature for the expected life (Section 1.2.9 c) shall not be exceeded at the average operating ambient (Section 1.2.4). 3. The LED manufacturer’s maximum junction temperature for the catastrophic

failure shall not be exceeded at the maximum operating ambient (Section 1.2.5). 4. The luminaire shall have a UL IC rating. 5. The Driver manufacturer’s maximum case temperature shall not be exceeded at the

maximum operating ambient. Thermal management shall be passive by design. The use of fans or other mechanical devices shall not be allowed. L. Optics 1. The optical assembly shall provide volumetric distribution to eliminate cave effect and provide uniform illumination in the space and increased luminance on vertical surfaces. 2. Optics shall consist of a ribbed metal reflector system and extruded refracting optical lens with high-transmission internal optical film applied to the inside of the refracting lens. No individual LED images shall be visible to the occupant of the space. 3. Refractor or lens shall be composed of impact-resistant (20%) DR acrylic with a polymer optical film.




Page 7

M. Digital Controls 1. Each luminaire shall be equipped with two (2) digital RJ45 ports and interface with

other digital control equipment. 2. Digital manual wall control shall integrate with the SSL luminaire via CAT5E cable and be self-commissioning. 3. Digital occupancy sensor shall integrate with the SSL luminaire via CAT5E cable and be self-commissioning. 4. Digital photocell shall integrate with the SSL luminaire via CAT5E cable and be

self-commission. 5. When noted Lumen Management: The luminaire shall be capable of continuously monitoring system performance to allow for constant lumen

management/compensation function. Lumen output to be maintained at 80 percent for life of the luminaire, initial input to be 80 percent of rated input watts and climb to rated watts by end of rated life. Energy savings shall be 20 percent initial

and 10 percent over rated life of luminaire. 6. When noted each luminaire shall be supplied with a unique network address. This address shall be printed on two identification labels. One label shall be

permanently affixed to the luminaire and one label shall be easily removed for network control commissioning purposes. Both labels shall be in a location which is easily accessible by the installing contractor. N. Luminaire Identification 1. Each luminaire shall have the manufacturer’s name, trademark, model number, serial number, date of manufacture (month-year), and lot number as identification permanently marked inside each unit and the outside of each packaging box. 2. The following operating characteristics shall be permanently parked inside each unit: rated voltage and rated power in Watts and Volt-Ampere. O. Quality Assurance 1. The luminaires shall be manufactured in accordance with a manufacturer quality assurance (QA) program. The QA program shall include two types of quality

assurance: (1) design quality assurance and (2) production quality assurance. The production quality assurance shall include statistically controlled routine tests to ensure minimum performance levels of the modules built to meet this

specification. These tests shall include: CCT, CRI, Lumen output and wattage. Tests shall be recorded, analyzed and maintained for future reference. 2. QA process and test results documentation shall be kept on file for a minimum period of seven years. 3. LED luminaire designs not satisfying design qualification testing and the

production quality assurance testing performance requirements described below shall not be labeled, advertised or sold as conforming to this specification. P. Design Qualification Testing 1. Design Qualification Testing shall be performed by a National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) testing facility. Such testing may be performed by the manufacturer or an independent testing lab hired by the

manufacturer on new luminaire designs and when a major design change has been




Page 8

implemented on an existing design. A major design change is defined as a design change (electrical or physical) which changes any of the performance

characteristics of the luminaire, results in a different circuit configuration for the power supply, or changes the layout of the individual LED’s in the module. 2. A quantity of two units for each design shall be submitted for Design Qualification

Testing. 3. Product submittals shall be accompanied by product specification sheets or other documentation that includes the designed parameters as detailed in this

specification. These parameters include (but not limited to): a. Maximum power in Watts. b. L80 in hours, when extrapolated for the worse case operating temperature (section 2.2.6). TM21 report shall be submitted to demonstrate this. c. Product submittals shall be accompanied by performance data that is derived in accordance with appropriate IESNA testing standards and tested in a laboratory that is NVLAP accredited for Energy Efficient Lighting Product. 4. Luminaire shall be tested per IESNA LM 79-08. PART 3 NOT USED END OF SECTION 265100



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 265800 - OCCUPANCY SENSORS Page 1

SECTION 265800 - OCCUPANCY SENSORS PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1 SCOPE A. Contractor's work to include all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware,

sensor, wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation and furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system, as described herein.

B. Contractor/supplier shall examine all general specification provisions and drawings for

related electrical work required as work under Division 26. C. Contractor must submit data sheets on sensors, control units and all junction boxes and

mounting accessories, including all wiring diagrams. D. The Electrical Contractor must also submit layout drawings indicating the placement of

the sensors for review purposes only. Light fixture shop drawings will not be approved until occupancy sensor drawings are submitted.

E. Refer to Network Lighting Controls Specification Section 260923. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Sections 26 09 23 – Digital Lighting Controls 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittals: Procedures for Submittals.

B. Submit shop drawings, including sensor layout drawings, product data and manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.4 EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION A. All components shall be U.L. listed and provide a five (5) year warranty. 1.5 OBJECTIVE DESCRIPTION A. The objective of this section is to ensure the proper installation of the occupancy sensor

based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area.

B. The occupancy sensor based lighting control shall accommodate all conditions of space

utilization and all irregular work hours and habits.




1.6 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall warrant all equipment furnished in accordance to this specification to be

undamaged, free of defects in materials and workmanship and in conformance with the specifications. The supplier's obligation shall include repair or replacement and testing without charge to the owner, all or any parts of equipment which are found to be damaged, defective or non-conforming and returned to the supplier. Warranty on sensors and controls units will be for a period of five (5) years. The warranty shall commence upon the owner's acceptance of the project. Warranty on labor shall be for a period of one (1) year.

1.7 TRAINING A. The contractor shall provide, at the owner's facility, the training necessary to familiarize

the owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems.

PART 2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 2.1 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Ceiling mount sensors shall provide a minor motion coverage range of 150 to 1300

square feet with an overall 1/2 step coverage range from 300 to 2000 square feet. B. Occupancy sensors shall provide coverage of 90 to 100 percent of the controlled area. C. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballast and PL lamp

systems. D. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No

automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans.

E. All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable controls for time delay and

sensitivity. Controls shall be recessed to limit tampering. F. In the event of failure, a bypass manual "override on" feature shall be provided on each

sensor. When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor is replaced. The override feature shall be designed for use by building maintenance personnel and shall not be readily achieved by building occupants.

G. Ultrasonic operating frequency shall be crystal controlled to within plus or minus 0.005

percent tolerance to assure reliable performance. H. Ultrasonic microphone receiver frequency shall be 25 KHz or greater and shall be

temperature and humidity resistant.




I. All sensors shall provide an LED indication light to verify that motion is being detected and that the unit is working.

1. All sensors/parts/wall controls to be sensor switch/nLight or approved equal. Approved equals must submit for prior approval.

J. Decibel levels for ultrasonic sensors shall comply with the following criteria: Mid frequency of Sound Maximum dB level within Pressure Third Octave Third Octave Band in dB Band (KHz) reference 20 micropascals _______________________________________________________ Less than 20 80 20 or more to less than 25 105 25 or more to less than 31.5 110 31.5 or more 115

The contractor shall certify in writing that installed sensors comply with the specified criteria for ultrasonic sound.

K. All sensors shall have no leakage current in OFF mode and shall have voltage drop

protection. L. All sensors shall have UL rated, 94V-0 plastic enclosures. M. All sensors shall be California Energy Commission Title 24 approved and certified. N. Sensors shall be suitable for N.E.C. 725 Class 2 wiring and use cable installed in conduit. O. Wall mounted sensors will not be approved. P. All occupancy sensors shall have two dry contacts for control and building automation. 2.2 PRODUCTS: ALL SENSOR/SWITCH/nLIGHT PART NUMBERS A. Ceiling Mount Daylight Controls: 1. nLight nCM ADCX – Automatic dimming, RJ45 port B. Ceiling Mount Occupancy Sensor: 1. nLight nCM PDT Series – Dual technology, RJ45 Port C. Wall Controls: Refer to faceplate details and Sequence of Operation notes on plans.

1. nLight nPODM and nPODM DX Series – RJ 45 port, manual On/Off/Dimming/Presets

D. Power Packs: 1. nLight nPP16 D – 0-10VDC dimming relay




E. Approved Equals: Must submit for prior approval 2.3 CIRCUIT CONTROL HARDWARE - CU A. Control Units - For ease of mounting, installation and future service, control unit(s) shall

be able to mount on external J boxes and be integrated self-contained unit consisting internally of load switching control relay and a transformer to provide low-voltage power to a minimum of two (2) sensors. Mount where shown on manufacturer's drawings.

B. Relay contacts shall have rating of: 20A - 120 VAC Ballast C. Relay contacts shall be isolated. D. Control units shall be U.L. listed. 2.4 CONDUCTORS A. Between sensors and controls units shall be three (3) conductors, 18 AWG, stranded U.L.

Classified, PVC insulated installed in conduit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. It shall be the contractor's responsibility with the manufacturer's assistance to locate and

aim sensory in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas. Rooms shall have ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage to completely cover the controlled area to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the room(s). The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only rooms which are to be provided with sensors. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the work so as to ensure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components. The contractor shall coordinate this installation with manufacturer's representative.

B. For rooms with occupancy sensor lighting control, see Plans. END OF SECTION 265800




SECTION 270000 - COMMUNICATIONS SPECIFICATION INDEX Page 1

SECTION 270000 – COMMUNICATIONS SPECIFICATION INDEX 270533 Telephone, Data, Surveillance, Security Access and Paging Raceway Systems 275000 Voice and Data Cabling 275123 Paging Systems 275313 Clock System – Wireless END OF SECTION 270000




SECTION 270000 - COMMUNICATIONS SPECIFICATION INDEX Page 2

BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 270533 - TELEPHONE, DATA, ETC. RACEWAY SYSTEMS Page 1

SECTION 270533 - TELEPHONE, DATA, SURVEILLANCE, SECURITY ACCESS AND PAGING RACEWAY SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Raceway system and outlet boxes for these systems. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 260532 - Conduit B. Section 260534 - Boxes 1.3 COORDINATION A. Electrical Contractor is responsible for contacting the Telephone Company prior to

bidding to verify all service requirements and include these costs in their bid.

B. Verify exact location of all outlet boxes with equipment supplier prior to rough-in. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT A. Provide empty conduit, size as indicated on drawings. B. All conduits terminated in ceiling space to be bushed. 2.2 OUTLET BOXES A. Provide outlet boxes where indicated on drawings. B. Outlet boxes to be size indicated on drawings. 2.3 COVER PLATES A. Provide blank finish cover plates on all unused outlet boxes at time of substantial

completion. 2.4 CABLE, DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT A. Provided and installed as specified.



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 270533 - TELEPHONE, DATA, ETC. RACEWAY SYSTEMS Page 2

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Review equipment submittals prior to rough-in. Verify location, size and type of

raceway required. With equipment suppliers shop drawings. 3.3 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Concealed Interior Locations: In raceways. B. Exposed Interior Locations: In raceways. C. Above Accessible Ceilings: In cable tray or supports per code. D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: In raceway. E. Exterior Locations: In raceways. F. Underground Locations: In raceways. END OF SECTION 270533



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 275000 -VOICE AND DATA DISTRIBUTION CABLING

Page 1

SECTION 275000 - VOICE AND DATA DISTRIBUTION CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to the work of this section.

B. This section is a Division 27 Communications section and is part of each Division 27

section making reference to the data network cabling specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment, cabling, accessories, and materials in accordance with these specifications and drawings to provide a complete and operating voice/data cabling system. Sleeves shall be provided by others as indicated on drawings. Communications Contractor shall be responsible for all additional sleeves.

B. Under Division 27 and a separate contract, an Electrical Contractor shall install empty

conduit and boxes for the voice/data cabling system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. However, Communications Contractor shall be responsible for fishing cable through walls where conduit and boxes may not be provided.

C. The omission of express reference to any parts necessary for or reasonable incidental to a

complete installation shall not be construed as releasing the Communications Contractor from furnishing such parts.

D. The Structured Cabling Contractor shall provide and install all sleeves through the wall

penetrations as required whether or not specifically marked on Project Drawings, unless otherwise noted.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Under Division 27, the Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit and surface raceways necessary to provide pathways for a voice/data cabling system as specified herein.

B. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and test all cabling and hardware necessary for a

complete and functioning voice/data cabling system for the school as specified and indicated on drawings. The voice/data cabling system shall meet all requirements for compliance with the latest EIA/TIA 568 telecommunications wiring standards. 1. Contractor shall furnish, install, and test all cabling, connectors, and all other

items necessary for complete fiber optic backbone cabling system for connection of wiring cabinets.




Page 2

2. Contractor shall furnish, install, and test all faceplates, patch panels, punch down blocks, equipment racks and all other items necessary to provide for voice/data connections at all specified outlets and patch panel(s).

3. Contractor shall furnish, install, and test all patch panels, punch down blocks, patch cords and connecting wire, and all other items necessary for complete and functioning voice/data cabling system.

4. Contractor shall provide training as specified herein. 5. The Owner will provide the network electronics for the LAN within the Telecom

Room (TRs) and will be responsible for connecting the new cabling infrastructure to the LAN. This Contractor, however, shall supply the Category 6 patch cords. The Contractor shall be available on site during the crossover to assist with any cabling issues that may occur during the connection.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s data including specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations for all equipment installed.

B. Shop Drawings: Contractor shall provide wiring diagrams for all installed cabling and

equipment indicating room numbers, outlet IDs, equipment locations, cable distances, wiring closet locations. Contractor shall provide a drawing of the proposed wiring closet and equipment rack layouts.

C. As-Built Drawings: Three (3) complete sets of drawings shall be provided by Contractor

prior to final acceptance. These drawings shall contain all information in the shop drawings, including any changes made to the system during installation. Two sets of as-built drawings shall be provided on paper, and the third set on electronic media (AutoCAD). In addition, each TR shall be provided a laminated floor plan of the area that TR covers showing the labeled locations.

D. Test Results: Electronic copy of the cabling system test results shall be submitted for all

cables. E. Materials List: Contractor shall submit itemized list(s) of all materials installed in

fulfillment of contract. F. Warranty: Contractor shall provide three (3) binders containing all warranty information

required by manufacturers for submission of warranty claims for all equipment installed. All materials, equipment, parts, and labor shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year following the date of final acceptance. The Contractor shall, upon notification of any malfunction, make the necessary repairs, including labor and materials, at no cost to the school.

G. Technical Manual: Contractor shall furnish three (3) complete technical service manuals

for the school describing all equipment and normal operating procedures for the voice/data cabling system. Complete riser diagrams showing all cabling as installed shall also be included as part of the manual.




Page 3


A. The provision of a complete voice/data cabling system includes installation, connection, and testing of all equipment and cabling. All equipment and cabling shall be certified by Contractor as compliant with all requirements for the latest EIA/TIA 568 telecommunications wiring standards.

B. All cabling and equipment shall be installed in accordance with good engineering

practices as established by the EIA and the NEC. Cabling shall meet all applicable state and local building codes. All cables shall test free from grounds and shorts and shall be certified by the contractor to meet all category ratings per category type labeled on the cable jacket.

C. Work or materials found to be incomplete, of unsatisfactory quality, failing to meet the

specifications in these documents, or unacceptable to Consultant or Owner will be documented by Consultant and provided to Contractor to rectify.

D. Contractor shall have at least five (5) years experience in the installation of similar

systems. Contractor shall have BICSI certified installers and an RCDD on staff. Contractor shall be certified by the cabling system manufacturer to install the cabling system proposed. The contractor shall provide documentation with submittals to certify that all assigned staff have attended training courses and have the certifications corresponding to the type of cabling and equipment specified herein.

E. Contractor shall meet all manufacturers’ requirements for the provision and installation

of all equipment specified herein. F. Contractor shall utilize and have operators trained in the utilization of the following test

equipment: 1. Fluke Level III Scanner or prior approved equal. Contractor shall test all

Category 6/6A cable. 2. Fiber Optic OTDR test equipment and power meter test equipment. Fiber optic

testing shall include the following as a minimum: • End-to-end attenuation testing shall be performed at both 850 nm and

1300 nm wavelength for all connector fibers. • OTDR testing must be performed for all fibers in the intra-building

backbone. Signature trace documentation is required. A capable OTDR must be able to detect events on the fiber. There are two types of events: reflective and non-reflective. These events must be marked by the OTDR tester, and the data for each event must be retrievable.

• Each fiber within the system must be tested. • Test documentation must be stored on a compact disk as well as printed

as hard copy, with all test results labeled. • All testing is to be done through connectors. • Any fiber that fails testing must have appropriate corrective action taken

to rectify the situation.




Page 4


A. Provide service and maintenance of cabling system for one (1) year from date of Final Acceptance. 1. Warranty: Warrant the cabling system against malfunction due to component failure

or improper installation for a period of one (20) years from date of Final Acceptance. When notified of a malfunction, proceed to immediately correct the situation by replacement or repair without cost to the Owner. Extend manufacturer’s warranties when necessary to achieve the full duration. Clearly indicate provisions of the warranty in the Warranty Manual. All warranties shall be included in the as-built manual.

2. Response Time: Within the Warranty period, Contractor will effect replacement of defective parts within eight (8), hours after receiving notification of a problem.

3. Warranty Inspection: Prior to expiration of the one year warranty period, arrange to make an inspection of the cabling system. Make adjustments and correct defects that exist to bring the system up to as-new specification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. All products bid shall be the most current and up-to-date versions available, unless otherwise specified.

B. Contractor shall provide written notification to Architect/Engineer, prior to bidding, of

any discrepancies in model or part numbers specified.

C. Contractor shall provide written notification to Architect/Engineer, prior to bidding, of the announced discontinuation or replacement of any items specified herein.

D. Contractor shall provide all necessary supplies, mounting hardware, and accessories

required to install the materials specified herein.

E. Plenum cabling shall be required throughout.

F. Acceptable cable termination and wiring manufacturers: Belden DataTwist 4800, General 6500P or Berk-Tek LanMark 2000. Acceptable cable manufacturers are those that have formal partnerships with the above listed termination companies such that a fully warranted system is provided by the cable termination manufacturer.

G. Acceptable cable termination and wiring manufacturers for 6A cable: General Cable

GenSpeed 10 MTP, 10 Gigabit solution. Acceptable cable manufacturers are those that have formal partnerships with the above listed termination company such that a fully warranted system is provided by the cable termination manufacturer




Page 5

2.2 MATERIALS A. Cabling:

1. Voice/Data Cabling: Furnish and install 4-pair, 24 AWG, category 6 unshielded twisted pair cabling, quantities and locations as specified on plans. The jacket color for data cables shall be blue and the voice cables shall be blue.

2. Wireless Access Point Cabling: Furnish and install 4-pair, 24 AWG, category 6 unshielded twisted pair cabling, quantities and locations as specified on plans. The jacket color for data cables shall be blue.

3. Cat 6 Patch Cords: Furnish and install by Owner. 4. Workstation Cords: Furnish and install category 6 workstation cords, 14 feet in

length (or nearest standard length), one (1) for every jack. Patch cord shall be Panduit.

B. Cable Distribution Rings: Furnish and install cable distribution rings (D-rings) or J-hooks

to route and support cables to main cable tray locations. Sizes and-quantities as required. C. Horizontal cable management panels: Provide horizontal cable management panels

above and below each patch panel (both fiber and copper). Panels shall be black powder coat finish and shall provide capacity to handle a minimum of 24 cables per Rack Mount Unit. Provide 2 RMU managers between 48 port patch panels. Provide removable door covers for wire management sections. Vertical cable management shall be CPI part #30162-703 and between rack cable rack management shall be CPI part # 30162-703.

D. Patch Panel: Are existing, if new are needed the Owner will furnish . Voice and data

terminations by this Contractor. E. Faceplates shall be UL listed and meet all FCC Part 68 specifications. Faceplates shall be

stainless steel and shall accept snap-in fittings. Faceplate finish shall match electrical outlet plates and shall provide label fields which comply with TIA/EIA-606 labeling standard. 1. Standard single-gang faceplates shall be Panduit CFPL4SY. 2. Standard double gang faceplates shall be Panduit CFPL4S-2GY. 3. 106-style frames shall be Panduit CF1064EIY. 4. Blank modules for unused outlet ports shall be Panduit CMBEI-X.

F. Voice and data jacks for voice and data shall be 8 pin type and shall meet or exceed the

TIA/EIA- 568A requirements. Jack shall be UL listed and verified for category 6 connecting hardware. Jacks shall be capable of T568A or T568B wiring schemes. Provide blank modules for all unused module locations. Jacks shall be a non-keyed 8-pin modular jack. Category 6 jacks shall be Panduit TX6.

G. Telecommunications Room Training: Provide on-site, hands-on training for a minimum

of two (2) individuals on all cabling related equipment in the Telecommunications Rooms as specified herein. All tasks necessary to perform management of the cabling system shall be addressed as part of the training.

H. If needed, extra deep surface mount box shall be manufactured by wiremold.




Page 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Install all equipment and components in accordance with manufacturers written instructions, in compliance with NEC, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that all items comply with specifications and serve intended purposes.

B. Prior to parentally securing racks, cabinets, or ladder rack, the contractor shall coordinate

a walk through with Owner to determine exact placement of racks. C. Record serial numbers of all items provided that are serialized. Refer to PART 1 -

Warranty for Presentation Format. To be completed prior to final acceptance. D. All items must be complete as specified before sign-off. It will be the responsibility of the

Communications Contractor to ensure cabling meets all specifications and standards defined herein.

E. Within the Warranty Period, contractors will effect replacement of defective parts within

one (1) business day after receiving notification of a problem. F. Provide Owner with any additional warranties offered by manufacturers. G. Install cabling system to all outlets specified on drawings. H. Plenum-rated cable shall be utilized for all cabling. I. Install grommets in conduit to prevent damage to insulation of conductors. J. Use extreme care in handling, fishing, pulling, and securing all cabling to avoid damage

to cabling and shielding. Ensure manufacturers recommended pulling tensions and bend radii are not exceeded.

K. All cabling and wiring shall be securely fastened to the permanent building structure.

Cable and wire not installed in raceway or cable tray shall be supported at regular intervals appropriate to the cable and wire size. Cable and wire shall not lay loose on ceiling tile or grid. Cables shall be installed without splices.

L. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with

equipment manufacturers published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torque per NEC specifications.

M. Allow sufficient slack in cable and wiring to prevent premature deterioration of cable

system components and to assist in the maintenance and servicing of cable and/or other building systems and components.




Page 7

N. Fittings or connections are allowed only at the input and output of devices. Splicing shall not be accepted in any cable run. The entire cable run shall be replaced in all such instances.

O. Excess cable behind faceplate connections shall be pulled back into ceiling spaces and

secured in such a manner as to prevent damage to cabling or connections. Provide one (1) foot of excess cable at each location.

P. Any cabling or equipment located in Telecommunications Rooms and not mounted in

equipment racks shall be secured in a neat and professional manner. Q. Test all cable connections with specified equipment and certify as meeting all

specifications. Provide hard copy certification of all cabling runs/connections to Architect/Engineer.

R. Contractor shall coordinate delivery of patch cords with Owner and Construction Manager.

S. Contractor shall install a category 6 biscuit connector, 20 foot patch cord and wireless

hub at each location noted on the drawings. The owner will remove the existing wireless access points prior to construction and hand over to this contractor after installation of new ceilings. The Contractor shall coordinate all work with the Owner’s representative.

T. Cable and connector color shall be coordinated with Consultant and Owner to maintain

consistency with cable and connector color schemes used by other trades. U. Surface-Mounted Raceway Coordination

1. Contractor shall coordinate with Construction Manager and Electrical Contractor the installation of surface-mounted-raceway where not provided but made necessary by non-penetrable wall.

2. Contractor shall field verify and coordinate the proposed use of surface-mounted raceway at any location with Consultant and Owner.

V. Contractor is responsible for applying fire-stopping material in and around all openings

that it creates or are created for it, whether or not specifically indicated in specifications or Project Drawings, where code or good engineering practice suggests or requires the use of fire stopping material.

W. Contractor shall field-verify existing conditions prior to beginning demolition work. All discrepancies between existing conditions and Owner’s written instructions shall be

reported to the Owner’s Representative prior to the start of work in order to prevent disturbance of existing installation(s). Beginning work shall indicate acceptance of existing conditions. Contractor is responsible for immediately restoring any outages caused as a result of removing or damaging adjacent cabling, systems, or services.

X. Any surface-mount raceway, if necessary, shall be coordinated with the Construction

Manager and Electrical Contractor for installation by the Electrical Contractor.




Page 8

3.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM

A. Install all items in telecommunications cabinet as specified.

B. Make all voice and data cross-connections required in all telecommunications rooms to provide connections at jacks as directed by Architect/Engineer/Owner.

C. Provide ten feet of spare cable for each cable run in the telecommunication cabinet or

above the acoustic ceiling. 3.3 WIRE MANAGEMENT

A. Label all jacks, patch panels, cabinet and cables as specified herein. Typewritten labels are required. A sample shall be required for approval three weeks prior to label installation and testing.

B. Coordinate labeling scheme with Owner. Proposed wording and/or numbering schemes

for labeling shall be provided to Consultant and Owner for review and written approval prior to procurement or installation.

C. Label all ports on patch panels with the identical numbers used at jack locations in rooms.

D. Label all patch/workstation cables as specified.

E. Install cable support as necessary to accommodate sufficient slack at cabinets for service.

F. Install cable runways as necessary to protect and support cabling. Provide cable support

waterfalls where cable leaves ladder racking or cable tray. G. Label all fiber cables on both ends with a designation that identifies where the opposite

end terminates. In addition, add the number of fibers in the cable. H. Rack-mounted equipment and hardware shall be labeled as required herein. Connectors,

jacks, receptacles, outlets, cables, cable terminations, terminal blocks, rack mounted equipment, etc. shall be clearly, logically, and permanently labeled in a manner acceptable to Consultant and Owner.

I. Labeling information shall appear on the as-built drawings.

J. All labels shall be permanent and be machine generated. No handwritten labels allowed. K. Characters on all labels shall be black printed on white background. L. Labels used on cables shall be self –laminating, white/transparent vinyl, and be wrapped

around the cable sheath. M. Horizontal cables shall have machine generated wrap around cable labeled at each end.




Page 9

N. All fiber and copper backbone cable shall be labeled at each end. O. All cable support in the main cable path shall be installed every three (3) feet. Small

cable bundles (under 25) not in the main path may be supported every five feet. P. The maximum station cable drop length for UTP cables shall not exceed 295 feet (90

meters) in order to meet data communications performance specifications. Any area that cannot be reached within the above constraints shall be identified and reported to the Consultant prior to installation.

Q. Cables shall not lay directly on ceiling grid. R. Cable separating distances

1. Eighteen (18) inches between cable and Fluorescent lights 2. Thirty-nine (39) inches from transformers and motors 3. Twelve (12) inches between cable and power cables

3.4 TELECOMMUNICATION ROOM TRAINING

A. Provide on-site, hands-on training for a minimum of two (2) individuals on all cabling-related equipment in the Telecommunications Rooms, as specified herein. All tasks necessary to perform management of the cabling system shall be addressed as part of the training. A training outline shall be submitted to Architect/Engineer for approval a minimum of ten (10) days prior to training.

3.5 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which all items are to be installed, and notify Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with that portion of the work affected until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer.





Page 10

BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 275123 - PAGING SYSTEMS

Page 1

SECTION 275123 - PAGING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment including, but not limited to, outlet boxes, conduit (with pull strings), wiring, speakers, and zone integrated page control as shown on the plans, and all other equipment necessary to provide a complete and operating system for Eden Valley and Watkins School.

B. Work in this project is to expand from existing systems at each building.

C. Electrical Contractor to coordinate with Owner’s representative: Eric Denny at Arvig – 1-888-992-7844

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Data sheets shall be provided on all equipment being provided. As well as layout drawing showing device locations and cable routing.

B. Internal control cabinet drawings showing internal block diagram connections shall be provided.

C. Wiring diagrams showing typical field wiring connections shall be provided.

D. FCC registration number shall be provided if required. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The Contractor shall be from an established and locally run business which has been operating in the area for a minimum of ten years.

B. The Contractor shall show evidence that he maintains a service organization and parts inventory to adequately support the supplied equipment.


A. The Contractor shall provide a one-year guarantee of the installed system against defects in material and workmanship. All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. Guarantee period shall begin on the date of acceptance by the Owner or Engineer.

B. A maintenance contract offering continued factory authorized service of this system shall be made available if requested by the Owner.


A. The Contractor shall currently maintain a locally run business for a minimum of five years and shall be an authorized distributor of the supplied equipment with full warranty privileges.




Page 2

B. The Contractor shall maintain at his facility the necessary spare parts in the proper proportion as recommended by the equipment manufacturer to maintain and service the equipment being supplied. This facility shall be available for inspection by the Engineer.

C. Provide connection equipment and labor to existing telephone equipment.

D. The supplying Contractor shall have attended the manufacturer's installation and service school.

E. The Contractor shall furnish manufacturer's manuals of the completed system including individual specification sheets, schematics, inter-panel and intra-panel wiring diagrams. In addition, all information necessary for the proper operation of the system must be included. Any bidder using other than the specified equipment must provide this information prior to bidding.

F. As built drawings that include any changes to wiring, wiring designations, junction box labeling and any other pertinent information shall be supplied upon completion of project.

1.6 IN-SERVICE TRAINING

A. The Contractor shall furnish a minimum of four hours of in service training with the system. These sessions shall be broken into segments that will facilitate the training of individuals in operating station equipment, administrative devices, user programming functions, and program distribution equipment. Operating manuals and users guides shall be provided at the time of the training.

1.7 WIRING

A. System wiring shall be in accordance with good Engineering practices as established by the EIA and NEC. Wiring shall meet all established state and local electrical codes. All wiring shall test free from grounds and shorts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS

A. Intercom System is existing to remain in each building.

1. Type A Speaker: Ceiling speaker shall be an 8" dual cone design with a minimum frequency response of 80Hz-8kHz. It shall have a minimum voice coil diameter of 3/4", a 4.8 ounce magnet and be capable of handling 20 watts of program power. Any system requiring a line matching transformer for each staff station location will use a transformer of such quality that a minimum frequency response of 60Hz-17kHz will be provided. Provide integral volume control.

a) Atlas Pre-Assembled Loudspeaker THD72wc with Atlas EZ95 8 mounting bracket for 10 oz speaker.




Page 3

B. Provide paging amplifiers if required for all new speakers, field verify exact requirements.

PART 3 CABLES

A. All cable shall listed for the intended purpose. Use CAT III, 18AWG, UL Listed cable. Home run all station wiring in individually jacketed cables. Number of pairs within the cable may vary due to specific field conditions.

B. All amplified speaker circuits shall be connected using two (2) twisted pairs. One pair for line level audio and one pair for 24 VDC power. Gauge of wire is dependent on line lengths and is shown on the prints.

C. All constant voltage speaker circuits shall be connected using a separate twisted shielded pair. Gauge of wire is dependent on line length and is shown on the prints.

D. Transient suppression is required on all wiring leaving the building.

E. All cables run in underground conduits must be suited for wet locations. PART 4 INSTALLATION

A. Complete system shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. All wiring shall be installed in raceways where routed through plenum ceiling areas.

C. All connection wiring, devices and labor shall be provided to connect the existing phone system with the Paging System.

PART 5 INSPECTION AND TEST UPON COMPLETION

A. Check-out and final connections to the master clock and phone system shall be made by a factory trained technician in the employ of a manufacturer of the products installed. In addition, factory trained technicians shall demonstrate operation of the complete system and each major component to the Owner.

B. System field wiring diagrams shall be provided to this subcontractor by the system manufacturer prior to installation.

C. All materials and installation shall be guaranteed to be free of defects in material and workmanship for one year after final acceptance of installation and test.

D. Upon completion of the installation, four (4) copies of complete operational instructions shall be furnished, complete with record drawings. Instructions shall include part numbers and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of parts source. Final payment shall not be made until operational manuals have been received.

E. Upon completion of the installation of the equipment, the electrical contractor shall provide to the Engineer a signed statement form the equipment supplier that the system has been wired, tested, and functions properly according to the specifications.




Page 4

G. Nothing herein contained shall be construed to relieve the Contractor from furnishing a complete and acceptable electrical wiring system in all its categories. The Engineer will condemn and reject any materials or labor which are or may become detrimental to the accomplishment of the intentions of these specifications.




DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. 275313 - CLOCK SYSTEMS – WIRELESS Page 1

SECTION 275313 - CLOCK SYSTEMS - WIRELESS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Transmission System 1. System Controller with Ethernet Connection. 2. Primary Internal Transmitter.

B. Wireless Synchronized Devices

1. Analog Clock 2. Signal Indicator Sitesync IQ 3. Master Clock wired interface

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 – Electrical 120V 60 Hz grounded outlet required for SiteSync IQ System

Controller. Ex: Minimum 10 amp circuit. B. Division 26 – Electrical 120V 60 Hz grounded outlet required for external transmitter.

Ex: Minimum 10 amp circuit.

C. Division 26 – Electrical 120V 60 Hz grounded outlet for each AC powered clock, Master Clock Synchronizer and Wireless Relay.

D. Section 260534 – Boxes. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. This Technical Specification and Associated Drawings.

B. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) – 70, National electric Code 2005. C. American Time & Signal, Co. SiteSync IQ Wireless Clock System User Manual. D. American Time & Signal, Co. Master Clock Synchronizer User Manual. E. American Time & Signal, Co. Wireless Relay (User Manual)

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Ethernet: Time synchronization via SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) or Daytime Protocol. The system controller receives the same time via an Ethernet connection, which is then transmitted to your clocks. This requires a TCP/IP Network with Internet access or connection to a Network Time Server.




1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Existing system is a SiteSync IQ Wireless Timekeeping System. Expanded as required

for an operable clock system per locations on plans.

B. The system shall synchronize all clocks to each other. The system shall utilize Ethernet technology to provide atomic time to all its components. The system shall not require any hard wiring for operation (besides AC power for specified components) except for an Ethernet patch cable for Ethernet connection. Analog clocks could be battery operated for full portability if required. Clocks shall automatically adjust for Daylight Saving time per the settings in the SiteSync IQ System Controller.

C. Clocks shall synchronize to ±1 second of the time displayed on the system controller. D. Analog clocks to be battery-operated for complete portability and relocation freedom or

AC powered for many years of maintenance-free operation. Batteries included.


A. Equipment and components furnished shall be of manufacturer’s latest model.

B. System Controller, Transmitter and receiver shall comply with Part 90 of FCC rules, as follows:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. Transmitter frequency shall be governed by FCC Part 90.35. 3. Transmitter output power shall be governed by FCC Parts 90 and 74.

C. System shall be installed in compliance with local and state authorities having

jurisdiction. 1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit complete catalog data for each component, describing physical characteristics and method of installation. Submit brochure showing available colors and finishes of clocks.


A. Permits American Time & Signal Co. offers the use of a shared nationwide FCC license.

B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Company specializing in manufacturing commercial timekeeping

systems with a minimum of 10 continuous years of documented experience. 2. Installer: End user technicians or contractor with documented experience in the installation of commercial timekeeping systems.

C. Warranty: Two-year warranty on all SiteSync IQ products excluding batteries.





A. Deliver all components to the site in the manufacturer’s original packaging. Packaging shall contain manufacturer’s name and address, product identification number and other related information.

B. Store equipment in finished building, unopened containers until ready for installation. 1.10 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS

A. Clocks shall not be installed until painting and other finish work in each room is

complete.

B. Cat 5 or above patch cable with Internet access or connection to a Network Time Server must be available plus; Static IP address from Network Administrator, Gateway IP address, Subnet Mask, Firewall Port and SNTP Server Address.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Existing SiteSync IQ wireless timekeeping system and its components shall be manufactured by American Time & Signal Company, Dassel, MN 55325.

2.2 SYSTEM OPERATION AND STARTUP SEQUENCE

A. SiteSync IQ system receives atomic time information from Ethernet. The system controller is a powerful multi-tasking device that is capable of sending precise time information to synchronize all the system wireless clocks and accessories. The system can be monitored and programmed from the SiteSync IQ system controller keypad or via your PC web browser if you have the Remote Connect capability. It’s important to follow steps in this order: Install system controller, confirm signal reception and then install clocks.

2.3 WIRELESS SYSTEM CONTROLLER OPERATION A. When power is first applied to the SiteSync IQ system controller, the user shall complete

the Startup Wizard to initiate system operation and signal transmission. The Site Sync IQ system controller looks for the time signal every hour from the time source your system is designed to synchronize with. Once the system controller has received the time synchronization it sets its internal clock to that time. The system controller then starts to transmit the internal time. The system controller features an on-demand Ethernet sync capability which is initiated by the User/installer to sync the time.




2.4 ANALOG CLOCK OPERATION

A. For battery clocks, remove the insulator tab from the battery compartment of the clock. There is no need for any additional adjustment (the clock movement adjustment is fully automatic).

B. After a few seconds of initial setup, the clock receiver will look for valid time

transmission. The monitoring LED at the back of the clock will flash red during that period of time. After a valid time data is received, the monitoring LD will turn green and ultimately stop blinking when the clock begins the correction or synchronization period. The clock will automatically look for valid time signals four times each day and will adjust to the correct time if needed.

2.5 EQUIPMENT

A. Analog Clocks: American Time & Signal Co. plastic analog clocks. Analog clocks, shall be wall-mounted and surface or semi-flush mount. Plastic clocks shall have polystyrene frame and polycarbonate lens. Face (dials) shall be white. Hour and minute hands shall match existing. Analog clocks available as wall or ceiling mount double dial assemblies. Other clock features shall be:

1. Analog clocks with no user mechanical adjustments. 2. Time shall be automatically updated from the transmitter four (4) times per day. 3. Use AA lithium battery (included), battery booster pack with 6 aa lithium

(included). 4. The clock shall have an ultra-sensitive UHF receiver (better than – 110dBm) and

integrated internal antenna. 5. The clock will keep operating using its internal quartz clock in case of signal

reception loss due to malfunction of the wireless system controller or transmitter. 6. Analog clock faces shall bear Owner’s logo ad indicated. Verify with existing. 7. Anti-Theft Bracket:

a. 12” plastic – Part #H001141-WEB b. 15” plastic – Part #H004734-WEB

8. Clocks: a. Are to match the existing clocks design and logo.

B. Any additional equipment required to expand the existing clock system in areas shown on plans. The expanded system is to be complete and operable. PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.1 SITE EXAMINATION A. Verify that construction is complete in the areas where equipment is to be installed and

that rooms are clean and dry.




3.2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Refer to the manufacturer installation manuals as supplied with the system, to install each one of the system components.

3.3 INSPECTION A. Prior to final acceptance, clean exposed surfaces of all system components, using

cleaning methods recommended by the manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING A. Prior to final acceptance, clean exposed surfaces of all system components, using

cleaning methods recommended by the manufacturer. 3.5 DELIVERY

A. If needed, provide technical assistance as demonstrated in the manufacturer’s system user guide, on product start up and system set up, to owners or installers representatives via

Phone: 866-748-3796, Fax: 800-789-1882 or E-mail: [email protected]. END OF SECTION 275313

mailto:[email protected]




BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 280000 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SPECIFICATION INDEX Page 1

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SPECIFICATION INDEX

DIVISION 28

281300 Security Access System 281310 Video Entry, Access Intercom Systems 282300 CCTV Surveillance System 283100 Fire Alarm System END OF SECTION 280000



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 280000 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SPECIFICATION INDEX Page 2

BLANK PAGE




SECTION 281300 – SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEM Page 1

SECTION 281300 - SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all equipment including, but not limited to, outlets, boxes, conduit (with pull strings), wiring, card readers, cards, controllers, and software as shown on plans and all other equipment necessary to provide a complete and operating system for the Eden Valley Watkins Elementary School Remodeling.

B. Existing system is Vanderbilt. New devices are to expand on existing system. C. Electrical Contractor to coordinate with Owner’s Representative: Dan Anderson - TC Hardware Cell: 651-325-5837, Office: 651-731-7181 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Door Entry Equipment. B. Door Entry Cable.

C. Accessories.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 260519 - Building Wire and Cable. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate device layout drawings, cable routing and connections. C. Submit product data for each item of equipment. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit record documents under provisions of Division 01. B. Accurately record actual locations of devices and wiring.





1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 01.

B. Operation Data: Include instructions for routine operation of master and remote stations.

C. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for minor troubleshooting, preventive maintenance, and cleaning.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: To be Vanderbilt.

B. Supplier: TC Hardware.

C. Installer: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. Installer to be TR Hardware.

D. Installer: Company must have a factor authorized technician on staff


A. Furnish service and maintenance of door access control for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Approved Manufacturers 1. Vanderbilt 2.2 DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM A. General Information

1. Provide complete, operational door security system as shown and specified. Equipment to be Vanderbilt. Final check out and adjustment to be made by a qualified manufacturer's representative.

2. All equipment and wiring shall be warranted free of mechanical and electrical defects for one (1) year from completion date. Provide all parts and labor required to correct malfunctions within the one (1) year warranty period at no cost to the owner.

B. System Operation

1. School: Watkins Elementary and Eden Valley Elementary Schools a. Designated doors located on Electrical Plans shall be controlled by local card

readers. See Electrical Plan sheets for details and schedules.





C. At Eden Valley School an existing door release button shall be installed at reception desk in Reception 134. Connect existing button to door control system, as required.

D. At Watkins School a new door release button shall be installed at Reception Desk in

Reception 112. Connect new button to door control system as required. E. As an alternate in both schools a school lockdown button shall be mounted at the Reception

Desk in Eden Valley Reception 134 and Watkins Reception 112. The buttons shall lockdown all exterior doors, lock magnetic door locks and release door hold devices controlled by the fire alarm systems at each building.

F. Door entry system shall be connected to School's Ethernet system and controlled off of one main platform.

G. Door Controller Functions

1. The door controller should control all the functions of local components attached to it. It should monitor the opening times of each of the doors after an authorized access and start the buzzer in pulse mode to signify a pre-alarm when half of the opening time has elapsed and in permanent mode when the entire time has elapsed. The resident software application at the local controller should allow the local decoding and validation of at least 2,000 access cards and authorize entry without the intervention of the gateway.

2. In case of power failure, a 24 volt 7 amp/hour battery should maintain all system functions for at least 2 hours.

3. The door controller should operate in standalone in case of communication failure with the gateway.

4. It should be able to accommodate readers or keypads and allow the integration of various types of readers such as Proximity, Magnetic, ABA, Wigand or bar codes for each software configuration without using keypads or switches.

5. Each controller should have its own CSA/UL certified 16 VAC 40 VA transformer. 6. Each door controller should be able to power the door opening devices associated

with their readers with 24 volts DC. (Verify with Door Hardware Supplier.) 7. Each of the controllers should be equipped with a reserve 24 volts 7 amp/hr battery.

H. Equipment

1. Coordinate with TC Hardware. TC Hardware to install equipment. Electrical Contractor to rough-in. 2. Wiring shall be in strict compliance with U.L. NEC and System manufacturer's

recommendations and diagrams. 3. Locking mechanisms shall be supplied by other. 4. Required relays and wiring to integrate handicap doors with card access system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.





B. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer. C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.

D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 01.

B. Perform operational test on completed installation to verify proper operation.

C. Replace equipment, components, and wiring to eliminate audible noise, clicks, pops, or hum when system is in standby or operation.

3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Division 01. B. Make final connections to units. C. Perform field inspection and testing. D. Demonstrate system operation. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Division 01.

B. Adjust controls and configuration switches for operation as indicated. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide systems demonstration and instructions under provisions of Division 01.

B. Conduct walking tour of Project and briefly describe function, operation, and maintenance of each component.

C. Use submitted operation and maintenance manual as reference during demonstration and

training. END OF SECTION 281300



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 281310 – VIDEO ENTRY ACCESS INTERCOM SYSTEM

Page 1

SECTION 281310 - VIDEO ENTRY ACCESS INTERCOM SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Facility Access Intercom System. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260500: General Provisions – Electrical

B. Section 260532 – Conduit

C. Section 260534 – Boxes

D. This Section, 281310, is subject to all of the applicable provisions of the above indicated sections. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Video Entry Access Intercom System 1. The system shall consist of a Video Master Station, Video Remote Door Station,

cable, wire, etc. 2. System components shall employ solid-state design.

1.4 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. The Video Entry Access Intercom System shall permit call origination, one-way video transmission between the Remote Door Station and the Master Station and two-way voice communication between the Remote Door Station and the Master Station.

B. The system shall permit visual and audible call annunciation and communication

between the remote station and the master station.

C. The system shall permit two separate electric door strike releases from the Master Station.

1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. The system shall be free from noticeable distortion, clipping, hum, buss, his and other Un-desired signals when operated at required levels.




Page 2

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor and system supplier shall produce a coordinated riser/wiring diagram for the complete system. The diagram is to indicate conduit run, exact wire counts and types and zone and circuit numbers for each device.

B. Contractor shall furnish complete shop drawing package for this system. This submittal shall consist of, but not be limited to:

1. A materials list showing quantity, manufacturer, type and description of each item furnished.

2. A complete system riser/wiring diagram as described above. 3. Annotated product data sheets for each item furnished.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Systems manufactured by the following are approved for bidding purposes on this project. Approval for installation shall be subject to review of shop drawings.

1. Aiphone Corporation 2.2 VIDEO ENTRY ACCESS INTERCOM SYSTEM

A. Video Master Station 1. Master station shall provide incoming call annunciation. 2. Master stations shall provide two-way communication and one-way color video

observation with Pan and Tilt Control of the Remote Video Stations. 3. Master station shall provide selected electric door strike release. 4. Master Station shall be the Aiphone Model JF-2MED complete with a

Model PS-1820UL Power Supply and Model MCW-S/A Desk Stand. 5. Model RY-3DL Selective Door Release Relay 6. Model JK-MB Mullion-mount bracket

B. Remote Video Door Station

1. The remote door station shall be Model JF-DV Vandal Resistant Video Door Station with Pan, Tilt, CCD Color Camera, with flush backbox.

2.3 CABLE & WIRE

A. Cable and wire for this system shall be as recommended by the system manufacturer.

B. All cable and wire installed without conduit in ceiling spaces used as return air plenums shall have an outer jacket approved for such use, such cable shall have a continuous identification of approval visible along its entire length of the cable. Where waivers have been granted by the local code authority for installation of PVC or other cable in air plenum spaces, the contractor and supplier shall obtain approval in writing from the Engineer before such cable shall be use.




Page 3


A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit, terminal cabinets, junction and outlet boxes and wiring as required to provide a complete and functional system

B. All wiring shall be in conduit.

C. The Contractor shall identify and tag all cables with permanent type markers to denote

location served.

D. All splices shall be made in an approved manner and shall be located only within junction boxes or other accessible points. No splices are permitted within conduits or raceways. When splicing shielded cables, continuity and isolation of the shield shall be maintained throughout the circuit. Splices shall be kept to a minimum.

E. All front panel controls used in normal operation of the system shall be clearly and permanently labeled as function and area served.

F. Master station shall be installed with 20 feet of extra cable to permit relocation of the unit within the room.

G. Remote stations shall be mounted over a single-gang electrical box at 48 inches above

the finished floor.

H. Contractor shall coordinate wiring details with door Security Representative and Door Hardware Supplier.

3.2 TEST AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Upon completion of the installation phase, the supplier shall thoroughly test and adjust the system to insure proper operation.

B. Each and every function and feature of the system shall be tested at this time.

C. Where required, appropriate corrections and adjustments shall be made. 3.3 TRAINING

A. The system supplier shall provide operators training on the completed system to the owner’s operation personnel.




Page 4

3.4 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION

A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer three complete as-built manuals. These manuals shall be assembled in loose-leaf binders and shall contain the following:

1. As-Built system function block diagrams. 2. System operating instructions. 3. Name, address and phone number of the responsible service organization.

3.5 FINAL CHECKOUT AND ACCEPTANCE

A. The system supplier shall be available to demonstrate the operation and use of the system to the Architect/Engineer and to the Owner’s representatives.

B. The Contractor shall verify the following before scheduling the system demonstration:

1. System installation is 100% complete. 2. System is 100% fully operational.

C. The Contractor shall verify the following before requesting final approval.

1. Owner’s training is complete.

D. Final acceptance of the system will be given upon completion of all of the above. 3.6 SYSTEM GUARANTEE

A. The system supplier shall, in conjunction with the manufacturer, provide a complete parts and labor warranty of the system. The warranty period shall commence on the date of final acceptance and shall continue for a period of one (1) year. During the warranty period, the system supplier shall provide all materials and labor required to correct any system malfunction or failure at no cost to the Owner. This system warranty shall cover any system malfunction or failure except those that are caused by acts of God, negligence, abuse or misuse.




DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 282300 – CCTV SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

Page 1

SECTION 282300 - CCTV SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

A. The existing closed circuit video surveillance system shall remain and be modified accordingly in the Eden Valley-Watkins Public Schools. Cameras equipment and locations are designated on Electrical Plan Sheets. All cameras, wiring, power supplies, software, connector, storage devices and labor shall be included to provide a fully operational system. Any additional power requirements required for the system and not shown on the electrical plans shall be the responsibility of this contractor. Existing CCTV contractor Heartland Security 1-888-264-6380.

B. The existing system is a Dedicated Micros Camera System and the new equipment shall match

existing equipment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Data sheets shall be provided on all equipment being provided. B. Internal control cabinet drawings showing internal block diagram connections shall be

provided.

C. Wiring diagrams and layout drawings showing typical field wiring connections shall be provided.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The Contractor shall be from an established and locally run business which has been operating in the area for a minimum of 5 years.

B. The Contractor shall show evidence that they maintain a service organization and parts

inventory to adequately support he supplied equipment.

C. The Contractor shall have at least a one NICET III Video technician on staff

D. The Contractor shall have at least one technician that has been certified by system manufacturer.


A. The Contractor shall provide a one-year guarantee of the installed system against defects in material and workmanship. All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. Guarantee period shall begin on the date of acceptance by the Owner or Engineer.

B. A maintenance contract offering continued factory authorized service of this system shall be made available if requested by the Owner.




Page 2

C. The Contractor shall currently maintain a locally run business for a minimum of five years and shall be an authorized distributor of the supplied equipment with full warranty privileges.

D. The Contractor shall maintain at his facility the necessary spare parts in the proper proportion as

recommended by the equipment manufacturer to maintain and service the equipment being supplied. This facility shall be available for inspection by the Engineer.

E. The supplying Contactor shall have attended the manufacturer’s installation and service school.

F. The Contractor shall furnish manufacturer’s manuals of the completed system including

individual specifications sheets, schematic, inter-panel and intra-panel wiring diagrams. In addition, all information necessary for the proper operation of the system must be included. Any bidder using other than the specified equipment must provide this information prior to bidding.

G. As built drawings that include any changes to wiring, wiring designations, junction box labeling

and any other pertinent information shall be supplied upon completion of project.

1.6 IN-SERVICE TRAINING

A. The Contractor shall furnish a minimum of four hours of in service training with the system. These sessions shall be broken into segments that will facilitate the training of individuals in operating station equipment, administrative devices, and user programming functions. Operating manuals and user guides shall be provided at the time of training.

1.7 WIRING

A. System wiring shall be in accordance with good engineering practices as established by the EIA and NEC. Wiring shall meet all established state and local electrical codes. All wiring shall test free from grounds and shorts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Existing Dedicated Micros.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Relocate existing cameras to new ceilings for interior installations and to the new exterior doors.

B. Install new cameras where shown on plans. New cameras to be by Dedicated Micros, 1.3 megapixel, POE, varifocal lens, vandal dome and required mounting accessories.




Page 3

C. New Camera Listing:

1) Camera #1: Watkins Gym #103 3.1 DIGITAL VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. Existing to remain at each school. Provide required camera licenses for existing unit.


A. Installation should be performed by qualified service personnel only in accordance with the National Electrical Code or applicable local codes.

B. Electrical Contractor to coordinate with existing Owner’s Representative/CCTV Contractor at Heartland Security 1-888-264-6380, Attention: Adam Hanson and Vern Zimmer.





Page 4

BLANK PAGE



DOLEJS ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 283100 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 1

SECTION 283100 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. Each existing system is a Notifier Fire Alarm System and is to remain in each building. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division - 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Section 260500 “Basic Electrical Requirements” sections, apply to work specified in this section.

1.3 REFERENCED CODES AND STANDARDS - NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code - NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code - SBCCI Standard Fire Prevention Code - ADA Public Law 101-336 for Strobe Placement - NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

- State of Minnesota Code Requirements - International Building Code - Uniform Mechanical Code - International Fire Code


A. Equipment: All devices, combinations of devices, appliances, and equipment shall be listed for the protective signaling purpose for which they are used and shall be installed in compliance with the applicable codes and standards.

B. Type of System: The control panel shall be listed for Power-limited applications per NEC 760 and for compliance with the National Protection Association Standards and NFPA 72: for Local, Auxiliary, Remote Station, and/or Proprietary fire protective signaling systems.

C. Type of Service: The control panel shall be listed for the applicable types of service; i.e., Manual Alarm, Automatic Alarm, Waterflow Alarm, and/or Sprinkler Supervisory Service.

D. Type of Signaling: The control panel shall be listed for the applicable types of signaling methods used; Synchronous Temporal Audible Devices, 1HZ Synchronous Visual Devices and/or Digital Alarm Communicator Signaling.




Page 2

E. Rules and Regulations for local jurisdictions regarding the requirements for certificates, licenses, permits, plan review, inspections, approvals, fees, etc., shall apply.


A. Fire Alarm System: Existing Notifier Fire Alarm System. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: The Manufacturer shall be a nationally recognized company specializing in smoke detection and fire alarm systems. This organization shall employ factory- trained and NICET certified technicians, and shall maintain a service organization within one hour of this project location. The Manufacturer and service organization shall have a minimum of 10 years’ experience in fire protective signaling systems industry. The service technicians shall be employees of the Manufacturer.

B. Installer: The installation shall be supervised by an employee of the manufacturer with a NICET Level II or higher certification and any other qualifications required by the Authority having jurisdiction.

C. The Manufacturer Organization supplying final checkout, contractual service and testing,

shall be listed and authorized by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL) to provide services for alarm system certification as a means of identifying compliance with applicable NFPA Standards.

D. Manufacture shall be Notifier. 1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Manufacturer product data sheets for all proposed devices and equipment.

B. The authority having jurisdiction shall be notified prior to installation of equipment or wiring. Complete information regarding the system including specifications, wiring diagrams, battery and power supply calculations, floor plans, and graphics shall be submitted for approval.

C. Submit copy of NICET certification (and UL Certificate of Compliance if required). 1.8 PROJECT DOCUMENTATION

A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the site an up-to-date record set of approved shop drawings.

B. Record as-built drawings shall include location of all device addresses and end-of-line device locations. These shall be in electronic format of Owner’s choice and three (3) hard copies.




Page 3

1.9 OWNER’S MANUAL TO INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING

A. A detailed narrative description of the system inputs, evacuation, signaling, ancillary functions, annunciation, intended sequence of operations, expansion capability, application considerations, and limitations.

B. Operator instructions for basic system operations, including alarm acknowledgment, system reset, interpreting LED and LCD indications, operation of manual evacuation signaling and ancillary function controls.

C. A detailed description of routine maintenance and testing as required and recommended and as would be provided under a maintenance contract, including testing and maintenance instructions for each type of device installed. This information shall include:

- A listing of the individual system components that require periodic testing and maintenance.

- A schedule that correlates the testing and maintenance procedures with the listing. - Step-by-step instructions detailing the requisite testing and maintenance procedures and the intervals at which those procedures shall be performed, for each type of device installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL

A. Existing Notifier Control -Eden Valley has a Notifier NFS-320 Series System -Watkins has a Notifier NFS-320 Series System

2.2 NAC SIGNAL POWER EXTENDER PANEL A. Match Existing Equipment 2.3 REMOTE LCD ANNUNCIATOR WITH SURFACE CABINET A. Existing Notifier 2.4 INITIATION DEVICES A. Addressable Pull Station – Match Existing Devices

Surface Backbox where required Flush Trim Plate where required Wireguard where noted on plans B. Addressable Detectors – Match Existing Devices Photoelectric Sensor Base




Page 4

Base w/ relay driver output DPDT Relay Heat Sensor

- Wireguard where noted on plans C. Duct Detector Housing w/ Relay - Match Existing Devices Photoelectric Sensor

Sampling Tube (cut to length as required) PAM-SD Relay - 2 Contacts, one for Fire Alarm, one for Temperature Controls

D. Addressable Interface Module – Match Existing Devices

IDNet Monitor Module IDNet Control Module

E. Duct Detector (Smoke Fire Damper) Housing w/Relay – Match Existing Devices Sampling Tube (Cut to length as required) Duct Remote Test Station and Alarm Indicator 2.5 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Audible/Synchronized ADA Visual Assembly – Match Existing Devices Horn/Strobe ADA (Synchronous) Visible ADA Strobe (Synchronous) Weatherproof Horn/Strobe Weatherproof Backbox Horn Wireguard, where noted on Plans 2.6 PERIPHERAL DEVICES A. Magnetic Door Holder – Match Existing Devices Semi-flush 24 VDC 2.7 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE

A. Where wire is installed in conduit the following wire shall be used: - When a box contains more than (4) cables, all cables shall be marked with 3M tape. - SLC 18-2c TSP type - NAC 14-2c AWG type FPL - 24VDC 14-2c AWG type FPL - Detection Circuits - Signal Circuits




Page 5


A. The Manufacturer shall provide on-site technical installation supervision and support. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work (if applicable) shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.

B. Include on-site services of a NICET-certified technician as specified to provide technical installation support for panel startup, program editing, trouble shooting of the Fire Protective Signaling System Control Panel, and assistance to the Installer for one complete final system checkout in a accordance with the Field Quality Control section of these specifications. The Manufacturer shall also provide to the Owner, or Owner’s Representatives, upon completion of installation, instruction of system operations. C. The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from inside and the outside of the fire alarm equipment cabinets after completion of the installation.

D. All junction box covers shall be painted red. Wiring color code shall be maintained throughout the installation.

E. Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all applicable codes, and Manufacturer’s recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with all applicable codes and standards. Before requesting final approval of the installation, the installing contractor shall furnish a written statement to the effect that the system has been installed in accordance with approved plans and tested in accordance with the Manufacturer’s specifications and the appropriate NFPA requirements.

F. A Certificate of Completion Form (NFPA 72) shall be prepared. Part 1, 2, and 4 through 10 shall be completed after the system is installed and the installation wiring has been checked. Part 3 shall be completed after the operational acceptance tests have been complete. A preliminary copy shall be provided at the time operational acceptance test are requested and a final copy along with the as-built drawings and owner’s manual upon request for final acceptance.

G. Training of the Owner shall include all training necessary to allow selected personnel to

program the system to reflect any changes which take place after final acceptance of system.

H. Interconnect School Lock-Down buttons to release all door hold open devices upon

activation. 3.2 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Interior Locations: In raceways.

B. Exposed Interior Locations: In raceways.




Page 6

C. Above Accessible Ceilings: In cable tray or supports per code.

D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: In raceway.

E. Exterior Locations: In raceways.

F. Underground Locations: In raceways. 3.3 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Notifier END OF SECTION 283100




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 311000 – SITE CLEARING

Page 1

SECTION 31 10 00

SITE CLEARING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Removal and disposal of vegetation and topsoil.

2. Clearing and grubbing.

3. Removal and disposal of pavements.

4. Removal and disposal of miscellaneous construction.

1.02 PROTECTION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Provide protection necessary to prevent damage to the existing conditions indicated to

remain in place.

B. Restore damaged areas to their original condition, as acceptable to the parties having

jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SITE CLEARING

A. Remove vegetation, improvements, or obstructions interfering with the installation of new

construction. Remove such items elsewhere on the site or premises as specifically

indicated.

B. Mark trees to be removed and notify Engineer/Landscape Architect for review prior to

removal.

C. Clear the site of trees, stumps, roots, shrubs, or other vegetation, except for those indicated

to remain standing.

D. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through the ground surface

or to the depths indicated. Stumps located in areas to be landscaped can be ground down

to 18” below finished grade.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 311000 – SITE CLEARING

Page 2

E. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipes or conduits as shown on the Plans

is also included in this section.

F. Remove and dispose of pavements identified on the plans. Sawcut all edges of pavements

to remain.

END OF SECTION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 312000 – EARTH WORK

Page - 1 -

SECTION 31 20 00

EARTH WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Preparing subgrades for structures and concrete/bituminous pavements.

2. Fill material as required to construct grades as shown.

3. Building and foundation excavation and backfilling.

4. Stormwater basin excavating.

5. Rough and final grading.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Material meeting the requirements of Section 32 05 00 and as recommended in

the geotechnical evaluation report.

B. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

C. Drainage Aggregate: Backfill materials located directly within a drainage trench to provide

drainage to the drain tile.

D. Engineered Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades within building and pavement

areas.

E. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and

boulders of rock material ¾ cubic yards or more in volume that exceed standard

penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches when tested by an independent geotechnical

testing agency, per ASTM D1586.

F. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, tanks, curbs, mechanical and

electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or

below ground surface.

G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of fill

or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

H. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground

services within buildings.

I. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade

elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Geotechnical Engineer.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page - 2 -

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture.

B. Material Test Reports: From qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results

for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:

1. Classification per ASTM D2487of each soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

2. Laboratory compaction curve per ASTM D698 for each soil material proposed for fill

and backfill.

C. Pre-excavation/demolition photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction

and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage

caused by earthwork operations. Submit photographs to Owner/Construction Manager

before earthwork begins.


A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified per

ASTM E329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented per ASTM

D3740 and ASTM E548.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others

unless permitted in writing by Owner or Architect and then only after arranging to provide

temporary utility services per requirements indicated.

1. Notify Construction Manager/Engineer not less than 2 days in advance of proposed

utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Construction Manager’s written

permission.

3. Contact Gopher State One Call before excavating.

4. Retain the services of a private utility locating company to locate utilities not

covered by the Gopher State One Call system.

5. The utilities shown on the Plans are approximate only. Provide adequate means of

protection during excavation operations. Properly cap, raise, or lower to grade

existing valve covers, cleanouts, manholes, drop inlets, or other utilities as shown

on the Plans.

6. Consult utility owner immediately for directions if uncharted or incorrectly charted

piping or other utilities are encountered during the excavation. Cooperate with the

Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in

operation. The Contractor shall repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the

utility owner at no expense to the Owner.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page - 3 -

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be

removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.

C. Data from, Geotechnical Evaluation Report, included in this project manual was used for

basis of design. This information is not intended as representations or warranties of

accuracy or continuity between soils information. It is expressly understood that Owner will

not be responsible for interpretations drawn there from Contractor. Data is made available

for convenience of Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide imported soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not

available from excavations. All excess materials shall be removed from the site and properly

disposed of.

B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, SW, and SP, or

combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension,

debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT per

ASTM D2487, or combination of these groups, unless approved by Geotechnical Consultant.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent

of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Borrow and backfill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,

stone, and/or sand. See Aggregates Section for additional information and requirements. All

fill materials shall also be approved by Project Geotechnical Engineer.

E. Topsoil: Topsoil salvaged from on-site can be re-used. If additional materials are required,

the topsoil shall be new and imported material. The topsoil, whether it is new or salvaged,

should be screened and pulverized. The topsoil should be dry and ready to be fine graded.

F. Structural Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, stone,

and/or sand; ASTM D2940; with 100 percent passing 2 inch sieve, less than 40% passing the

No. 40 sieve, and not more than 12 percent passing No. 200 sieve. Structural fill shall also

be approved by Project Geotechnical Engineer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page - 4 -

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused

by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other potential hazards

created by earthwork operations.

B. Prepare subgrade for earthwork operations, including removal of vegetation, topsoil,

debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface.

C. Protect and maintain all erosion and sedimentation controls.

D. Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against

freezing temperatures or frost.

3.02 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation is Unclassified, and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated,

regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered.

1. Earth Excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other

obstructions visible on ground surface; underground structures, utilities and other

items indicated to be demolished and removed; together with earth and other

materials encountered that are not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.

3.03 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS

A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances and requirements of agencies having

jurisdiction.

B. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction.

Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of

material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until

completion of backfilling.

3.04 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on

prepared subgrades, and from flooding project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water

accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to

accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage

ditches.

2. Install dewatering system as required to keep subgrades dry and convey ground

water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.

Refer to Project geotechnical report and addenda for information related to ground

water elevations.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page - 5 -

3. Dewatering systems to include measures to prevent sediment transport in

accordance with MPCA regulations.

C. All dewatering required to complete the work under this contract is considered incidental.

3.05 EXPLOSIVES

A. The use of explosives is not permitted.

3.06 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS

A. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and

shape stockpiles for proper drainage. Provide erosion and sediment control measures in

accordance with MPCA guidelines.

B. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip

line of trees indicated to remain.

C. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials off site.

3.07 EXCAVATION OF PAVEMENTS

A. Saw cut pavements and excavate underlying materials to comply with cross-sections,

elevations and grades as shown.

3.08 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION

A. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less

than 35 degrees F.

3.09 BACKFILL AND FILL

A. General: Place soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area

classification listed below (see geotechnical evaluation report for additional information)

using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section and/or the Aggregates specification

section.

1. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.

2. Under pavements, use satisfactory excavated or granular borrow materials in the

upper 3 feet of the subgrade as shown on the plans and details. Materials are to be

placed up to the bottom of the aggregate base in pavement areas.

3. Under the structures, use satisfactory excavated, structural fill or combination.

Refer to the geotechnical report for specific requirements.

4. When backfilling is performed during freezing conditions (winter construction) non-

frost susceptible granular backfill should be used. Frost should not be allowed to

penetrate below footings and frozen soils should not be used for backfill.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page - 6 -

5. Under piping and conduit, use granular borrow for bedding and for correction of

unauthorized excavation. Shape excavation bottom to fit bottom 90 degrees of

cylinder.

6. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18 inches of

column or wall footings and that are carried below bottom of such footings or that

pass under wall footings. Place concrete level to bottom of adjacent footing.

7. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling

is authorized by Owner’s Geotechnical Consultant. Use care in backfilling to avoid

damage or displacement of pipe systems.

B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the

following:

1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, damp-

proofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Approval of exposed subgrade materials by Geotechnical consultant.

3. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities have

been performed and recorded.

4. Removal of concrete formwork.

5. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials.

Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in

manner to prevent settlement of the structure or utilities, or leave in place if

required.

6. Removal of trash and debris from excavation.

7. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported

walls.

3.10 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION

A. Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials,

obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills.

B. Inspection: Prior to placement of fill, excavations shall be inspected by the Geotechnical

Engineer to verify that all unsuitable materials have been properly removed. Where the soil

borings of the geotechnical consultant indicates that organic, soft or otherwise unsuitable

soils are present, test pits will be required to determine the suitability of the existing soils.

1. Exposed soils at the bottom of the excavation shall be compacted with a large

vibratory roller to not less than 98% standard proctor density (ASTM D698).

2. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under

"Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize,

moisture-condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth

and percentage of maximum density.

C. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 12 inches in loose depth for material

compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 6 inches in loose depth for

material compacted by hand-operated tampers.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page - 7 -

D. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum

moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or

relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on

surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

E. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, or conduit to required

elevations. Prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement of piping

or conduit by carrying material uniformly around structure, piping, or conduit to

approximately same elevation in each lift.

F. Control soil and fill compaction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for

each area classification indicated below. Correct improperly compacted areas or lifts as

directed by Geotechnical Engineer if soil density tests indicate inadequate compaction.

G. Compact soil to not less than the specified percentages of maximum density, in accordance

with ASTM D698 (see geotechnical report for additional requirements).

H. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned

before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material.

Apply water in minimum quantity as necessary to prevent free water from appearing on

surface during or subsequent to compaction operations.

1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit

compaction to specified density.

2. Stockpile or spread soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to

permit compaction. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until

moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value.

3.11 ROUGH GRADING

A. Remove topsoil from areas to be excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded, without mixing

with foreign materials. Stockpile on-site for re-use upon completion of grading operations.

B. Do not remove topsoil when wet.

C. Make soil corrections defined in the Geotechnical Report; follow procedures and use

materials defined in the Report. Generally:

1. For structures, including footings and isolated column footings, excavate full depth

to remove topsoil, organic and fill soils and and expose natural glacial soils. Exposed

subgrade soils should be evaluated by the project geotechnical engineer to

determine their suitability for support of foundation and slab loads.

a. If excavation extends below required footing bearing elevation, oversize

laterally beyond the outside edges of the foundations at a ratio of 1:1

lateral oversize.

b. Where excavations are adjacent to existing foundations, excavations should




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page - 8 -

not extend within a zone extending outward a distance of 5 feet from the

existing slab or footing and then down and outward at a slope of 1:1. The

geotechnical consultant should evaluate the suitability of the remaining

soils for foundation and slab support. If excavations are required within

these limits, ground improvement, retention or underpinning may be

required, as directed by the geotechnical consultant.

c. Obtain approval of on-site geotechnical consultant before proceeding with

compaction and fill work.

d. Surface compact exposed natural soil surface.

e. Place and compact backfill soils; see Geotechnical evaluation report, along

with structural plan notes and Section 32 05 00 for additional requirements.

2. For pavement surfaces, subcut the existing soil to allow the new pavement section.

Obtain approval of on-site Geotechnical consultant before proceeding with surface

compaction of the exposed, existing soil surface.

D. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded.

E. Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture

content.

F. When excavations extend below footing and slab bearing elevations, oversize the

excavation horizontally 1 foot for every foot of excavation depth below the indicated

bearing elevation.

G. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.

H. Benching Slopes: Horizontally bench existing slopes greater than 1:4 to key fill material to

slope for firm bearing.

I. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill.

3.12 FINISH GRADING

A. Before Finish Grading:

1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected and tested.

2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted.

B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch in size. Remove soil

contaminated with petroleum products.

C. Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches.

D. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 6

inches.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page - 9 -

E. Place topsoil in areas where seeding, sodding, and planting are indicated.

F. Place topsoil where required to level finish grade.

G. Place topsoil to the following compacted thicknesses:

1. Areas where seed is installed: 4 inches.

2. Areas where sod is installed: 4 inches.

H. Place topsoil during dry weather.

I. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading.

J. Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage.

K. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour

of subgrade.

L. Lightly compact placed topsoil.

3.13 TOLERANCES

A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including

adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact

with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated, or between

such points and existing grades.

B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from

structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes and

as follows:

1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than

0.10-foot above or below required subgrade elevations.

2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade, and cross-section, with

finish surface not more than 0.10-foot above or below required subgrade elevation.

3. Pavements: Shape surface or areas under pavement to line, grade, and cross-

section, with finish surface not more than 0.5-inch above or below required

subgrade elevation. Subgrade shall be graded to drain to drain tile locations.

C. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated

percentage of maximum or relative density for each area classification.

3.14 TRENCHING

A. Notify Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area

until notified to resume work.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page - 10 -

B. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored.

C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

D. Cut trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities.

E. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter.

F. Remove large stones and other hard matter that could damage piping or impede consistent

backfilling or compaction.

G. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site.

H. Remove excess excavated material from site.

I. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill.

J. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill

material.

K. Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into

excavation.


A. Quality assurance testing is the responsibility of the Owner. The Owner shall employ the

services of an independent materials testing firm to provide the final test information. The

Contractor may use their own personnel to provide tests of the materials during the

placement and compaction operations; however, an independent testing firm must take the

final tests. The testing firm shall test the materials as construction work is performed.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed

with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed Work comply

with requirements.

C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place per ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, ASTM

D2922, and ASTM D2937, as applicable. Perform tests at the following locations and

frequencies:

Description

Minimum %

Standard Proctor

Minimum Tests/

Unit Area/Lift




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page - 11 -

Natural sub-grade

Below pavements and

structures

Base aggregate

Landscape fill areas

Utility trenches (except under

slabs and pavements)

92%

100% (top 3’)

95% (below 3’)

100%

92%

95%

1/250 sq. yds.

1/250 sq. yds.

1/250 sq. yds.

1/250 sq. yds.

1/100 ln. ft.

D. Field Density Test Report shall clearly identify the following information for each test:

1. Horizontal and vertical location of test.

2. Material type being tested.

3. Proctor test method.

4. Maximum proctor density.

5. Specified density.

6. Optimum moisture density.

7. Field test method.

8. Actual moisture content.

9. Actual dry density.

10. Pass/fail indication.

E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of

compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth

required; re-compact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. Consult Project

Geotechnical Engineer for additional or supplemental recommendations.

F. After all grading, backfilling and planting is completed within the infiltration basins, these

areas shall be flood tested by the contractor to verify that the required volume of

infiltration water for the simulated 1 inch rain fall event draws down within 48 hours. If the

flood testing indicates that it requires more than 48 hours for the water to draw down,

corrections to the infiltration basin will be required to bring the draw down time to less

than 48 hours. These corrections will be made at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.16 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion.

Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Where non frost susceptible soils and drainage aggregate have been installed, protect these

areas from settlement during construction. This may require the installation of additional

erosion control measures.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page - 12 -

C. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially

completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to

subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Engineer;

reshape and re-compact.

D. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,

backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent

Work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.17 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,

trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner’s property.

END OF SECTION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 312500 – TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL

Page 1

SECTION 31 25 00

TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Temporary Erosion Prevention and Sediment Control.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CATCH BASIN INLET PROTECTION

A. Prefabricated sediment control devices designed for use in catch basin structures in the size

and shape for proper installation. Devices installed on curb inlets shall protect the curb

opening.

1. InfraSafe Debris Collection Device

2. Wimco Road Drain

3. Dandy (Curb) Sack

4. Approved equal on Mn/DOT’s approved product list.

B. In grass areas, silt fence backed by wire mesh reinforcing installed in a 4’ by 4’ square may

be used.

2.02 SILT FENCE FABRIC

A. Ten Cate Mirafi 100X or approved equal woven fabric of polypropylene fibers treated to

resist degradation caused by exposure to sunlight, resistant to soil chemicals, mildew, and

insects. The fabric shall be non-biodegradable with the following properties:

Apparent Opening Size, ASTM D4751 USS #30 maximum

Minimum Weight 2.5 oz/sq. yd.

Tearing Strength, ASTM D4533 65 lb. minimum

Sediment Retention Efficiency 80% minimum

Flow Rate, ASTM D4491 10 gal/min/ft² Minimum

UV Resistance at 500 hours, ASTM 4355,% 70 minimum

B. The silt fence shall be ultraviolet stable and have high tear resistance and low permeability.

2.03 ROCK CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE

A. Washed aggregate with a nominal size of 1.5”.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 2

2.04 EROSION CONTROL FABRIC

A. North American Green DS150. (Short Term Erosion Control, 45 to 60 days; 3:1 to 2:1 slopes)

1. Material Data Requirements:

Top net: Lightweight accelerated photodegradable

polypropylene, 1.64 lbs./ 1,000 square feet

Bottom net: Lightweight photodegradable polypropylene,

1.64 lbs./ 1,000 square feet

Matrix: 100% Straw at 0.5 lbs./ square yard

Thread: Degradable

B. Approved equal.

2.05 SEDIMENT LOGS

A. Straw, wood fiber, compost, or rock filter log meeting Mn/DOT 3897, size as indicated on

the plans.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Installation techniques shall be in accordance with the Minnesota Construction Site Erosion

and Sediment Control Planning Handbook and Minnesota Pollution Control Agency Best

Management Practices.

B. Perimeter and down gradient sediment control measures shall be installed prior to land

disturbing activity. Install intermediate and temporary measures as construction progresses.

C. Contractor personnel overseeing the SWPPP and installing and maintaining of BMPs shall be

in compliance with the training requirements of the MPCA Stormwater Permit for

Construction Activity.

D. Infiltration areas shall be protected from sediment of ongoing construction activities.

3.02 INLET PROTECTION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 3

3.03 SILT FENCE FABRIC

A. Erect posts to support the silt fence fabric with post spacing maximum of 8 feet on-center.

B. Install the fabric and firmly attach to the posts. Dig a trench along the intended face line

and cover the fabric, or lay the bottom 6 inches on the ground and backfill over the fabric to

create a good seal.

3.04 ROCK CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE

A. Construct the rock construction entrance a minimum of 20 feet wide and 50 feet in length,

over soil separation fabric.

3.05 EROSION CONTROL FABRIC

A. The installation of the erosion control fabric shall be in strict compliance with the

manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Prepare the soil before installing the blankets, including the application of fertilizer and

seed.

C. Staple the fabric onto the slopes as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.06 SEDIMENT LOGS

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.07 INSPECTION

A. The Contractor shall inspect the entire site immediately after each rainfall event greater

than 0.5 inches in 24 hours, daily during prolonged rainfall, and at least every 7 days.

Inspections must include surface waters including drainage ditches and conveyance systems,

for evidence of erosion and sediment deposit.

B. The Contractor shall inspect adjacent streets for vehicle tracking of sediment daily.

3.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Remove sediment when it reaches 1/3 the capacity of the BMP.

B. BMPs shall be repaired or replaced when they become damaged, clogged, or otherwise

ineffective.

C. Maintenance and repairs shall be performed within 24 hours of discovery or as soon as field

conditions allow access.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 4

D. Sweeping of tracked sediments on pavements shall be performed daily.

E. Removal and stabilization of sediment deposited in surface waters shall be performed

within 7 days of discovery.

F. BMPs shall remain in place and be maintained until final stabilization is established.

3.09 RECORD KEEPING

A. The SWPPP shall be kept onsite at all times.

B. All inspections, maintenance, and changes shall be recorded in the SWPPP.

3.10 CLEANUP

A. BMPs shall be removed when the up gradient areas have been permanently revegetated or

paved.

END OF SECTION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 313000 – GEOTEXTILES AND FABRIC

Page 1

SECTION 31 30 00

GEOTEXTILES AND FABRICS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Landscaping weed control fabric.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D1777, Standard Test Method for Thickness of Textile Material

B. ASTM D3786, Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Knitted Goods and Non-

woven Fabrics.

C. ASTM D4355, Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light,

Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type

D. ASTM D4491, Test Method for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity.

E. ASTM D4533, Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles.

F. ASTM D4632, Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles.

G. ASTM D4751, Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile.

H. ASTM D4759, Standard Practice for Determining the Specification Performance of

Geosynthetics

I. ASTM D4833, Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes

and Related Products

J. ASTM D5199, Standard Test Method for Measuring the Normal Thickness of Geosynthetics

K. ASTM D5261, Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass per Unit Area of Geotextile

L. ASTM D5732, Standard Test Method for Stiffness of Nonwoven Fabrics Using the Cantilever

Test




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 313000 – GEOTEXTILES AND FABRIC

Page 2

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer certification from the geotextile manufacturer that the fabrics used

in the Work meets the specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LANDSCAPING WEED CONTROL FABRIC

A. Dupont GreenVista landscaping fabric, Shaw Fabrics Polyscape or approved equal non-

woven, spun bonded fabric constructed of polypropylene fibers treated to resist

degradation caused by exposure to sunlight, resistant to soil chemicals, mildew, and insects.

The fabric shall be non-biodegradable with the following properties:

Unit Weight, ASTM D5261 2.65 oz/sq. yd.

Grab Tensile Strength, ASTM D4632 105 lb. minimum

Puncture Strength, ASTM D4833 35 lb. minimum

Permeability/Flow Rate, ASTM D4491 115 gal/ min/sq. ft.

Thickness, ASTM D5199 15 mils minimum

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 LANDSCAPING WEED CONTROL FABRIC

A. Prior to installation, remove all potentially damaging objects (i.e., large angular rocks;

pointed sticks, etc.) and the underlying soil should be graded so the fabric will lay smooth

and flat on the ground.

B. Where potentially difficult to control weeds are abundant (e.g., quack grass), an herbicide

should be applied to the soil to prevent weeds from growing to and through seams and

edges from below.

C. Seams between the fabric materials should be overlapped 6" and the fabric should be

tightly fitted around any objects.

D. At the edge of the fabric, construct a shallow trench 6" around the perimeter of the

installation site to hold the edges in place and keep them from becoming exposed.

E. The fabric should then be covered with 4" to hold the fabric in place and protect the fabric

from ultraviolet light.

END OF SECTION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 320500 – AGGREGATES

Page 1

SECTION 32 05 00

AGGREGATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Aggregate base

2. Engineered fill

3. Backfill

4. Riprap

5. Washed rock

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit laboratory test reports indicating the proposed aggregate grading meets the

requirements specified herein.

B. Submit laboratory test results indicating the proposed aggregate base material meets the

Los Angeles Abrasion requirements, and minimum percent crushed as specified herein.

C. The information must be current and represent the material to be supplied to the project

site. If test information is not available from the supplier, the Contractor shall make

arrangements and pay for required tests.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Minnesota Department of Transportation (Mn/DOT) Standard Specifications for

Construction, Current Edition

1. Section 3601 - Riprap Material

B. Minnesota Department of Transportation (Mn/DOT) Materials Lab Supplemental

Specifications for Construction, Current Edition

1. Section 3138 - Aggregate for Surface and Base Courses

2. Section 3149 - Granular Material

C. ASTM C88, Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or

Magnesium Sulfate

D. ASTM C127, Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and

Absorption of Course Aggregate




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 2

E. ASTM C131, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Sized Coarse

Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.

F. ASTM D698, Standard Test Method for Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil-

Aggregate Mixtures, using a 5.5 pound Rammer and 12-inch Drop.

G. ASTM D1557, Standard Test Method for Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil-

Aggregate Mixtures, using a 10.0 pound Rammer and 18-inch Drop.

H. ASTM D2487, Standard Test Method for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.

I. ASTM D2922, Standard Test Method for Density of Soils and Soil-Aggregate In- Place by

Nuclear Method (Shallow Depth).

J. ASTM D4318, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of

Soils


A. In-place field density tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM D2922.

B. The testing laboratory shall submit test reports to the Engineer and Contractor within 48

hours after the test has been performed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 AGGREGATE BASE

A. Class 5 Aggregate Base.

1. Crushed rock graded according to Mn/DOT 3138 Class 5 Gradation as follows:

Percent Passing by Weight

Sieve Size < 25% Recycled Aggregate

≥ 25% Recycled Aggregate

< 75% Recycled Concrete > 75% Recycled Concrete

Class 5 Class 5Q Class 5 Class 5Q Class 5 Class 5Q

2 inch - 100 - 100 - 100

1-1/2 inch - - 100 - 100 -

1 inch 100 65 - 95 - 65 - 95 - 65 - 95

3/4 inch 90 - 100 45 - 85 90 - 100 45 - 85 90 - 100 45 - 85

3/8 inch 50 - 90 35 - 70 50 - 90 35 - 70 50 - 90 35 - 70

No. 4 35 - 80 15 - 45 35 - 80 15 - 45 35 - 80 15 - 45

No. 10 20 - 65 10 - 30 20 - 65 10 - 30 20 - 65 10 - 30

No. 40 10 - 35 5 - 25 10 - 35 5 - 25 0 - 8 0 - 8

No. 200 3 - 10 3 - 10 0 - 10 0 - 10 0 - 3 0 - 3




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 3

2. The coarse aggregate (that portion retained on the No. 4 sieve) shall have a percent

of wear of not more than 40 at 500 revolutions as determined by ASTM C131.

3. Class 5 aggregate shall contain not more than 10 percent shale in the total sample

except that when the part passing a No. 200 sieve exceeds 7 percent, the

percentage of shale in the sample shall not exceed 7 percent.

B. Recycled Content

1. Recycled aggregates composed only of recycled asphalt pavement (RAP), recycled

concrete materials, recycled aggregate materials, or certified recycled glass, may be

substituted for virgin aggregates.

2. Recycled aggregates must meet the requirements of the following table:

Requirement Classes 1, 3, 4, 5, 5Q, and 6

Maximum Bitumen Content of Composite 3.50%

Maximum Masonry Block % 10%

Maximum Percentage of Glass 1 10%

Maximum Size of Glass 1 3/4" [19 mm]

Crushing (Class 5, 5Q and 6) 2 10% for Class 5 and 5Q 3

15% for Class 6 3

1 Glass must meet the requirements on the grading and base website. Combine glass with other

aggregates during the crushing operation.

2 Material crushed from quarries is considered crushed material

3 If material is ≥ 20% (RAP + Concrete), Class 5 and 5Q crushing requirements are met

3 If material is ≥ 30% (RAP + Concrete), Class 6 crushing requirement is met

2.02 ENGINEERED FILL

A. Granular material graded according to Mn/DOT 3149.2E as follows:

Sieve Size Percent Passing By Weight

2 inch 100

No. 4 35 - 100

No. 10 20 - 70

No. 40 10 - 35

No. 200 3.0 - 10.5




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 4

2.03 GENERAL BACKFILL

A. Clean, fine earth, sand, free from organic material, rocks, roots, brush, stumps or other

large objects.

B. The largest particle size shall be less than 2 inches in diameter.

C. The backfill shall be brought up to within the specified elevation less the depth of topsoil

required for the project.

2.04 UNSUITABLE MATERIALS

A. Unsuitable soils include soils classified under ASTM D2487, which fall in the classifications of

PT, OH, CH, MH, OL, CL, or ML.

2.05 RIPRAP MATERIAL

A. The Contractor shall furnish only durable, field quarry, stone of the quality approved by the

Engineer meeting the following gradation requirements for (Class III) per MnDOT

3601,Table 3601-1:

Approximate % of Total Mass

Class of Riprap

Sieve Size

(inches) I II III IV V

30 -- -- -- -- 100

24 -- -- -- 100 --

21 -- -- -- -- 75

18 -- -- 100 -- --

15 -- -- -- 75 50

12 -- 100 75 50 --

9 -- 75 50 -- --

6 100 50 -- -- 10

4 -- -- -- 10 --

3 50 -- 10 -- --

2 -- 10 -- -- --

1 10 -- -- -- --

2.06 WASHED ROCK

A. Clean, washed, free draining aggregate excluding crushed carbonate quarry rock, crushed

concrete and salvaged bituminous mixtures, meeting the following general gradation

requirements.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 5

Sieve Size Percent Passing By Weight

2 inch 100

1 inch 50 - 80

1/2 inch 20 - 60

No. 4 0 - 5

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 AGGREGATE BASE AND ENGINEERED FILL PLACEMENT

A. Deposit and spread in uniform 6-inch maximum thickness layers (after compaction) without

segregation of size.

B. Compact each layer of material until there is no further evidence of consolidation using a

sheeps foot roller, pneumatic tired roller, or vibratory steel roller as approved by the

Engineer.

C. Compact each layer of material to at least 100% of maximum dry density as determined in

accordance with ASTM D698, the Standard Proctor Method. Use equipment that is

consistently capable of achieving the required degree of compaction. Compact each layer

over its entire area while the material is at the required moisture content.

D. Apply water to the material if the moisture content is below optimum during the mixing,

spreading and compacting operations, when and in the amounts directed by the Engineer,

as considered necessary for proper compaction.

E. Flooding, ponding, or jetting shall not be used for compaction.

3.02 BACKFILL PLACEMENT

A. Deposit and spread in uniform 8-inch minimum thick layers as shown on the Plans.

B. Compact each layer until there is no further evidence of consolidation using hand or

machine operated compaction equipment.

3.03 RIPRAP MATERIAL PLACEMENT

A. Deposit and spread in uniform layers as shown on the Plans. The placement of the riprap

shall be performed in a manner to not break any of the rocks into smaller pieces.

B. The riprap material shall be placed over soil separation fabric, unless otherwise specified.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 6


A. Quality assurance testing is the responsibility of the Owner. The Owner shall employ the

services of an independent materials testing firm to provide the final test information. The

Contractor may use their own personnel to provide tests of the materials during the



1. The Contractor shall arrange for the laboratory to perform field density tests in

accordance with ASTM D2922 (nuclear densometer method).

2. Laboratory shall make at least one random field density test of new materials for

every 250 square yards of area for each 12 inch depth of material, but in no case

less than one test per 12 inch depth.

B. Provide additional density testing if the test results are below the specified density until

passing test results are achieved. The additional tests shall be performed at the

Contractor’s expense.

C. Inspections will be performed during the excavation for the following.

1. Examination of fill soil, including the thickness and compaction of fill layers.

END OF SECTION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 320700 – FULL DEPTH RECLAMATION

Page 1

SECTION 32 07 00

FULL DEPTH BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT RECLAMATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Full Depth Bituminous Pavement Reclamation

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit laboratory test reports indicating the proposed aggregate grading meets the

requirements specified herein.

B. Submit laboratory test results indicating the proposed aggregate base material meets the Los

Angeles Abrasion requirements, and minimum percent crushed as specified herein.

C. The information must be current and represent the material to be supplied to the project site.

If test information is not available from the supplier, the Contractor shall make arrangements

and pay for required tests.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Minnesota Department of Transportation (Mn/DOT) Materials Supplemental Specifications

for Construction, Current Edition

1. Section 2215, Full Depth Reclamation (FDR).

2. Section 3135, Modified Aggregate Bases.

3. Section 2105, Excavation and Embankment


A. Quality assurance personnel shall remain at the project site on a full-time basis during full

depth pavement reclamation.

B. Compaction shall be by the Ordinary Compaction Method, unless stated otherwise.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 2

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Before beginning pulverization, remove vegetation and topsoil adjacent to the surface.

3.02 PULVERIZING OPERATION

A. Bituminous full depth reclamation may only be used above the bottom of the base aggregate

elevation, as defined in Mn/DOT 2105

B. Use a road reclaiming machine capable of uniformly pulverizing the pavement and the

underlying layer to the specified depth and gradation

C. Protect and avoid damaging existing structures during pulverization

D. Blend, add water, spread, compact, and shape pulverized material by the end of the workday

E. Remove all reclaimed pavement pieces that would be retained on the 3-inch sieve from

within the pavement area.

3.03 PLACING AND COMPACTING

A. If needed to achieve required elevation, uniformly spread additional aggregate material

across the surface before blending it into the reclaim mixture

B. Uniformly mix reclaim material before spreading

C. Spread and compact the reclamation material to the profile and cross section shown on the

plans before placing the next layer

D. Maintain the moisture content from 3 to 7 percent by dry weight during compaction

E. For lift thicknesses of 3 inches or less, compact using a pneumatic-tired roller in compliance

with Mn/DOT 2215.3.B.2a

F. For lift thickness between 3 inches and 6 inches, compact using both a pneumatic-tired and

pad foot vibratory rollers in compliance with Mn/DOT 2215.3.B.2

G. Place and compact to support traffic, while allowing no greater than ½ inch of surface

displacement, when measured using a straightedge




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 3


A. Quality assurance testing is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall employ

the services of an independent materials testing firm to provide the final test information.

The Contractor may use their own personnel to provide tests of the materials during the



END OF SECTION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 4

<This Page Intentionally Left Blank>




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 321000 – PLANT MIX BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT

Page 1

SECTION 32 10 00

PLANT MIX BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Plant mix bituminous pavement

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a job mix formula to the Engineer at least 7 days in advance of plant mix bituminous

paving, indicating conformance with the specifications. It shall be prepared by the Minnesota

Department of Transportation or a commercial laboratory and signed by a registered

Professional Engineer verifying that the job mix and the mix aggregate meet the specifications

contained herein.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Minnesota Department of Transportation (MNDOT) Materials Supplemental Specifications for


1. Section 2360, Plant Mixed Asphalt Pavement.

2. Section 2357, Bituminous Tack Coat.

3. Section 3139, Graded Aggregate for Bituminous Mixtures.

B. AASHTO M226, Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement.

AASHTO T304, Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate.

AASHTO T176, Test Method for Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soil by use of the Sand

Equivalent.

C. ASTM C131, Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by

Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.

D. ASTM D1559, Test Method for Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using

Marshall Apparatus.

E. ASTM D2041, Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of

Bituminous Paving Mixtures.

F. ASTM D3203, Test Method for Percent Air Voids in Compacted Dense and Open Bituminous

Paving Mixtures.

G. ASTM D4791, Test Method for Flat or Elongated Particles in Course Aggregate.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 2

H. ASTM D5821, Test Method for Determining the Percentage of Fractured Particles in Coarse

Aggregate.

I. International Building Code, Chapter 11.

J. International Code Council A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

K. Minnesota Accessibility Code, Minnesota Rules Chapter 1341.


A. Quality assurance personnel shall remain at the project site on a full-time basis during plant

mix bituminous placement.

B. Compaction shall be by the Ordinary Compaction Method, unless stated otherwise.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Provide a warranty for the paving work against failure of defects for a period of one year after

the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. Repair or replace, to the satisfaction of the

Owner and Engineer, failed or defective work that occurs during the warranty period at no

cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PLANT MIXED ASPHALT PAVEMENTS AGGREGATE GRADATIONS

Broad Band Aggregate Gradation for Asphalt Mixtures

(% passing of total washed aggregate)

Sieve Size A B C D

1” 100

3/4” 100¹ 85-100

1/2” 100¹ 85-100 45-90

3/8” 85-100 35-90 - 100

No. 4 60-90 30-80 30-75 65-95

No. 8 45-70 25-65 25-60 45-80

No. 200 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0 3.0-8.0

¹With the approval of the Engineer, the gradation broadband for the maximum aggregate size may

be reduced to 97% passing for mixtures containing RAP, when the oversize material comes from

the RAP source. The virgin material must remain 100% passing the maximum aggregate sieve size.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 3

2.02 MIXTURE AGGREGATE REQUIREMENTS

Aggregate Blend Property

Traffic

Level

2

Traffic

Level

3

Traffic

Level

4

Traffic

Level

5

20-year Design ESAL’s <1 million 1-3 million3-10

million

10-30

million

Min. Coarse Aggregate Angularity

(ASTM D5821)

(one face / two face), %-Wear

(one face / two face), %-Non-Wear

30/-

30/-

55/-

55/-

85/80

60/ -

95/90

80/75

Min. Fine Aggregate Angularity (FAA)

(AASHTO T304, Method A)

%-Wear

%-Non-Wear40

40

42

40

44

40

45

40

Flat and Elongated Particles,

Max % by weight, (ASTM D4791)-

10

(5:1 ratio)

10

(5:1 ratio)

10

(5:1 ratio)

Min. Sand Equivalent (AASHTO T 176) - - 45 45

Max. Total Spall in fraction retained

on the #4 sieve – Wear

Non-Wear

5.0

5.0

2.5

5.0

1.0

2.5

1.0

2.5

Maximum Spall Content in Total

Sample – Wear

Non-Wear

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

1.0

2.5

1.0

2.5

Maximum Percent Lumps in fraction

retained on the #4 sieve0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

Class B Carbonate Restrictions

Maximum % -#4

Final Lift/All Other Lifts100/100 100/100 80/80 50/80

Maximum % +#4

Final Lift/All Other Lifts100/100 100/100 50/100 0/100

Max. allowable scrap shingles – MWSS (1)

Wear/Non-Wear

5/5 5/5 5/5 5/5

Max. allowable scrap shingles – TOSS (1)

Final Lift/All other Lifts

5/5 5/5 0/5 0/0

(1) MWSS is manufactured waste scrap shingle and TOSS is tear-off scrap shingle




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 4

2.03 MIXTURE REQUIREMENTS

Traffic

Level

2

Traffic

Level

3

Traffic

Level

4

Traffic

Level

5

20-year Design ESAL’s <1 million 1-3 million3-10

million

10-30

million

Gyratory Mixture Requirements

Gyrations for Ndesign 40 60 90 100

% Air voids at Ndesign, wear 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0

% Air voids at Ndesign,

Non-wear and all shoulder3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0

Adjusted Asphalt Film Thickness,

minimum µ8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5

TSR*, minimum % 75 (1) 75 (1) 85 (2) 85 (2)

Fines / effective asphalt 0.6 – 1.2 0.6 – 1.2 0.6 – 1.2 0.6 – 1.2

* Use 6 inch [150 mm] specimens in accordance with 2360.2.I, “Field Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR).”

(1) MNDOT Min = 65, (2) MNDOT Min = 70

2.04 REQUIREMENTS FOR RECYCLED MATERIALS

A. Control recycled materials used in mixture by evaluating the ratio of new added asphalt

binder to total asphalt binder in accordance with Mn/DOT 2360.E.7, and as shown in the

following table.

Requirements for Ratio of Added Asphalt Binder to Total Asphalt Binder, min %

Recycled MaterialSpecified Asphalt Grade

RAS Only RAS + RAP RAP Only

PG XX-28, PG 52-34, PG 49-34, PG 64-22

Wear

Non-Wear

70

70

70

70

70

70

PG 58-34, PG 64-34, PG 70-34

Wear & Non-wear 80 80 80

2.05 PLANT-MIXED BITUMINOUS SURFACE / WEAR COURSE MNDOT 2360

A. The bituminous mix designs for the surface or wear course shall be as follows:

1. Parking lots and drives: SP 9.5 with 30% maximum RAP (SPWEA340B).

2.06 PLANT-MIXED BITUMINOUS BASE / NON-WEAR COURSE MNDOT 2360

A. The bituminous mix designs for the base or non-wear courses shall be as follows:

1. Parking lots and drives: SP 12.5 with no restrictions (SPNWB330B).




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 5

2.07 PERFORMANCE GRADE ASPHALT BINDER

A. Only Performance Grade (PG) Asphalt Binder is approved for use. The inspection, sampling

and testing of PG Asphalt Binder shall conform to the Schedule of Materials Control and the

Combined State Binder Group Method of Acceptance for Asphalt Binders.

1. Parking Lots and Drives: Grade B Binder = PG 58-28 [PG 58S-28].

2.08 TACK COAT

A. Tack coat to be used where plant mix pavement will be in contact with previously constructed

asphalt or Portland cement concrete shall be CSS-1, CSS-1H, or CRS-2 Cationic Emulsified

Asphalt. Dilution of the emulsion to 7 parts emulsion to 3 parts water is only allowed by the

supplier. No field dilution is allowed. Residual asphalt content must meet the requirements

as set forth in MNDOT 2357.

Residual Asphalt Content

Minimum Residual Asphalt Content

Emulsion Undiluted Diluted (7:3)

CSS-1 or CSS-1h 57% 40%

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Do not begin paving until deficient areas have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.

B. Pavement surfaces must be dry and completely free of dust, dirt, debris, and all loose

materials and vegetation.

C. Apply a tack coat to the vertical surface of previously constructed bituminous or concrete that

will be in contact with the plant mix bituminous. Distribute the tack coat at a rate between

0.05 and 0.07 gallons per square yard of surface for undiluted asphalt emulsion.

D. When a successive lift of plant mix bituminous is to be placed, the existing surface shall

receive a tack coat if the previous layer is dirty or over 48 hours old.

E. Complete all reconstruction repairs in accordance with the specifications.

3.02 PLANT MIX BITUMINOUS

A. Plant Mix Bituminous: The aggregate grading shall conform to the specification limits.

Asphalt cement content shall be within 0.3 percent of the job mix formula optimum asphalt

content.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 6

B. The trucks for hauling bituminous mixtures shall have tight, clean and smooth beds that have

been sprayed with a minimum amount of approved anti-adhesive agent to prevent the

mixture from adherence to the beds. Provide each truck with a cover of suitable material and

size to protect the mixture from the weather.

3.03 PLANT MIX BITUMINOUS TEMPERATURE CONTROL

A. The minimum laydown temperature in all courses (as measured behind the paver of

spreading machine) of the bituminous mixture shall be in accordance with the temperature

requirements specified herein:

Compacted Lift Thickness

Air Temp 1 inch 1 ½ inch 2 inch 3 inch or more

32 - 40 - 265 255 250

41 - 50 270 260 250 245

51 - 60 260 255 245 240

61 - 70 250 245 240 235

71 - 80 245 240 235 235

81 - 90 235 230 230 230

91 - up 230 230 230 225

B. The plant mix bituminous mixture shall not exceed 310 degrees F. or the load will be rejected

at Contractor’s expense.

3.04 PLANT MIX BITUMINOUS PLACEMENT

A. General: Place the plant mix bituminous on a prepared surface with a paver. Place

inaccessible and small areas by hand. Place each course to the required elevation, cross-

section, and compacted thickness. The in-place compacted thickness shall be plus or minus

1/4 inch of the planned thickness. Any area, which is constructed to less than the required

minimum thickness, may be removed and replaced by the Contractor at the discretion of the

Engineer, and at the Contractor’s expense.

B. Equipment: All equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be maintained and in sound

mechanical condition capable of performing the work.

C. Placement: The mixture shall be delivered to, and spread by, the plant mix bituminous paver.

The mixture shall be laid in strips to minimize the number of longitudinal joints required.

D. Paver:

1. The paver shall be a self-contained, power-propelled unit provided with adjustable

activated screed or strike-off assembly, heated, and capable of spreading and

finishing courses of plant mix bituminous material. The paver must be capable of

laying the plant mixed bituminous in widths applicable to the typical section and

thickness shown on the Plans.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 7

2. Equip the paver with a control system capable of automatically maintaining elevations

as specified. The control system shall be automatically actuated from either a

reference line or surface through which a system of mechanical sensors will maintain

the paver screed at a predetermined slope at the proper elevation to obtain the

required surface. When directed, the transfer slope control system shall be made

inoperative and the screed shall be controlled by sensor directed automatic

mechanisms, which will independently control the screed elevation from the

reference line or surface.

E. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavements, or between a successive day’s work, to

ensure a continuous bond between the adjoining work. Construction joints shall be vertical

and have the same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the bituminous

course. Contact surfaces shall be clean and a tack coat applied.

F. Wear Course: Place the surface wear course in maximum 2-inch lifts unless otherwise

specified by the Engineer.

G. Restrictions: No MNDOT bituminous mixtures shall be placed after November 1.

H. ADA Compliance: Paved slopes in handicap accessible parking stalls and access aisles shall not

exceed 2% in any direction.

3.05 COMPACTION/ROLLING

A. Compact the plant mix bituminous mixture as quickly as possible after placement.

Breakdown rolling shall immediately follow the paver. Intermediate rolling shall follow

behind the breakdown rolling. Compaction of the pavement shall continue until in-place air

voids are within the specified range. Finish rolling shall be performed at as high a

temperature as practical and shall eliminate all the marks left from breakdown and

intermediate rolling. All rolling must be completed before the bituminous mixture cools

below 180 degrees F.

B. Rollers:

1. Steel-wheeled: Self-propelled and capable of reversing without backlash, weighing

not less than 8 tons, and exerting a pressure on the rear drum of not less than 250

pounds per linear inch. When vibratory rollers are used, they shall operate at a

frequency of 8 to 10 impacts per foot.

2. Pneumatic-tired: Self-propelled, with a minimum of 7 tires, and exerting a pressure of

not less than 200 pounds per inch of rolling width.

3. Trench: Self-propelled, exerting a pressure of not less than 250 pounds per linear

inch of rear roll.

C. Rolling:




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 8

1. Unless otherwise directed, begin rolling at the side and proceed longitudinally parallel

to the paving lane centerline, overlapping each trip half the roller width, and gradually

progressing to the crown of the parking lot or roadway.

2. When the pavement abuts a previously placed lift, roll the longitudinal joint first

followed by regular rolling procedures.

3. On sloped sections, begin rolling at the low side and progress to the high side, by

overlapping the longitudinal trips parallel to the paving lane centerline.

4. Along forms, curbs, headers, walls, and other places not accessible to rollers,

thoroughly compact the mixture with hot hand tampers or with mechanical tampers.

5. The pavement shall be rolled so that no roller marks, ridges, porous spots or

impressions are visible and the resulting surface has the required elevation and

surface smoothness requirements.

D. Compaction shall be obtained by the Ordinary Compaction Method. Uniformly compact each

course until there is no further evidence of consolidation and all roller marks are eliminated.

A minimum of two rollers shall be on the site at all times. A vibratory steel roller shall be used

for breakdown and finish rolling and a pneumatic roller shall be used after breakdown, unless

directed otherwise by the Engineer.

E. Protection: Erect barricades to prohibit vehicular traffic from the pavement after final rolling

until it has fully hardened and cooled to the same temperature as the surrounding soil or

original asphalt pavement.

3.06 BITUMINOUS CURB

A. Place the bituminous mixture with an approved automatic curb machine, which shapes and

compacts the mixture to the specified cross section. Manual methods of placement will not

be permitted.

B. The alignment of the finished curb shall be true to line and elevation, within reasonable

tolerances. The finished curb shall be uniform in appearance and texture.


A. The plant mix bituminous pavement will be tested for compliance with the following project

requirements. The tests and all costs shall be provided by the Owner.

1. Asphalt Cement Content.

2. Plant mix bituminous density requirements, if necessary.

3. Thickness requirements, as specified, +/- ¼ inch.

4. Surface Smoothness, +/- 1/8 inch in 10 feet measured in any direction.

B. Test Frequency: the plant mix bituminous pavement shall be tested for mat thickness and

surface smoothness during laydown.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 9

C. The surface of the pavement when finished shall be of uniform texture, smooth, true to

crown and elevation and free from defects to the satisfaction of the Engineer. When tested

with a 10-foot straight edge in any direction, the maximum deviation of the surface shall not

exceed 1/8 inch. Unsatisfactory joints, as determined by the Engineer, will be rejected and

replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Areas showing deviations greater than 1/8 inch or

where surface water ponding will result, shall be milled, tack coated and repaved with

bituminous.

D. Remove and replace areas mixed with foreign materials or defective areas as directed by the

Engineer. Sawcut the areas, remove the existing bituminous and replace with new, hot plant

mix bituminous. Compact the area by rolling to the air voids and smoothness specified. The

removal and replacement of contaminated plant mix bituminous shall be done at no cost to

the Owner.

END OF SECTION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 10





Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 322000 – CONCRETE PAVEMENT

Page 1

SECTION 32 20 00

CONCRETE PAVEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Portland cement concrete.

2. Expansion joint material.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit at least 7 days in advance of placement, a Portland cement concrete and grout mix

design, meeting the requirements of MN/DOT specifications. The mix design shall show the

source and type of aggregate and cement; scale weight of each aggregate, cement, and

water; and volume and type of admixtures per cubic yard.

B. Coarse and fine aggregate reports indicating the source, grading, specific gravity,

absorption, and fineness modulus shall be submitted along with the concrete mix design at

least 7 days prior to placement.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Minnesota Department of Transportation (MN/DOT) Materials Lab Supplemental

Specifications for Construction, 2014 Edition and subsequent revisions.

1. Section 2301, Concrete Pavement.

2. Section 2461, Structural Concrete.

3. Section 3101, Portland Cement.

4. Section 3126, Fine Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete.

5. Section 3137, Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete.

B. ACI 214, Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete.

C. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

D. ACI 304.2R-96, Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods.

E. ACI 305, Hot Weather Concreting.

F. ACI 309, Cold Weather Concreting.

G. ACI 347, Guide to Formwork for Concrete.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 2

H. ASTM C31, Test Methods for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.

I. ASTM C33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

J. ASTM C39, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical concrete Specimens.

K. ASTM C40, Test Method for Organic Impurities in Sand for Concrete.

L. ASTM C42, Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.

M. ASTM C88, Test Method for Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or

Magnesium Sulfate.

N. ASTM C131, Test Method for Resistance to Abrasion of Small Size Coarse Aggregate by Use

of the Los Angeles Machine.

O. ASTM C143, Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.

P. ASTM C150, Specification for Portland Cement.

Q. ASTM C231, Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure

Method.

R. ASTM C260, Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

S. ASTM C309, Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for curing Concrete.

T. ASTM C494, Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

U. International Building Code, Chapter 11.

V. International Code Council A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

W. Minnesota Accessibility Code, Minnesota Rules Chapter 1341.


A. Quality assurance personnel shall perform a complete set of tests (Slump, Air Content and

Cast 4” by 8” or 6” by 12” Test Cylinders) each day concrete is placed.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Provide a warranty for the concrete work against failure of defects for a period of one year

after the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. Repair or replace, to the satisfaction

of the Owner and Engineer, failed or defective work that occurs during the warranty period




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 3

at no cost to the Owner. Excessive concrete pop-outs, greater than 5 per square yard, shall

be deemed defective.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT

A. ASTM C150, for Type I, II, III.

2.02 FINE AGGREGATE

A. Fine aggregate shall be well graded from coarse to fine; and, when tested by means of

laboratory sieves, shall conform to MN/DOT 3126 as listed below:

Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight

3/8 inch 100

No. 4 95 - 100

No. 8 80 - 100

No. 16 55 - 85

No. 30 30 - 60

No. 50* 5 - 30

No. 100 0 - 10

No. 200 0 – 2.5

B. When tested in accordance with ASTM C40, the fine aggregate shall produce a color in the

supernatant liquid no darker than the reference standard color solution.

C. Deleterious materials shall not exceed the following cumulative totals:

1. Shale, Alkali, Mika, Soft/Flaky Materials = 2.5% by weight.

2. Coal and Lignite = 0.3% by weight.

2.03 COARSE AGGREGATE

A. Aggregate shall comply with MN/DOT 3137 specifications for coarse aggregate. Class A

aggregates consisting of crushed quarry rock including quartzite, granite, gneiss, traprock

and other igneous rock types, with no more than 4% non-Class A aggregate.

B. Clean, washed, hard, durable aggregates conforming to MN/DOT 3137 specifications for

coarse aggregate and one of the following MN/DOT gradations.

Percent Passing by Weight

Sieve Size CA 45 CA 50 CA 60

1-1/4 inch 100 - -

1 inch 95 - 100 100 -

¾ inch 65 - 95 85 - 100 100




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 4

5/8 inch - - 85 - 100

3/8 inch 25 - 55 30 - 60 40 - 70

No. 4 0 - 7 0 - 12 0 – 12

C. Aggregate quality tests shall meet the following criteria.

1. When tested in accordance with ASTM C131, the coarse aggregate shall show a loss

not exceeding 40% after 500 revolutions.

2. When tested in accordance with ASTM C88, the loss resulting after five cycles shall

not exceed 15% for coarse aggregate when using magnesium sulfate.

3. Coarse aggregate shall also meet the quality requirements of MN/DOT 3137.

2.04 WATER

A. Potable, clean, and free from objectionable quantities of silty organic matter, alkali, salts,

and other impurities.

2.05 AIR-ENTRAINING AGENT

A. ASTM C260. Use sufficient air-entraining agent to provide a total air content of 5.5% to

7.5%, add to the batch in a portion of the mixing water. Batch by means of a mechanical

batcher capable of accurate measurement.

2.06 ADMIXTURES

A. Admixtures will be required at the Engineer’s discretion or, if not required, may be added at

the Contractor’s option to control the set, effect water reduction, and increase workability.

In either case, the addition of an admixture shall be at the Contractor’s expense. The use of

an admixture shall be subject to acceptance by the Engineer. Concrete containing an

admixture shall be first placed at a location determined by the Engineer. If the use of an

admixture is producing an inferior end result, the Contractor shall discontinue use of the

admixture. Admixtures specified herein shall conform to the requirement of ASTM C494.

The required quantity of cement shall be used in the mix regardless of whether or not an

admixture is used.

2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

A. The mix design shall be composed of Portland cement, coarse and fine aggregate, water,

and an air-entraining admixture, and shall be proportioned to meet the MN/DOT 2461,

designation 3F52 design, or 3F32 for mechanically placed concrete for curb and gutter.

B. Design mix shall be normal weight air-entrained concrete meeting the following criteria:

Ingredient Range of Acceptable Values

Portland Cement Type l, ll, lll,

Maximum Cementitious Content 750 lbs. per cubic yard




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 5

Max. Fly Ash Content (3F32) 30%

Max. Fly Ash Content (3F52) 25%

Max. Water/Cement Ratio (3F32) 0.42

Max. Water/Cement Ratio (3F52) 0.45

Minimum 28 Compressive Strength 4500 psi

Entrained Air Content 6.5% +/- 1.0%

Slump (3F32) 1/2 to 3 inches

Slump (3F52) 2 to 5 inches

2.08 READY-MIXED CONCRETE

A. When the concrete is mixed in a ready-mix truck, the number of revolution of the drum at

mixing speed shall not be less than 50 or more than 150. All revolutions over 150 shall be at

agitating speed.

B. Type I concrete shall be discharged within 90 minutes of the time the air entraining agent is

added at the plant.

C. Type III concrete shall be discharged within 60 minutes of the time the air entraining agent

is added at the plant.

D. In hot weather, or under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, or

when the temperature of the concrete is 85 degrees F. or above, the time between the

introduction of the cement to the aggregate and discharge shall not exceed 45 minutes.

2.09 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL

A. The expansion joint material shall consist of 1/2” fiberboard.

B. Deck-O-Foam polyethylene closed cell expansion joint filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

A. Prior to placing concrete, thoroughly wet surfaces by sprinkling. Keep surfaces moist by

frequent sprinkling up to the time of concrete placement. The surface shall be free from

standing water, mud and debris at the time of concrete placement.

B. Forms

1. Forms shall be of wood, metal, or other suitable material and shall extend for the

full depth of the concrete. Forms shall be straight, free from warp, and of sufficient

strength to resist the pressure of the concrete without displacement. Bracing and

staking of forms shall be such that the forms do not move when the plastic concrete




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 6

is placed. Forms shall be covered with an approved form release agent before

concrete placement.

2. The top surface of the forms shall show no deviations over 1/8” for the length of

the form. The face of the form shall show no deviation over ½” from a 10-foot

straight edge.

C. Hot weather concreting conditions shall have additional surface preparations and curing

provisions as specified by ACI 305.

D. Cold weather concrete conditions shall have additional surface preparations and curing

provisions as specified by ACI 306.

3.02 PLACING CONCRETE

A. The proportioning, mixing, and placing of the concrete shall be in accordance with the

requirements for the concrete specified herein. Deposit concrete in one course to prevent

segregation.

B. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by

handspading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of

concrete in accordance with ACI recommended practices.

C. Finish surface with a wooden float and light brooming. No plastering of the surface will be

permitted.

D. Outside edges of the slab and all trowelled joints shall be edged with a 1/4 inch radius-

edging tool.

E. ADA Compliance:

1. Sidewalk cross slopes shall not exceed 2%.

2. Curb ramp shall not have a slope greater than 8.33% (1:12) or height greater than

6”.

3. The maximum allowable vertical change is ¼”.

4. Vertical changes between ¼” and ½” shall be beveled at 1:2.

5. Vertical changes over ½” shall be sloped no greater than 1:12.

F. Pumping of concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 304.2R.

3.03 CONTRACTION JOINTS

A. Slabs: The joint spacing shall not exceed 2 times (in feet) the slab thickness (in inches) i.e. a

4” thick slab shall not have joints spaced more than 8’ by 8’. Where applicable, the joint

spacing shall match the existing joint spacing.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 7

B. Sidewalks: The joint spacing shall not exceed the width of the sidewalk or 2 times (in feet)

the slab thickness (in inches) i.e. a 5’ wide sidewalk shall have perpendicular joints every 5’

or a 4” thick slab shall not have joints spaced more than 8’ by 8’. Where applicable, the

joint spacing shall match the existing joint spacing.

C. Curb and Gutter: The perpendicular joint spacing shall not exceed 10’. Where applicable,

the joint spacing shall match the existing joint spacing.

D. All the joints shall be hand trowelled or sawcut to a depth of 1/3 the depth of the concrete

section. Sawcutting shall occur within 4 to 12 hours after concrete has hardened.

3.04 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. The expansion joint material shall go the full depth of the slab or curb and gutter.

B. Slabs: place the expansion material against buildings or previously placed concrete.

Construction joints or designed expansion joints with steel reinforcing dowels shall be

placed as shown on the plans or at a maximum interval of 80 feet in either direction of a

continuous slab.

C. Sidewalks: place the expansion material against buildings or previously placed concrete.

The expansion material shall be placed the full depth of the concrete thickness at a

maximum distance of every 200 lineal feet.

D. Curb and Gutter: place the expansion material 3 feet on either side of any catch basin or

manhole structure. The expansion material shall be placed the full depth of the curb and

gutter cross section at a maximum distance of every 200 lineal feet.

3.05 CURING

A. Cure concrete using a liquid membrane-forming compound complying with ASTM C309,

Type 2. The white-pigmented compound shall be applied at a rate of coverage not more

than 150 square feet per gallon, providing a uniform white appearance.

B. Prohibit traffic, both pedestrian and vehicular, from freshly placed concrete for a period of

not less than 72 hours. Vehicular traffic shall be excluded for such additional time as the

Engineer may direct.

3.06 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Contractor shall remove and dispose of excess materials at its own expense.

B. Liquid and solid wastes shall be contained in a leak-proof containment facility or

impermeable liner in accordance with state and federal regulations.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 8


A. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete shall be arranged and

paid for by the Owner and shall include the following, as directed by the Engineer.

1. Slump: ASTM C143; one test for each set of compressive strength test specimens.

2. Entrained Air: ASTM C231; one test for each set of compressive strength specimens.

3. Casting and Curing Concrete Test Specimens: ASTM C31; cast one set of four

standard test cylinders for each 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of concrete

placed in any one day or for each 5,000 square feet of surface area placed.

4. Compression Strength Test Specimens: ASTM C39; per set of four standard

cylinders, test one specimen at 7 days, two specimens at 28 days, and one

specimen held in reserve for later testing, if required.

5. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cubic yards, the

Engineer may waive strength test if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of

satisfactory strength is provided.

6. Slump (ASTM C143) and Air Control (ASTM C231): One sample shall be taken from

each of the first three trucks in each separate placement operation. After three

acceptable tests without failure, the frequency shall be one test for every 100 cubic

yards of concrete placed.

B. Test results will be reported in writing to the Engineer and Contractor on the same day

that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project

identification and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive

strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportion and materials; compressive breaking

strength, and type of break for both 7-day and 28-day tests.

C. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete

when compressive strength test results indicate specified concrete strengths have not

been attained. The hardened concrete will be cored as specified with ASTM C42, or by

other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any

other additional testing as may be required when unacceptable concrete is verified.

D. Irregularities, abrupt or gradual, in the finished concrete surface in excess of 1/8” (Class

A) as measured with a 5-foot straightedge, in accordance with ACI 347, shall be

corrected. The corrective action and resulting product shall be approved by the Owner

and Engineer prior to execution.

END OF SECTION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 322400 – PAVEMENT STRIPING

Page 1

SECTION 32 24 00

PAVEMENT STRIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Pavement Striping.

2. Playground Striping.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish the Engineer with the manufacturer’s certification indicating the paint used for

pavement and/or playground striping meets the requirements specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PAINT

A. Pavement striping paint shall be a fast set lead free chlorinated polyolefin (Diamond Vogel),

acrylic (Sherwin Williams) or approved equal marking paint that meets or exceeds all

current Local, State and Federal codes and guidelines.

B. The pavement colors shall be yellow for marking curbs and no parking areas; white for

parking stalls, crosswalks, directional arrows, lane dividers, and handicap insignia unless

indicated differently on the plans. The handicap insignia shall be placed over a 4’x 4’ blue

background with a white border, placed as close to the drive as possible.

C. The pavement striping paint shall meet the following physical property requirements:

Chlorinated

Type Polyolefin Acrylic

Finish: Flat Flat

Solvent MED/Heptane toluene/xylene/acetone

Solids by weight 69%, min. 70%, min

Solids by volume 46%, min. 51%, min.

Dry film thickness per coat 7 mils, min 7 mils, min

Wet film thickness per coat 16 mils, min 15 mils, min

Dry times at 70°F,ASTM D711 10 minutes 10 minutes

VOC, ASTM D3960 450 g/l max 430 g/l max.

Coverage – standard 4” line 300 ft/gal. 320 ft/gal.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 322400 – PAVEMENT STRIPING

Page 2

D. The playground striping paint shall meet the following physical property requirements:

Resin type Acrylic

Solvent Water

Solids by weight 62%, Minimum

Solids by volume 45%, Minimum

Dry film thickness 9 mils, Minimum

Dry times at 70°F and

50% Relative Humidity Track Free 45 minutes, Maximum

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION

A. Allow the paved surface to cure before painting. Apply the paint with mechanical

equipment to produce uniform, straight edges. Apply the paint in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Sweep and clean the paved surface to eliminate all loose materials and dust.

C. Protect the newly painted areas from traffic until the paint has thoroughly dried and cured.

D. Unless indicated differently on the plans, the pavement stripes shall be 4” wide and all

traffic markings will be the size and shape of the standards used within the State of

Minnesota for traffic markings.

E. Handicap parking stalls and access aisles shall be a minimum of 8’ wide.

F. Playground stripes shall be 2” wide, unless indicated differently on the plans.

G. All striping shall receive two coats of paint, unless indicated differently on the plans.

END OF SECTION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 322600 – SIGNS

Page 1

SECTION 32 26 00

SIGNS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Traffic signs.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data indicating that the materials meet the specification requirements.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Minnesota Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways.

B. Federal Highway Administration, Department of Transportation, Washington D.C.

C. Minnesota Department of Transportation (MN/DOT) Standard Specifications for


1. Section 3352, Signs, Delineators, and Markers.

2. Section 3401, Flanged Channel Sign Posts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FABRICATION, COLOR AND MATERIALS

A. Fabrication of traffic signs and markers: Conform to the Minnesota Manual for Uniform

Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways.

B. Colors: Conform to the color tolerance charts available from the Federal Highway

Administration, Department of Transportation, Washington D.C., unless otherwise

permitted or specified herein.

C. Sign base material: Sheet aluminum complying with ASTM B209 for alloy 5052-H38 or 6061-

T6, with a minimum thickness of .080 +/- .005 inch, showing no warp or twist, and when

mounted, the finished sign will lay flat against the post or mounting structure.

D. Reflective Sign Sheeting: Reflective sheeting shall meet the performance requirements of

ASTM D4956 for Type I sheeting.

E. Steel posts:




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 2

1. Posts in pavement areas shall be installed with galvanized, 6-inch diameter

Schedule 40 steel bollards filled with concrete with a ¼” thick yellow LDPE plastic

cover by Ideal Shield (877-325-0769) securely attached to the posts with

mechanical fasteners.

2. Posts in turf areas shall be a channel section consisting of hot-rolled high tensile

steel, weighing at least 2.5 pounds per foot conforming to MN/DOT 3401 with 3/8”

diameter holes and galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.

F. Hardware: Aluminum alloy or stainless steel as recommended by the manufacturer.

2.02 PARKING SIGNS

A. The signs shall meet the following criteria:

Sign No. Name Size Color

R7-8 Disability Parking 12” x 18” White on Blue

N/A No Parking-Access Aisle 12” x 18” White on Blue

N/A ADA Loading Zone 12” x 18” White on Blue

R1-1 Stop Sign 30” x 30” White on Red

N/A Busses Only 24” x 18” Red on White

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXECUTION

A. Perform no work on the jobsite until all underground utilities are located. This may require

the contractor to retain the services of a private utility locating company. Damage to

underground utilities shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense to the satisfaction of the

utility owner.

B. Sign locations on the Plans are approximate only. The final determination of the sign

locations will be made in the field by the Engineer/Owner.

C. The posts shall be plumb above the ground. The posts that are bent or otherwise damaged,

as determined by the Engineer, shall be removed from the site and replaced at the


D. Channel posts in turf shall be driven firmly into the ground. After driving, the top of the

posts shall have substantially the same cross-sectional dimensions as the body of the post.

No battered heads will be accepted. No additional compensation will be made for setting

posts that cannot be driven.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 3

E. Round posts in pavement shall be set in a 12” diameter by 48” deep concrete foundation.

The post shall be filled with concrete, extending out of the top of the pipe and finished

rounded for water drainage. The post shall have a plastic cover.

F. Unless specified otherwise, sign height and location requirements shall conform to the

Minnesota Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices, current edition and Minnesota

Accessibility Code, Chapter 1341.

G. Clean work area of all excess soil and concrete. Restore to original conditions.

END OF SECTION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 4





Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 324000 – ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT

Page 1

SECTION 32 40 00

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Basketball Goals

2. Flagpoles

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the Manufacturer’s product data and specification information to the Engineer at

least 7 days prior to installation.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. National Federation of State High School Association (NFSHSA).


A. Quality assurance personnel will perform periodic inspections during athletic equipment

installation.

B. Equipment failing to meet the specifications will be replaced with new equipment at the


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BASKETBALL GOALS

A. Goalsetter MVP basketball goal system with acrylic backboard and double state ring rim.

2.02 FLAGPOLES

A. Commercial grade 30’ tall, aluminum flagpole with internal halyard with commercial grade

flag.

B. Provide ground sleeve and surface collar.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 324000 – ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT

Page 2

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install the equipment as specified by the Manufacturer and as shown on the Plans.


A. Portable, removable, or non-fixed equipment shall be properly placed, installed, or erected

prior to acceptance by the Owner.

END OF SECTION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 325000 – FENCES AND GATES

Page 1

SECTION 32 50 00

FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Chain link fence.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A53, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and

Seamless.

B. ASTM A120, Specification for Galvanized Standard Weight (Schedule 40) Pipe.

C. ASTM A392, Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric.

D. ASTM A491, Specification for Aluminum-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric.

E. ASTM A1011, Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-

Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High

Strength.

F. ASTM B429, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube.

G. ASTM F1083, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for

Fence Structures

H. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI) Product Manual.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FENCE POSTS

A. For Standard Fences:

1. For fences 6’ or less, the pipe shall be Type 1, Schedule 40, standard weight, round

steel pipe with galvanized coating weighing not less than 1.8 oz per sq. ft. of coated

surface, complying with ASTM F1083.

B. Pipe sizing shall utilize the following requirements:

1. Posts




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 2

a. Fence height 3.5’ to 6’: 2.5” O.D.

b. Fence height 6.5’ to 10’: 3” O.D.

c. Fence height 10’ and greater: refer to Manufacturers recommendations.

2. Top, Intermediate and Bottom Rails: 1 5/8” O.D.

3. Intermediate or Diagonal Bracing: 1 5/8” O.D.

4. Gate Posts: refer to Manufacturers recommendations.

5. Gate Frames: refer to Manufacturers recommendations.

C. The above pipe diameters are the minimum allowable. The actual pipe diameters and

weights of the fence posts and rails shall be determined by the installer based on local

building codes, fence heights, wind speed design requirements and coverage of the fence

fabric with windscreens, plywood or other wind blocking materials.

2.02 FENCE FABRIC

A. For Standard Fences: Zinc coated (ASTM A392) steel wire fabric, 9 gauge, 2-inch square

with a minimum coating of 1.2 oz per sq. ft. of surface area. The top and bottom selvages

shall be knuckled, unless otherwise specified.

B. Fasteners.

1. To terminal posts:

i. Tension bars: Minimum 1/4 inch by 3/4 inch.

ii. Clamps: 12 gauge by 1 inch wide.

iii. Carriage bolts: Minimum 5/16-inch diameter.

2. To line posts: Wire: 6-gauge aluminum.

3. To rails: Wire: 6-gauge aluminum.

C. Tension and Brace Bands.

1. The tension and brace bands shall be 0.078” by 3/4” for posts less than 4” O.D. with

5/16” diameter galvanized carriage bolts.

2. The tension and brace bands shall be 0.108” by 7/8” for posts 4” O.D. and larger

with 5/16” diameter galvanized carriage bolts.

D. Tension Bars.

a. The tension bars shall be a minimum of 3/16” by 3/4” galvanized steel or vinyl coated

where used with vinyl coated fences.

E. Tie Wire.

a. The tie wire shall be 6 gauge aluminum wire.

F. Accessories.

a. Provide galvanized steel or malleable iron post caps, sleeves, clamps, barbed or razor

wire support arms, hinges, gate latches, keepers, and all other accessories required for

the complete installation of the chain link fence and gates.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 3

2.03 RAILS

A. For standard fences: Top and bottom rails shall be installed.

2.04 DOME CAPS

A. Galvanized malleable steel dome caps shall be provided at all posts.

2.05 BRACING

A. The fence bracing shall be 1-5/8 inch outside diameter Schedule 40 galvanized pipe as

required.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Remove and dispose of brush, trees, and other obstructions that interfere with construction

of the fence.

B. Lay out and measure the fence line parallel to the contour of the ground.

C. Post Setting.

1. For standard fences: Set corner, end, intermediate pull, and gate posts into

concrete footings with a minimum diameter of 12 inches and a minimum depth of

54 inches. Place the posts such that bottom of the footing is 6 inches deeper than

the bottom of the post. Place the concrete in a continuous pour and tamp around

the posts for consolidation. Line posts may be air driven to a minimum depth of 4

feet. The top of the posts shall not be deformed at completion. Replace all

deformed or damaged posts.

2. Crown the tops of the footings to shed water.

3. Space standard fence posts a maximum of 10 feet on-center.

D. Posts and Rails.

1. Set the terminal posts at the beginning and the end of each continuous, straight-

line length of fence and at abrupt changes in vertical or horizontal alignment.

2. Set line posts at intervals stated above, measured parallel to the grade of the fence.

3. Install intermediate pull posts at a maximum interval of 200 feet.

4. Install a continuous top rail. Install the top rail through loop caps on the line posts.

Provide sleeve splices in the top rail and only cut the pipe at the ends of runs.

Install a bottom rail with terminations at each post. Install middle rails as specified.

5. Provide horizontal bracing at corner posts, terminal posts, and intermediate pull

posts. Install the bracing at the mid-height of the fence, between the corner,

terminal, or pull posts and the next adjacent line post. Fasten the bracing to the

posts with brace bands and carriage bolts.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 4

E. Fabric.

1. Stretch the fabric and tension wire, if applicable, to the proper tension between the

terminal posts as recommended by the manufacturer. Fasten the fabric securely to

the framework.

2. Attach the fabric to the terminal posts with tension bar clamps and carriage bolts.

3. For standard fences: Attach the fabric to the line posts and rails with wire spaced

12 inches on-center.

4. Install the fabric a maximum of 1” above the finished elevations.

F. Adjustments.

1. Hardware and Accessories.

a. Adjust all hardware for the proper operation.

2. Repair and Replacement.

a. Repair or replace at no additional cost to the Owner all fence materials,

gates, and posts damaged by the construction work prior to the completion

and final acceptance of the work. This includes, but is not limited to, all the

work associated with the General Contractor and all Subcontractors.

G. Adjust the tension rods and brace rails for rigid installation.

H. Properly tighten all fasteners, hardware, and accessories.

I. Remove all excess materials and debris from the project site.

J. The fence installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and

performed by skilled installers experienced in fence installations.

K. Concrete.

1. The concrete shall comply with all applicable provisions of ASTM C94 with a

minimum compressive strength of 4300 psi at 28 days and a maximum aggregate

size of 3/4” (MnDOT 3Y32 mix). Refer to Section 32 20 00 for additional

requirements.

END OF SECTION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 325800 – LANDSCAPING

Page 1

SECTION 32 58 00

LANDSCAPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Topsoil

2. Fertilizer

3. Sod

4. Seed

5. Mulch

6. Hydromulch

7. Plants

8. Planting Soil

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish the Engineer with the Supplier’s or Manufacturer’s product specification data or

testing results stating the materials furnished meet the requirements of the specifications.

B. Furnish the Engineer with a certificate of compliance stating the species, sizes, quantities

furnished, and nursery supplier.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Minnesota Department of Transportation (MN/DOT) Standard and Specifications for


1. Section 2571, Plant Installation and Establishment

2. Section 2575, Establishing Turf and Controlling Erosion

3. Section 3876, Seed

4. Section 3877, Topsoil Material

5. Section 3878, Sod

6. Section 3881, Fertilizer

7. Section 3882, Mulch Material

8. Section 3884, Hydraulic Erosion Control Products

B. Minnesota Department of Transportation (MN/DOT) Seeding Manual, Current Edition.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 2

1.04 WARRANTY

A. All material shall be guaranteed by the Contractor to be in good, healthy, and vigorous

conditions of active growth typical of the species for a period of one full year following the

date of the final inspection.

B. Material that at any time during the guarantee period dies or is in obviously declining

condition shall be removed immediately and replaced as soon as favorable conditions exist.

C. At the end of the guarantee period, replace material that, in the opinion of the Engineer or

Owner, is in an unhealthy or unsightly condition. Remove rejected materials from the site

and replace as originally specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TOPSOIL

A. All topsoil shall be new and imported material. Topsoil found on the site may be used only

if approved in advance by the Engineer and Owner. The topsoil, whether it is new or

salvaged, should be screened and pulverized. The topsoil should be dry and ready to be fine

graded.

B. Sandy loam soil, reasonable free of clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 1 inch in

diameter, without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material.

2.02 FERTILIZER

A. Fertilizers shall be applied at a rate determined by the seed or sod supplier. The type of

fertilizer shall be determined based on the type and properties of the topsoil, seed or sod.

B. The Contractor shall apply the fertilizers until the turf has been established, i.e. until all

seeded areas have developed into turf or all new sod areas have developed a sound root

structure.

C. Once the turf has been established and accepted by the Engineer and Owner, the Owner

will be responsible for further fertilizing of the landscaped areas.

2.03 SOD

A. Lawn and boulevard mineral sod shall consist of densely rooted Kentucky bluegrass. The

sod shall have a minimum of 3 varieties of Kentucky Bluegrasses. The sod shall have a lush

appearance, uniform texture, and bright color throughout, weed free, containing no more

than 1/4 inch of thatch over the base soil. At least two thirds (2/3) of the grasses, as

determined by initial seeding proportions, shall be of acceptable improved type Kentucky




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 3

bluegrass varieties. Acceptable varieties include Adelphi, Monopoly, Aspen, American

Baron, Glade, Columbia, Eclipse, Fylking, Touchtown, Merit, Nassau, Midnite, and Victa.

B. Sod furnished shall be in acceptable condition upon delivery to the site. Sod strips shall not

have dry or dead edges and shall not be cut more than 24 hours in advance of delivery. The

grass height of the delivered sod shall not exceed 2 inches. Deliver and unload sod the

same day it is loaded on the delivery unit.

2.04 SEED

A. State-certified seed of the latest season’s crop. Deliver in original sealed packages bearing

the producer’s guaranteed analysis for percentages of mixtures, purity, germination, weed

and seed content, and inert material. Label the packages in conformance with the U.S.

Department of Agriculture rules and regulations under the Federal Seed Act and applicable

state seed laws. On-site seed mixing shall be done only in the presence of the Engineer.

B. The origin shall be clearly identified on the seed label for all seed types, including native

forbs.

C. The seed mix or species to be furnished and used shall be a uniform blend as stated in

MN/DOT Section 3876 and the 2014 Seeding Manual. Seed mixture 22-111 shall be used

for temporary stabilization of slopes and grading areas during construction. Seed mixtures

25-131 (Commercial Turf) shall be used in lawn areas.

Mixture No. Category Name

22-111 Mid-Term Stabilization Two-year Stabilization

25-131 (Commercial) Non-Native Grassland Low Maintenance Turf

Total 100

D. Protect the seed from moisture from the time of delivery until the time it is used. Wet or

moldy seed shall not be used.

2.05 MULCH

A. MN/DOT 3882 Type 3 Mulch: Clean grain straw (i.e. oats, wheat) that is certified by the

Minnesota Crop Improvement Association (MCIA) to be weed free. All mulch bales shall be

in air-dried condition at the time of delivery and shall have an MCIA inspection tag attached

indicating that the mulch has passed inspection.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 4

2.06 HYDROMULCH

A. MN/DOT 3884 Type - Hydraulic Mulch: Shall consist of wood cellulose fibers that shall

contain no germination or growth inhibiting factors. It shall not contain sawdust or

pulverized newspaper. It shall be dyed a color that allows for visual monitoring of its

application. It shall contain 2.5 to 5.0 percent tackifiers (Type I) by weight. The moisture

content shall not exceed 15% at the time of delivery. When washed on a #20 sieve at least

50 percent shall be retained.

2.07 PLANT STOCK

A. Plants furnished shall be Minnesota, North Dakota or South Dakota, Wisconsin, Iowa, or

Michigan nursery grown stock, and shall have been growing in a nursery for at least two

years. The term plant shall mean any or all trees, bushes, shrubs, vines, annuals or

perennials.

B. Plants to be of size and type as indicated on plans.

2.08 PLANTING SOIL

A. Highly organic blend of 1/3 peat, 1/3 black dirt, and 1/3 compost for use in ornamental

planting areas.

2.09 WATER

A. Potable (or as otherwise approved) and suitable for plant growth.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS

A. Stakes and deadmen: Sound new hardwood, treated softwood, or redwood, free of

knotholes and other defects.

B. Wire ties and guys: Two-strand, twisted, pliable galvanized iron wire not lighter than 10

gauge with zinc-coated turnbuckles. Protect tree trunks from damage by wires.

C. Wood chip mulch shall be double-shredded for even consistency; free from soil, twigs,

leaves, rock, rubble, weeds, or synthetic matter.

D. Edging: Commercial grade, black PVC edging.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 5

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SOIL PREPARATION

A. Immediately prior to placing the topsoil, scarify the existing soils to a minimum depth of 3

inches for all areas on slopes shallower than 2 horizontal to 1 vertical.

B. Perform soil preparation immediately prior to seeding or placing sod to prevent undesirable

weed growth or soil erosion.

C. Place the topsoil and spread uniformly over lawn areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches,

unless a specific depth is stated on the plans. Firm and smooth the topsoil after working

the soil.

D. Apply a starter fertilizer at the Manufacturer’s or Supplier’s recommended rates and work

into the topsoil. The lag time between seeding or placing sod and fertilizing shall not

exceed 48 hours.

E. Rake the surface until it is smooth and of uniform fine texture immediately prior to seeding

or placing sod.

3.02 SOD PLACEMENT

A. Carefully place the sod strips beginning at the bottom of the slope and progressing upward.

Place the sod strips with staggered end joints without stretching. Tightly abut the joints

between the sod strips.

B. Immediately after completing the sod placement, water and compress the sod into the

underlying soil by rolling or tamping. The initial watering and rolling or tamping shall be

sufficient to provide a firm contact and bond between the sod and the underlying soil. The

sod surface shall be level and smooth, free of humps and depressions.

C. Remove and dispose of waste sod, stones or other debris removed from the sodded area(s),

at completion of the sod placement.

D. Sod placed under the Contract shall be fertilized and maintained by the Contractor until the

sod has uniformly rooted over the landscaped areas.

3.03 SEEDING

A. The seed mixture shall be placed with a seed drill that will accurately meter the types of

seed to be planted and keep all seeds uniformly mixed during drilling. The application rate

for all seed mixes can be found in the MnDOT Seeding Manual, 2014 Edition. The drill shall

be equipped with disk furrow openers and packer assembly to compact the soil directly

over the drill row. Seeding shall be done at a right angle to the surface drainage. The




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 6

seeding shall be done with two passes over the entire area, with the second pass in a

direction at a right angle to the first pass.

B. Seeded areas shall have the seedbed firmed after seeding and prior to mulching. Soil firming

shall be done with a drag cultipacker or other approved soil firming equipment. On slopes

too steep to operate mechanical equipment, the seed shall be covered by hand raking or

other approved means, wherever feasible, prior to mulching. Accomplish the soil firming or

seed covering immediately after seeding.

C. The mulch shall be spread by mechanical means to provide a uniform distribution at an

application rate of 2.0 tons/acre of MN/DOT Type 3 Mulch.

D. Seed placed under the Contract shall be fertilized and maintained by the Contractor until

the seed has developed into a lush turf over the landscaped areas.

3.04 HYDROSEEDING

A. Mix the seed, fertilizer, and mulch material in the required amount of water to produce a

slurry mixture.

B. Type 5 Hydromulch

1. Seed mixture 100 lbs/acre

2. Mulch 2,100 lbs/acre or 100% coverage

C. Incorporate the mulch into the slurry mix after the seed and fertilizer have been thoroughly

mixed.

D. Direct the spray during the application to obtain a uniform material distribution.

E. Empty the slurry mixture within one hour after the seed is added to the tank.

F. Hydroseed placed under the Contract shall be fertilized and maintained by the Contractor

until the seed has developed into a lush turf over the landscaped areas.

3.05 PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Excavate pits, beds, and trenches with vertical sides and with the bottom of the excavation

slightly raised at the center to provide proper drainage. Loosen hard subsoils in the bottom

of the excavation.

B. For balled and burlapped trees and shrubs, make excavations at least half again as wide as

the ball diameter and equal to the ball depth. Allow for setting the ball on a 3 inch layer of

good quality topsoil.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 7

C. For container grown stock, excavate as specified for balled and burlapped stock, adjusted to

the size of the container width and depth. Cut into the sides of the root ball, approximately

1/3 through the ball to loosen the root mass prior to planting.

D. Retain a portion of the existing subsoils and thoroughly mix approximately 25% with 75%

new topsoil. Place the soil mixture under and around the new plantings.

E. Set the balled and burlapped stock on a layer of good quality topsoil and subsoil mixture,

plumb and in the center of the pit or trench with the top of the ball 3” higher than the

adjacent finished landscape elevations. Remove the burlap from the top and 1/3 the depth

of the sides of balls. Retain the burlap on the remaining 2/3 of the sides and bottom.

When the planting is set, place additional backfill around the base and sides of ball, and

work each layer to settle the backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets.

F. Fill approximately 1/2 of the excavations with the topsoil and subsoil mixture, then water

thoroughly and allow it to percolate out before placing additional backfill. Once the backfill

operations are complete, thoroughly water the plants again.

G. Set container grown stock as specified for balled and burlapped stock. Remove and dispose

of all containers.

H. Place mulch pits around all trees and plantings and within all landscaped planting beds as

required. Provide not less than a 6-inch depth of mulch and finish level with the adjacent

finished elevations.

I. Stake trees and plantings in place, as required, immediately after planting.

3.06 EDGING

B. Install PVC edging in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.07 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Keep the pavements clean and the work area in an orderly condition during landscaping

work.

B. Protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations or by

other Contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain the protection measures during

the installation and maintenance periods.

END OF SECTION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 8





Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 331000 – WATER DISTRIBUTION

Page 1

SECTION 33 10 00

WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Underground water service piping, watermains and appurtenances.

1.02 CODES

A. All work shall comply with the most current requirements of the Minnesota Department of

Health, the Minnesota Plumbing Code and all applicable codes and ordinances.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AWWA B300, Hypochlorites.

B. AWWA B301, Liquid Chlorine.

C. AWWA C500, Gate Valves for Ordinary Water Works Services.

D. ASTM D429, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property Adhesion to Rigid Substrates.

E. ASTM D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and

Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds (Type 1, Grade 1).

F. ASTM D1785, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Schedules 40,

80 and 120.

G. ASTM D2241, Standard Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR and

Class T).

H. ASTM D2609, Standard Specifications for Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe.

I. ASTM D3139, Standard Specifications for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible

Elastomeric Seals.

J. ASTM F477, Standard Specifications for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.

K. Ten States Recommended Standards for Water Works, Most Current Edition.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 2

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit for approval, complete shop drawings and details for all

couplings, valves, operators, and other special appurtenances. This required submission for

approval shall include all the manufacturer’s product data, dimensions, sizes, types,

maximum loading, and thrust anchorages.

B. The manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit stating that the valves and all materials conform

to the applicable requirements and all tests specified under the respective standard have

been performed and requirements have been met.

1.05 SITE CONDITIONS

A. The existing underground utilities, as shown on the plans, are located in accordance with

available data, but the locations may vary and cannot be guaranteed. The exact locations

shall be determined by the Contractor as the work proceeds. The excavation work shall be

done carefully so as to avoid damaging the existing utilities.

B. The Contractor shall provide for the protection, temporary removal and replacement, or

relocation of said obstructions as required for the performance of the work required in

these contract documents. No extra payment will be made for this work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE

A. ASTM D1784, Type 1, Grade 1 PVC pressure pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with

the latest revision of AWWA Standard C900. The pipe shall be Class 150, SDR 18. The

outside diameters shall conform to the outside diameters of ductile iron pipe for the various

sizes.

B. ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 PVC pressure pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with the

latest codes. The outside diameters shall conform to the outside diameters of ductile iron

pipe for the various sizes.

2.02 PVC PRESSURE PIPE JOINTS

A. The joints shall be rubber gasketed conforming to ASTM D3139.

B. The lubrication material shall be water soluble, non-objectionable in taste and odor

imparted to the water, non-supporting of bacterial growth, with no deteriorating effects on

the PVC or rubber gaskets.

2.03 DUCTILE IRON PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 3

A. All pipe, specials, and fittings shall be ductile iron conforming to ANSI A21.10. The joints

shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A21.11. The fittings shall all have bell

connections of standard AWWA dimensions or special dimensions as required, or shall be

equipped with adapters of the proper class for the size of the pipe as required by the

manufacturer. Specials and fittings shall have a pressure rating of 250 psi. Where

mechanical joints are utilized, all bolts shall be Cor-Blue T-bolts.

B. The ductile iron pipe shall be Class 52 unless otherwise noted on the plans and shall be

provided with a Portland cement lining conforming to the requirements of AWWA

C151/ANSI A21.4 for standard thickness of lining. The thickness of any cement mortar pipe

lining furnished shall not be less than the minimum thickness specified for the applicable

pipe size in the following table:

Size of Pipe Minimum Lining Thickness

12 inches or smaller 1/16 inch

16 inches 3/32 inch

C. All exterior surfaces of the pipe and fittings shall have a tar or bituminous seal coating at

least one mil thick. Spotty or thin seal coating, or poor coating adhesion, shall be cause for

rejection.

D. All joint fittings and valves shall be fastened with Cor-Blue T-bolts, as manufactured by NSS

Industries, Plymouth, Michigan, or approved equal.

E. Conductive gaskets with approved copper inserts equal to American Fastite or copper straps

shall be welded to the pipe and connected with a silicone bronze bolt. Conductors shall be

rated at 600 amps sustained current.

F. Wrap the ductile iron pipe and cast iron fittings with polyethylene plastic film having a

minimum thickness of 0.008 inches.

2.04 CONNECTIONS TO DUCTILE-IRON FITTINGS

A. Connections between ductile-iron and polyvinyl chloride pipe and cast-iron fittings or gate

valves shall be made with jointing materials recommended by the pipe manufacturer and

approved by the Engineer.

2.05 GATE VALVES

A. The gate valves shall conform to AWWA C500, designed for a minimum working pressure of

150 psi. All gate valves shall be resilient seated gate valves. The mechanical joints shall

conform to AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11-85. The gate valves furnished shall comply with the

following supplementary requirements.

1. Resilient wedge gate valves shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C509. The valves shall be

R/W resilient wedge gate valves as manufactured by Clow Corporation, or approved

equal.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 4

2. The gate valves shall have joints as specified for the piping in which they are

installed. Stems for non-rising stem assemblies shall be cast bronze with integral

collars. The non-rising stem stuffing box shall be the O-ring seal type with two rings

located above the thrust collar. The rings shall be replaceable with the valve fully

open at the full rated working pressure.

3. The gate valves shall have a clear waterway equal to the full nominal diameter of

the valve, and shall be opened by turning counterclockwise. There shall be two low

torque thrust bearings located above and below the stem collar. The stem nut shall

be separate from the wedge and shall be of solid bronze.

4. Each valve shall have an open indicating arrow, the manufacturer’s name, pressure

rating, and year of manufacture cast on the body.

5. The gate valves shall be two-faced, double disc type, with parallel seats and a 2”

operating nut opening counterclockwise.

6. The wedge shall be cast iron completely encapsulated with polyurethane rubber

(except for guide and stem area). The polyurethane rubber shall be permanently

bonded to the cast iron wedge to meet ASTM tests for rubber to metal bond (ASTM

D-429).

7. All gears on the gate valves shall be cut tooth steel gears, housed in heavy cast iron

extended type grease cases of approved design.

8. All gate valves shall have mechanical joint ends.

9. Both the interior and exterior of the body and bonnet shall be coated with fusion

bonded epoxy.

B. All the valves shall be provided with valve boxes. All valve boxes shall be of cast iron,

buffalo-type adjustable. The valve boxes shall be provided for 7.5 feet of cover, except

where greater depths are indicated on the profiles of the plans. The valve boxes shall not be

less than 5” in diameter, shall have a minimum thickness at any point of 3/16”, and shall be

provided with suitable cast iron bases and covers. The covers shall have the word “water”

cast on them.

2.06 VALVE BOXES

A. The valve boxes shall be round base, three piece cast iron, Mueller H-10357 or approved

equal, suitable for the depth of cover required by the plans or required by the city.

B. The valve boxes shall be 5-1/4” diameter and shall have a sufficient length to permit not less

than 6” adjustment above and below the required elevation when the pipe is laid to the

specified depth. The length adjustment shall be screw type.

C. The covers shall have the word “water” cast on the top.

2.07 TAPPING SLEEVE AND TAPPING VALVE

A. Tapping Sleeve and Tapping Valve: Complete assembly, including tapping sleeve, tapping

valve, and bolts and nuts. Use sleeve and valve compatible with tapping machine.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 5

1. Tapping Sleeve: Stainless steel 2-piece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new

branch connection. Sleeve may have mechanical joint ends with rubber gaskets or

sealing rings in sleeve body. Use sleeve that mates with size and type pipe material

being tapped. Outlet flange shall be size required for branch connection.

2.08 FLARED END COUPLINGS

A. The flared end couplings shall be as manufactured by Ford or approved equal. Compression

joint couplings will not be accepted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Handling

1. Thoroughly clean the interior of the pipe of all foreign materials before lowering it

into the trench.

2. Perform pipe cutting in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the

pipe. The cutting methods used shall conform to the manufacturer’s

recommendations.

B. Granular Pipe Bedding

1. The bedding material shall be a clean pit-run sand or fine gravel, free from

deleterious matter and rocks over 1” in diameter. Place the bedding material

uniformly over the trench bottom to a minimum depth of 3”. Shape the material to

give uniform support to the lower fourth of the pipe for its entire length. Make

depressions in the bedding to accommodate the joints. Carry bedding material to

6” above the top of the pipe.

C. Pipe Laying

1. Do not lay the pipe in water or when the trench or weather conditions are not

suitable for the work except by permission of the Engineer. When the work is not in

progress, securely close open ends of the pipe and fittings so that no water or other

foreign matter enters the pipe or fittings.

2. Unless shown otherwise on the plans, the pipe shall have a minimum of 7.5’ of

cover below all finished elevations and shall not be laid closer horizontally than 10’

to a sanitary sewer line. Deflections from a straight line or grade as required by

horizontal or vertical curves shall not exceed 5 degrees (a 5-degree deflection is

equivalent to an offset of approximately 1” per lineal foot of pipe). If the alignment

required deflects in excess of this limit, provide bends and fittings or shorter lengths

of pipe until these conditions are met. Brace bends and fittings in the pipe with

concrete thrust blocks poured in place against undisturbed earth.

D. Gate Valves and Valve Boxes

1. Install where shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 6

2. Set the gate valves and valve boxes plumb and center the valve boxes on the valves.

Carefully place and compact fill materials around the valve box for a distance of 4’

on all sides of the box, or to the undisturbed trench face, whichever is less. Set the

top of the valve box at the elevation of the existing ground or as shown on the

plans.

3. Post indicator valves shall be maintained in a plumb position with 36” between the

finish ground elevation and the top of the valve.

3.02 SANITARY SEWER, STORM SEWER, AND WATER CROSSINGS

A. Water pipe crossing sewers shall be laid to provide a separation of at least 12” between the

bottom of the water pipe and the top of the sewer. When local conditions prevent a vertical

separation as described, the following construction shall be used.

1. Construct the sewers of materials approved for under building installation.

2. Protect the water pipes passing under sewers by providing a vertical separation of

at least 18” between the bottom of the sewer and the top of the water pipe.

3. Provide adequate structural support for the sewers to prevent excessive deflection

of the joints and settling on and breaking the water pipe. The length of water piping

shall be centered at the point of crossing the sewer pipe so that the joints will be

equidistant from the crossing.

3.03 STERILIZATION

A. Sterilize each completed portion of the water pipe installation with chlorine before use for

domestic purposes.

B. The materials used may be either liquid chlorine conforming to AWWA B301 or

hypochlorites conforming to AWWA B300.

C. The amount of dosage shall provide a minimum of 50 parts per million of chlorine. The

chlorine solution shall remain in the pipe for a maximum of 24 hours before the system is

flushed. Open and close the valves in the mains being sterilized a minimum of three times

during the contact period.

D. After the contact period is over, thoroughly flush the pipe with clean water until the residual

chlorine content is less than one part per million.

E. Extreme care shall be taken during the sterilizing operation to ensure that a strong chlorine

solution does not enter the existing water supply.

3.04 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF WATER MAINS

A. After the pipe has been laid, including fittings, valves and blocking, all newly-laid pipe or any

valved section thereof, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer, shall be subject to




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 7

hydrostatic pressure of 150 pounds per square inch. The duration of each such test shall be

at least two hours.

B. Each section of pipe to be tested shall be filled with water and all air expelled at the highest

point. The required taps to expel air or to fill the water main shall be supplied and installed

by the Contractor and shall be ¾ inch and shall include an approved service saddle when

required.

The test apparatus shall be applied at the lowest elevation on the section to be tested. The

apparatus shall be connected to the pipe at a service tap or special tap location.

The pressure gauge shall be a standard pressure gauge. The dial shall register from 0 – 200

psi and have a dial size of 4 ½ inches with 1 psi increments.

The hydrostatic test, pressure requirement for an acceptable test shall be a maximum

pressure drop of 0 psi during the two hour pressure test.

If this test requirement cannot be met, the Contractor shall investigate the cause, make

corrections, and retest until the pressure drop requirement can be met.

Only if several consecutive tests indicate a consistent pressure drop and only after the

Contractor has made numerous attempts to resolve the problem, acceptable to the

Engineer, may the Contractor request in writing and the Engineer consider the use of the

leakage test. The leakage test may be performed by the Contractor to determine the

magnitude of the leak. However, meeting the leakage allowance shall not automatically be

considered acceptance, in lieu of the pressure test, for the section being tested. Final

acceptance shall be at the discretion of the Engineer.

When allowed, the leakage test shall be performed in accordance with AWWA C-600,

Section 4.1.5, 4.1.6 and the line will be accepted as per Section 4.1.7.

3.05 ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY TESTS

A. The contractor shall perform a conductivity test within one week upon completion of

pressure testing on the pipe to establish that electrical locating of the line may be carried

out in the future.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of the installation of the water piping and appurtenances, remove excess

materials, equipment, temporary structures, and debris resulting from the construction

work.

END OF SECTION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 8





Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING

SECTION 334000 – STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM

Page 1

SECTION 33 40 00

STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Storm sewer pipe.

2. Castings.

3. Adjusting rings.

4. Flared end sections.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Minnesota Plumbing Code published by the Minnesota Department of Health, latest

edition.

B. ASTM A48; Specification for Gray Iron Castings.

C. ASTM A929; Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dipped

Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe

D. ASTM A536; Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

E. ASTM C76; Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe.

F. ASTM C443; Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe Using

Rubber Gaskets.

G. ASTM C478; Specification for Pre-cast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections.

H. ASTM C923; Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced

Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals.

I. ASTM D3034; Specification for Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

J. ASTM D3212; Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible

Elastomeric Seals.

K. ASTM F1336; Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Gasketed Sewer Fittings

L. AASHTO M294; Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (12” to 48”).




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 2

M. AASHTO M36; Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic Coated, for Sewers and Drains

N. AASHTO MP7; Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (54” to 60”).


A. Quality assurance personnel shall be at the project site on an intermittent basis during the

storm drainage system placement.


A. Inspect the materials delivered to the site for damage and store the materials with a

minimum of handling. The materials shall be kept under cover and out of the direct

sunlight. Do not store the materials directly on the ground. Keep the inside of the pipes

and fittings free from dirt and debris.


A. Quality assurance personnel shall be at the project site on an intermittent basis during the

storm sanitary sewer system placement.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STORM SEWER PIPE

A. All pipe shall be new and unused.

B. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe: ASTM D3034 SDR35.

C. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe: ASTM D1785 Schedule 40.

2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE SECTIONS

A. Precast concrete manhole risers, base sections, and tops: ASTM C478.

B. Boot connections: ASTM C923.

C. Reinforced Plastic Steps: MnDOT STD Plate 4180J.

2.03 GASKETS

A. Gaskets and pipe ends for rubber gasket joints: ASTM C443.

B. Elastomeric seals (gaskets) for joining plastic pipe: ASTM D3212.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 3

C. Rubber gaskets for joints between manhole sections: ASTM C443.

D. Gaskets for PVC sewer fittings: ASTM F1336.

E. Rubber gaskets for structure to pipe connections: ASTM C923.

2.04 CASTINGS

A. Precast concrete manhole covers, grates, and boxes: Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 35B.

B. Uniform quality, free of blowholes, shrinkage, distortion, and other defects.

C. The product numbers are as manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company and are shown on

the Plans. Standard castings differing in non-essential details may be acceptable if

approved by the Engineer.

2.05 ADJUSTING RINGS

A. Precast concrete adjusting rings; MnDOT STD Plate 4010H.

B. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) adjusting rings; MnDOT TM 02-21-TS-06.

2.06 FLARED END SECTIONS

A. Flared end material shall match joining pipe material.

B. Precast concrete apron; MnDOT STD Plate 3100G and 3110G.

C. Galvanized steel apron; MnDOT STD Plate 3123J.

D. High density polyethylene (HDPE); ASTM D3350-213320C, Hancor Hi-Q or equal.

E. All flared end sections shall have galvanized steel trash guards, unless noted otherwise.

2.07 PIPE BEDDING MATERIAL

A. The pipe bedding shall consist of clean pit-run sand or fine gravel, free from deleterious

matter and rocks over 1 inch in diameter.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Shape the bottom of the trench to give substantially uniform circumferential support to the

lower fourth of each pipe allowing for pipe bedding material. Pipe laying shall proceed up-




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 4

grade with the groove (bell) ends in the up-grade direction. Adjust the tongues in grooves

to produce a uniform space. Lay each pipe true to line and grade to form a close concentric

joint with the adjoining pipe. Blocking or wedging between tongues and grooves will not be

permitted. As the work progresses, clean the interior of the pipe free of dirt and

extraneous materials.

B. Keep the trenches free from water until the pipe jointing is completed. Do not lay the pipe

when conditions of the trench or the weather are unsuitable for such work. Keep the open

ends of the pipe and fittings securely closed at all times when the work is not in progress.

C. The last three sections of pipe not entering a catch basin manhole are to be fastened

together with an anchor bolt system.

D. The bedding material shall be placed uniformly over the trench bottom to a depth of not

less than 3 inches. The bedding shall be shaped to provide uniform support to the lower

fourth of the pipe for its entire length. Depressions shall be made in the bedding material

to accommodate the joints. The pipe bedding material shall be carried to 6 inches above

the top of the pipe. The remaining trench backfill material shall be on-site material similar

in composition to the surrounding subsoils.

3.02 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Make joints with rubber gaskets. Clean and dry the surfaces to receive lubricants, cements,

or adhesives. Affix gaskets to the pipe not more than 24 hours prior to the installation of

the pipe. Protect the gaskets from sun, wind, dust or other deleterious agents at all times.

B. Before the installation of the pipe, inspect gaskets and remove and replace loose or

improperly attached gaskets. Align each pipe section with the previously installed pipe

section and pull the joint together.

C. If the gasket becomes loose while pulling the joint, and can be seen through the exterior

joints, recessed to within one inch of closure, remove the pipe, and remake the joint.

3.03 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION – PRECAST CONCRETE

A. For pre-cast concrete construction provide a smooth finish to the inside joints of pre-cast

concrete manholes and catch basins.

B. Provide a hole greater in diameter than the pipe at pipe entrances to the pre-cast concrete

structures. Install watertight connector in the annular space between the pipe and pre-cast

concrete manhole.

C. Lay sections of the structures in a full mortar bed. Keep the masonry materials and mortar

at a temperature above freezing until the mortar has set up sufficiently to prevent damage

by freezing.




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 5

D. The mortar shall be composed of 1 part Portland cement and 3 parts of washed and

screened sand with sufficient water to make a workable mix.

E. The top 8 inches of the structures shall be made of concrete rings 2 inches thick. Lay the

concrete adjusting rings in a full bed of mortar 1/4 inch to 3/4 inch thick.

F. Set the manhole or catch basin frames and lids / grates flush with the existing elevations

shown on the Plans. Place the frames upon a full bed of mortar and shim to the correct

elevation with suitable concrete wedges and mortar.


A. Type of pipe and size will be verified during installation.

B. Installation methods and techniques will be reviewed, to ensure pipe is not damaged during

placement.

C. Check each straight run of pipe for gross deficiencies by holding a light in the manhole or

catch basin. The light shall show a practically full circle through the pipe when viewed from

the adjoining end of the line.

D. Leakage testing shall be performed on new lines within 10 feet of buildings and water lines

by the Contractor at his own expense. Testing may be by Air Test Method in accordance

with the Minnesota Plumbing Code or the Hydrostatic Test Method in accordance with the

City Engineers Association of Minnesota standard specifications

END OF SECTION




Comm. No. 483901

LARSON ENGINEERING


Page 6
